HFSS User Guide

1-1
ANSYS, Inc. Proprietary

2009 ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved.
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Ansoft HFSS User Guide
Introduction
1-2
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
Training Manual Training Manual
1-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Inventory Number: 002704
3
rd
Edition
HFSS Release: 11.1
Published Date: February 20, 2009
Registered Trademarks:
ANSYS
is a registered trademark of SAS IP Inc.

All other product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective manufacturers.
Disclaimer Notice:
This document has been reviewed and approved in accordance with the ANSYS, Inc.
Documentation Review and Approval Procedures. This ANSYS Inc. software product (the
Program) and program documentation (Documentation) are furnished by ANSYS, Inc. under an
ANSYS Software License Agreement that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying,
length and nature of use, warranties, disclaimers and remedies, and other provisions. The
Program and Documentation may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that
License Agreement.
Copyright 2008 SAS IP, Inc.
Proprietary data. Unauthorized use, distribution, or duplication is prohibited.
All Rights Reserved.
Training Manual
Ansoft HFSS for SI User Guide
Introduction
1-3
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Table of Contents
1. Introduction 1-1
Table of Contents 1-3
Welcome to Ansoft HFSS 1-4
Getting Help 1-7
Ansoft Desktop 1-9
Simulation Overview 1-18
2. Simulation Basics 2-1
3. Boundary Conditions 3-1
4. Appendix Boundary Conditions 4-1
5. Examples Antenna
UHF Probe 5.1
Conical Horn 5.2
Probe Fed Patch 5.3
Slot Coupled Patch 5.4
Endfire Waveguide Array 5.5
6. Examples Microwave
Magic T 6.1
Coax Connector 6.2
180 Ring Hybrid 6.3
Coax Stub 6.4
Microstrip Wave Port 6.5
Ferrite Circulator 6.6
7. Examples Filters
Bandpass Filter 7.1
8. Examples Signal Integrity
LVDS Differential Pair 8.1
Segmented Return Path 8.2
Non-ideal Planes 8.3
Return Path 8.4
9. Examples On-Chip
Spiral Inductor 9.1
Introduction
1-4
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Welcome to Ansoft HFSS
What is HFSS?
HFSS is a high-performance full-wave electromagnetic(EM) field simulator for arbitrary 3D volumetric passive device
modeling that takes advantage of the familiar Microsoft Windows graphical user interface. It integrates simulation,
visualization, solid modeling, and automation in an easy-to-learn environment where solutions to your 3D EM problems
are quickly and accurately obtained. Ansoft HFSS employs the Finite Element Method(FEM), adaptive meshing, and
brilliant graphics to give you unparalleled performance and insight to all of your 3D EM problems. Ansoft HFSS can be
used to calculate parameters such as S-Parameters, Resonant Frequency, and Fields. Typical uses include:
Package Modeling BGA, QFP, Flip-Chip
PCB Board Modeling Power/Ground planes, Mesh Grid Grounds, Backplanes
Silicon/GaAs - Spiral Inductors, Transformers
EMC/EMI Shield Enclosures, Coupling, Near- or Far-Field Radiation
Antennas/Mobile Communications Patches, Dipoles, Horns, Conformal Cell Phone Antennas, Quadrafilar Helix, Specific
Absorption Rate(SAR), Infinite Arrays, Radar Cross Section(RCS), Frequency Selective Surfaces(FSS)
Connectors Coax, SFP/XFP, Backplane, Transitions
Waveguide Filters, Resonators, Transitions, Couplers
Filters Cavity Filters, Microstrip, Dielectric
HFSS is an interactive simulation system whose basic mesh element is a tetrahedron. This allows you to solve any
arbitrary 3D geometry, especially those with complex curves and shapes, in a fraction of the time it would take using
other techniques.
The name HFSS stands for High Frequency Structure Simulator. Ansoft pioneered the use of the Finite Element
Method(FEM) for EM simulation by developing/implementing technologies such as tangential vector finite elements,
adaptive meshing, and Adaptive Lanczos-Pade Sweep(ALPS). Today, HFSS continues to lead the industry with
innovations such as Modes-to-Nodes and Full-Wave Spice.
Ansoft HFSS has evolved over a period of years with input from many users and industries. In industry, Ansoft HFSS
is the tool of choice for high-productivity research, development, and virtual prototyping.
Introduction
1-5
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Installing the Ansoft HFSS software
System Requirements
For up-to-date information, refer to the HFSS Installation Guide
Installing the Ansoft HFSS Software
For up-to-date information, refer to the HFSS Installation Guide
Starting Ansoft HFSS
1. Click the Microsoft Start button, select Programs, and select the Ansoft, HFSS 11 program group. Click HFSS 11.
2. Or Double click on the HFSS 11 icon on the Windows Desktop
NOTE:YoushouldmakebackupcopiesofallHFSSprojectscreate NOTE:YoushouldmakebackupcopiesofallHFSSprojectscreate NOTE:YoushouldmakebackupcopiesofallHFSSprojectscreate NOTE:YoushouldmakebackupcopiesofallHFSSprojectscreatedwitha dwitha dwitha dwitha
previousversionofthesoftwarebeforeopeningtheminHFSSv11 previousversionofthesoftwarebeforeopeningtheminHFSSv11 previousversionofthesoftwarebeforeopeningtheminHFSSv11 previousversionofthesoftwarebeforeopeningtheminHFSSv11
Introduction
1-6
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Web Update
WebUpdate
This feature allows you to update any existing Ansoft software from the WebUpdate window. This feature automatically
scans your system to find any Ansoft software, and then allows you to download any updates if they are available.
Introduction
1-7
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Help
Getting Help
If you have any questions while you are using Ansoft HFSS you can find answers in several ways:
Ansoft HFSS Online Help provides assistance while you are working.
To get help about a specific, active dialog box, click the Help button in the dialog box or press the F1 key.
Select the menu item Help > Contents to access the online help system.
Tooltips are available to provide information about tools on the toolbars or dialog boxes. When you hold the
pointer over a tool for a brief time, a tooltip appears to display the name of the tool.
As you move the pointer over a tool or click a menu item, the Status Bar at the bottom of the Ansoft HFSS
window provides a brief description of the function of the tool or menu item.
The Ansoft HFSS Getting Started guide provides detailed information about using HFSS to create and solve
3D EM projects.
Ansoft Technical Support
To contact Ansoft technical support staff in your geographical area, please log on to the Ansoft corporate
website, www.ansoft.com and select Contact.
Your Ansoft sales engineer may also be contacted in order to obtain this information.
Visiting the Ansoft Web Site
If your computer is connected to the Internet, you can visit the Ansoft Web site to learn more about the Ansoft company
and products.
From the Ansoft Desktop
Select the menu item Help > Ansoft Corporate Website to access the Online Technical Support (OTS)
system.
From your Internet browser
Visit www.ansoft.com
Introduction
1-8
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Help
For Technical Support
The following link will direct you to the Ansoft Support Page. The Ansoft Support Pages provide additional
documentation, training, and application notes.
Web Site: http://www.ansoft.com/support.cfm
Technical Support:
9-4 EST:
Pittsburgh, PA
(412) 261-3200 x0 Ask for Technical Support
Burlington, MA
9-4 PST:
San Jose, CA
Portland, OR
(503) 906-7944
Irvine, CA
(714) 417-9311 x6
Introduction
1-9
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Ansoft Desktop Terms
The Ansoft HFSS Desktop has several optional panels:
A Project Manager which contains a design tree which lists the structure of the project.
A Message Manager that allows you to view any errors or warnings that occur before you begin a simulation.
A Property Window that displays and allows you to change model parameters or attributes.
A Progress Window that displays solution progress.
A 3D Modeler Window which contains the model and model tree for the active design.
Introduction
1-10
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Ansoft HFSS Desktop
Menu Menu Menu Menu
bar bar bar bar
Progress Progress Progress Progress
Window Window Window Window
PropertyWindow PropertyWindow PropertyWindow PropertyWindow
Message Message Message Message
Manager Manager Manager Manager
Project Project Project Project
withproject withproject withproject withproject
tree tree tree tree
Status Status Status Status
bar bar bar bar
3DModeler 3DModeler 3DModeler 3DModeler
Toolbars Toolbars Toolbars Toolbars
CoordinateEntryFields CoordinateEntryFields CoordinateEntryFields CoordinateEntryFields
Introduction
1-11
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Project Manager
Design Design Design Design
DesignResults DesignResults DesignResults DesignResults
DesignSetup DesignSetup DesignSetup DesignSetup
DesignAutomation DesignAutomation DesignAutomation DesignAutomation
Parametric Parametric Parametric Parametric
Optimization Optimization Optimization Optimization
Sensitivity Sensitivity Sensitivity Sensitivity
Statistical Statistical Statistical Statistical
ProjectManagerWindow ProjectManagerWindow ProjectManagerWindow ProjectManagerWindow
Introduction
1-12
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Property Window
PropertyWindow PropertyWindow PropertyWindow PropertyWindow
Propertytabs Propertytabs Propertytabs Propertytabs
Property Property Property Property
buttons buttons buttons buttons
table table table table
Introduction
1-13
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Ansoft 3D Modeler
Edge Edge Edge Edge
Vertex Vertex Vertex Vertex
Plane Plane Plane Plane
CoordinateSystem(CS) CoordinateSystem(CS) CoordinateSystem(CS) CoordinateSystem(CS)
Origin Origin Origin Origin
Face Face Face Face
Model Model Model Model
3DModelerWindow 3DModelerWindow 3DModelerWindow 3DModelerWindow
Graphics Graphics Graphics Graphics
area area area area
designtree designtree designtree designtree
Contextmenu Contextmenu Contextmenu Contextmenu
Introduction
1-14
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3D Modeler Design Tree
GroupedbyMaterial GroupedbyMaterial GroupedbyMaterial GroupedbyMaterial
ObjectView ObjectView ObjectView ObjectView
Material Material Material Material
Object Object Object Object
ObjectCommand ObjectCommand ObjectCommand ObjectCommand
History History History History
Introduction
1-15
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Design Windows
Design Windows
In the Ansoft HFSS Desktop, each project can have multiple designs and each design is displayed in a separate
window.
You can have multiple projects and design windows open at the same time. Also, you can have multiple views of the
same design visible at the same time.
To arrange the windows, you can drag them by the title bar, and resize them by dragging a corner or border. Also, you
can select one of the following menu options: Window >Cascade, Window >Tile Vertically, or Window > Tile
Horizontally.
To organize your Ansoft HFSS window, you can iconize open designs. Click the Iconize ** symbol in the upper right
corner of the document border. An icon appears in the lower part of the Ansoft HFSS window. If the icon is not visible,
it may be behind another open document. Resize any open documents as necessary. Select the menu item Window
> Arrange Icons to arrange them at the bottom of the Ansoft HFSS window.
Select the menu item Window > Close All to close all open design. You are prompted to Save unsaved designs.
Designicons Designicons Designicons Designicons
Iconize Iconize Iconize Iconize
Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol
Introduction
1-16
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Toolbars
Toolbars
The toolbar buttons are shortcuts for frequently used commands. Most of the available toolbars are displayed in this
illustration of the Ansoft HFSS initial screen, but your Ansoft HFSS window probably will not be arranged this way. You
can customize your toolbar display in a way that is convenient for you.
Some toolbars are always displayed; other toolbars display automatically when you select a document of the related
type. For example, when you select a 2D report from the project tree, the 2D report toolbar displays.
To display or hide individual toolbars:
Right-click the Ansoft HFSS window frame.
A list of all the toolbars is displayed. The toolbars with a check mark beside them are visible; the toolbars without
a check mark are hidden. Click the toolbar name to turn its display on or off
To make changes to the toolbars, select the menu item Tools > Customize. See Customize and Arrange Toolbars
on the next page.
Introduction
1-17
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Toolbars
Customize and Arrange Toolbars
To customize toolbars:
Select the menu item Tools > Customize, or right-click the Ansoft HFSS window frame and click Customize at
the bottom of the toolbar list.
In the Customize dialog, you can do the following:
View a Description of the toolbar commands
1.Select an item from the Component pull-down list
2.Select an item from the Category list
3.Using the mouse click on the Buttons to display the Description
4.Click the Close button when you are finished
Toggle the visibility of toolbars
1.From the Toolbar list, toggle the check boxes to control the visibility of the toolbars
2.Click the Close button when you are finished
Introduction
1-18
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Overview
Ansoft HFSS Desktop
The Ansoft HFSS Desktop provides an intuitive, easy-to-use interface for developing passive RF device models.
Creating designs, involves the following:
1. Parametric Model Generation creating the geometry, boundaries and excitations
2. Analysis Setup defining solution setup and frequency sweeps
3. Results creating 2D reports and field plots
4. Solve Loop - the solution process is fully automated
To understand how these processes co-exist, examine the illustration shown on the next page.
Introduction
1-19
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Overview
SolutionType SolutionType SolutionType SolutionType
Boundaries Boundaries Boundaries Boundaries
Excitations Excitations Excitations Excitations
Mesh Mesh Mesh Mesh
Operations Operations Operations Operations
Analysis Analysis Analysis Analysis
SolutionSetup SolutionSetup SolutionSetup SolutionSetup
FrequencySweep FrequencySweep FrequencySweep FrequencySweep
ParametricModel ParametricModel ParametricModel ParametricModel
Geometry/Materials Geometry/Materials Geometry/Materials Geometry/Materials
Results Results Results Results
2DReports 2DReports 2DReports 2DReports
Fields Fields Fields Fields
Mesh Mesh Mesh Mesh
Refinement Refinement Refinement Refinement
Solve Solve Solve Solve
Update Update Update Update
Converged Converged Converged Converged
Analyze Analyze Analyze Analyze
Finished Finished Finished Finished
SolveLoop SolveLoop SolveLoop SolveLoop
NO NO NO NO
YES YES YES YES
Introduction
1-20
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Opening a Design
Opening a HFSS project
This section describes how to open a new or existing project.
Opening a New project
To open a new project:
1. In an Ansoft HFSS window, select the menu item File > New.
2. Select the menu Project > Insert HFSS Design.
Opening an Existing HFSS project
To open an existing project:
1. In an Ansoft HFSS window,
select the menu File > Open.
Use the Open dialog to select
the project.
2. Click Open to open the project
Opening an Existing Project from Explorer
You can open a project directly from the Microsoft Windows Explorer.
To open a project from Windows Explorer, do one of the following:
Double-click on the name of the project in Windows Explorer.
Right-click the name of the project in Windows Explorer and select Open from the shortcut menu.
Introduction
1-21
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Set Solution Type
Set Solution Type
This section describes how to set the Solution Type. The Solution Type defines the type of results, how the excitations
are defined, and the convergence. The following Solution Types are available:
1. Driven Modal - calculates the modal-based S-parameters. The S-matrix solutions will be expressed in terms of
the incident and reflected powers of waveguide modes.
2. Driven Terminal - calculates the terminal-based S-parameters of multi-conductor transmission line ports. The S-
matrix solutions will be expressed in terms of terminal voltages and currents.
3. Eignemode calculate the eigenmodes, or resonances, of a structure. The Eigenmode solver finds the resonant
frequencies of the structure and the fields at those resonant frequencies.
Convergence
Driven Modal Delta S for modal S-Parameters. This was the only convergence method available for Driven
Solutions in previous versions.
Driven Terminal Delta S for the single-ended or differential nodal S-Parameters.
Eigenmode - Delta F
To set the solution type:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Solution Type
2. Solution Type Window:
1. Choose one of the following:
1.Driven Modal
2.Driven Terminal
3.Eigenmode
2. Click the OK button
Introduction
1-22
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Converting older files
Converting Older HFSS file to HFSS v11
Because of changes to the HFSS files with the development of HFSS v11, opening a HFSS document from an earlier
release may take more time than you are used to experiencing. However, once the file has been opened and saved,
subsequent opening time will return to normal
Ansoft HFSS v11 provides a way for you to automatically convert your HFSS projects from an earlier version to the
HFSS v11 format.
To access HFSS projects in an earlier version.
From HFSS v11,
1. Select the menu item File > Open
2. Open dialog
1.Files of Type: Ansoft HFSS Project Files (.hfss)
2.Browse to the existing project and select the .hfss file
3.Click the Open button
1-1
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Chapter 2 Simulation Basics
Ansoft HFSS - User Guide
Introduction
1-2
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
What is HFSS (High Frequency Structure Simulator)?
HFSS is the industry-standard software for S-parameter, full-wave SPICE extraction and
electromagnetic simulation of high-frequency and high-speed components. HFSS is widely used for
the design of on-chip embedded passives, PCB interconnects, antennas, RF/microwave components,
and high-frequency IC packages.
HFSS improves engineering productivity, reduces development time, and better assures first-pass
design success. The latest release of HFSS delivers significant productivity gains to Microwave/RF
engineers and expands electromagnetic co-design to a new segment of engineers working in the
areas of RF/analog IC and multi-gigabit designs as well as EMI/EMC.
Introduction
1-3
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
GUI GUI GUI GUI
Mesh Mesh Mesh Mesh Solver Solver Solver Solver
Introduction
1-4
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
HFSS Methodology
HFSS uses the Finite Element Method (FEM) to solve Maxwells equations.
The primary advantage of the FEM for solving partial differential equations lies in the ability of the basic building blocks
used to discretize the model to confrom to arbitrary geometry.
The arbitrary shape of the basic building block (tetrahedron) also allows HFSS to generate a coarse mesh where fewer
cells are needed to yield an accuate solution, while creating a finely discretized mesh where the field is rapidly varying
or higher accuaracy is needed to obtain an accurate global solution.
The FEM has been a standard for solving electromagnetic problems since the
inception of HFSS in 1990.
The FEM has been a standard for solving problems in structure mechanics since the mid 1950s.
Tetrahedron Tetrahedron Tetrahedron Tetrahedron
Introduction
1-5
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
HFSS - Technology
Tangential Vector Finite Elements
Transfinite Element Method
Adaptive Meshing
Vertex:Explicitly Vertex:Explicitly Vertex:Explicitly Vertex:Explicitly
Solved Solved Solved Solved
Edge:Explicitly Edge:Explicitly Edge:Explicitly Edge:Explicitly
Solved Solved Solved Solved
Face: Face: Face: Face:
Interpolated Interpolated Interpolated Interpolated
Initial Initial Initial Initial Converged Converged Converged Converged
Introduction
1-6
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
The Solve
Create Initial
Mesh
Solve fields using the
Finite Element Method
Max(| S|)<goal?
Calculate local
Solution error
Generate New Mesh
Calculate broad band
s-parameters (if desired)
no
yes
Start
HFSS Automated solution process
Introduction
1-7
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1D FEM Example
The finite element method (FEM) can be used to approximate the
unknown curve F(x).
The model is discretized into 6 individual cells. w
0
w
6
are the
piecewise linear basis functions from which the approximate
solution will be built.
x
F(x)
1
w
1
1
0
2
w
2
3
w
3
4
w
4
5
w
5
6
w
6
w
0
Introduction
1-8
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1D FEM Example
In the FEM, the unknown function is expressed as a weighted sum of the
piecewise continuous basis functions.
x
F(x)
1
Node 1 2 3 4 5 6
F(x)= a w
i i
TheapproximatesolutionresultingfromtheFEM TheapproximatesolutionresultingfromtheFEM TheapproximatesolutionresultingfromtheFEM TheapproximatesolutionresultingfromtheFEM
calculationis calculationis calculationis calculationisF(x) shownasadottedline. shownasadottedline. shownasadottedline. shownasadottedline.
Introduction
1-9
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
A key feature of the FEM, as it is implemented in HFSS, is the ability to locally
determine the error. Recall that F(x) is not known, but the ERROR can be
determined
1
.
x
F(x)
Node 1 2 3 4 5 6
1D FEM Example
1
D. K. Sun, Z. Cendes, J.-Fa Lee, Adaptive Mesh Refinement, h-Version, for Solving Multiport
Microwave Devices in Three Dimensions, IEEE Trans Magnetics, pp 1596-1599, Vol. 36, N.4, July 2000
Error!
F(x)= a w
i i
Introduction
1-10
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1D FEM Example
The mesh density is increased where the error is largest. Hence, the final
(and computationally most expensive) solution will have a mesh that yields
the greatest accuracy with the fewest possible mesh cells.
x
F(x)
1
Node 1 2 3 4
5
6 7
F(x)= a w
i i
Introduction
1-11
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
The key to success
Finite elements and adaptive meshing
Optimal, geometrically conformal mesh created automatically by the
software
Remove requirements for meshing expertise
Vertex:ExplicitlySolved Vertex:ExplicitlySolved Vertex:ExplicitlySolved Vertex:ExplicitlySolved
Edge:ExplicitlySolved Edge:ExplicitlySolved Edge:ExplicitlySolved Edge:ExplicitlySolved
Face:Interpolated Face:Interpolated Face:Interpolated Face:Interpolated
Introduction
1-12
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Adaptive Meshing - Example
Example
11.5GHz patch antenna
Mesh elements concentrate at the perimeter of the patch
Optimal mesh automatically generated by HFSS
Introduction
1-13
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Quick Start
Quick Example Coax Tee
HFSS High Frequency Structure
Simulator
Full-Wave 3D field solver
Solves for the fields in an arbitrary volume
CoaxDielectric CoaxDielectric CoaxDielectric CoaxDielectric
CoaxCenterPin CoaxCenterPin CoaxCenterPin CoaxCenterPin
OuterBoundary OuterBoundary OuterBoundary OuterBoundary
CoaxShield CoaxShield CoaxShield CoaxShield
Introduction
1-14
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
HFSS Start to Finish
The Process
SolutionType SolutionType SolutionType SolutionType
Boundaries Boundaries Boundaries Boundaries
Excitations Excitations Excitations Excitations
Mesh Mesh Mesh Mesh
SolutionSetup SolutionSetup SolutionSetup SolutionSetup
FrequencySweep FrequencySweep FrequencySweep FrequencySweep
ParametricModel ParametricModel ParametricModel ParametricModel
Geometry/Materials Geometry/Materials Geometry/Materials Geometry/Materials
2DReports 2DReports 2DReports 2DReports
Fields Fields Fields Fields
Mesh Mesh Mesh Mesh
Update Update Update Update
NO NO NO NO
YES YES YES YES
Introduction
1-15
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Starting HFSS
Click the Microsoft Start button, select Programs, and select Ansoft > HFSS 11 > HFSS 11
Or Double click on the HFSS 11 icon on the Windows Desktop
Adding a Design
When you first start HFSS a new project with a new design will be automatically added to the Project Tree.
Toincludeadditionaldesignsintoanexistingproject,selectthemenuitemProject>InsertHFSSDesign Project>InsertHFSSDesign Project>InsertHFSSDesign Project>InsertHFSSDesign
Alternativelytoopenanewprojectwithanewdesignmanually,selectthemenuitemFile>New File>New File>New File>New. .. .
Toolbar:InsertHFSSDesign Toolbar:InsertHFSSDesign Toolbar:InsertHFSSDesign Toolbar:InsertHFSSDesign
Introduction
1-16
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Ansoft Desktop
Menu Menu Menu Menu
bar bar bar bar
Progress Progress Progress Progress
Message Message Message Message
withproject withproject withproject withproject
tree tree tree tree
Status Status Status Status
bar bar bar bar
Toolbars Toolbars Toolbars Toolbars
Introduction
1-17
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Project Manager
Ansoft Desktop Project Manager
Multiple Designs per Project
Multiple Projects per Desktop
Integrated Optimetrics Setup
Requires License for Analysis
DesignResults DesignResults DesignResults DesignResults
DesignSetup DesignSetup DesignSetup DesignSetup
DesignAutomation DesignAutomation DesignAutomation DesignAutomation
Parametric Parametric Parametric Parametric
Optimization Optimization Optimization Optimization
Sensitivity Sensitivity Sensitivity Sensitivity
Statistical Statistical Statistical Statistical
ProjectManagerWindow ProjectManagerWindow ProjectManagerWindow ProjectManagerWindow
Introduction
1-18
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3D Modeler
Edge Edge Edge Edge
Vertex Vertex Vertex Vertex
Plane Plane Plane Plane
CoordinateSystem(CS) CoordinateSystem(CS) CoordinateSystem(CS) CoordinateSystem(CS)
Origin Origin Origin Origin
Face Face Face Face
ModelerWindow ModelerWindow ModelerWindow ModelerWindow
Graphics Graphics Graphics Graphics
area area area area
Modeler Modeler Modeler Modeler
designtree designtree designtree designtree
Contextmenu Contextmenu Contextmenu Contextmenu
Introduction
1-19
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Set Solution Type
To set the solution type:
Select the menu item HFSS > Solution Type
Solution Type Window:
Choose Driven Terminal
Click the OK button
HFSS - Solution Types
Driven Modal - calculates the modal-based S-parameters. The S-matrix solutions will be expressed in terms of the
incident and reflected powers of waveguide modes.
Generalized S-parameters
Driven Terminal - calculates the terminal-based S-parameters of multi-conductor transmission line ports. The S-matrix
solutions will be expressed in terms of terminal voltages and currents.
Eigenmode calculate the eigenmodes, or resonances, of a structure. The Eigenmode solver finds the resonant
frequencies of the structure and the fields at those resonant frequencies.
Convergence
Driven Modal Delta S for modal S-Parameters.
Driven Terminal Delta S for the single-ended or differential nodal S-Parameters.
Eigenmode - Delta F
Introduction
1-20
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Set Model Units
To set the units:
Select the menu item Modeler > Units
Set Model Units:
Select Units: mm
Click the OK button
Set Default Material
To set the default material:
Using the 3D Modeler Materials toolbar, choose Select
Select Definition Window:
Type pec in the Search by Name field
Click the OK button
Introduction
1-21
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3D Modeler Create a Primitive
TheCoordinateEntryfieldsallowequationstobeenteredforpositionvalues.
Examples:2*5,2+6+8,2*cos(10*(pi/180)).
VariablesarenotallowedintheCoordinateEntryField
Note Note Note Note:Trigfunctionsareinradians
Point2 Point2 Point2 Point2
GridPlane GridPlane GridPlane GridPlane
BaseRectangle BaseRectangle BaseRectangle BaseRectangle
Introduction
1-22
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3D Modeler Object Properties
Attributes Attributes Attributes Attributes
Commands Commands Commands Commands
Attributes Attributes Attributes Attributes
Commands Commands Commands Commands
Introduction
1-23
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3D Modeler - Attributes
Introduction
1-24
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Set Grid Plane
To set the Grid Plane:
Select the menu item Modeler > Grid Plane > YZ
Create Coax Pin
To create the coax pin:
Select the menu item Draw > Cylinder
Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the center position
X: 0.0, Y: 0.0, Z: 0.0, Press the Enter key
Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the radius of the cylinder
dX: 0.0, dY: 0.86, dZ: 0.0, Press the Enter key
Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the height of the cylinder
dX: 6.0, dY: 0.0 dZ: 0.0, Press the Enter key
Continued on Next Page
Introduction
1-25
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-25
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Coax Pin (Continued)
To Parameterize the Height
Select the Command tab from the Properties window
Height: H
Press the Tab key
Add Variable Window
Value: 6mm
Click the OK button
To set the name:
Select the Attribute tab from the Properties window.
For the Value of Name type: Coax_Pin
To set the color:
Click the Edit button
To set the transparency:
Click the OK button
To finish editing the object properties
Click the OK button
To fit the view:
Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active View
Introduction
1-26
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-26
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Modeler - Views
View > Modify Attributes >
Orientation Predefined/Custom View Angles
Lighting Control angle, intensity, and color of light
Projection Control camera and perspective
Background Color Control color of 3D Modeler background
View > Active View Visibility - Controls the display of: 3D Modeler
Objects, Color Keys, Boundaries, Excitations, Field Plots
View > Options Stereo Mode, Drag Optimization, Color Key Defaults,
Default Rotation
View > Render > Wire Frame or Smooth Shaded (Default)
View > Coordinate System > Hide or Small (Large)
View > Grid Setting Controls the grid display
Toolbar:ToggleGridVisibility Toolbar:ToggleGridVisibility Toolbar:ToggleGridVisibility Toolbar:ToggleGridVisibility
Introduction
1-27
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-27
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Changing the View
Context Menu
Shortcuts
Since changing the view is a frequently used operation, some useful shortcut keys exist. Press the appropriate
keys and drag the mouse with the left button pressed:
ALT + Drag Rotate
In addition, there are 9 pre-defined view angles that can be selected by holding the ALT key and double clicking on the
locations shown on the next page.
Shift + Drag - Pan
ALT + Shift + Drag Dynamic Zoom
Pan Pan Pan Pan
RotateAround RotateAround RotateAround RotateAround
ModelCenter ModelCenter ModelCenter ModelCenter
DynamicZoom DynamicZoom DynamicZoom DynamicZoom
ZoomIn/Out ZoomIn/Out ZoomIn/Out ZoomIn/Out
Top Top Top Top
Bottom Bottom Bottom Bottom
Right Right Right Right
PredefinedViewAngles PredefinedViewAngles PredefinedViewAngles PredefinedViewAngles
Left Left Left Left
CurrentAxis CurrentAxis CurrentAxis CurrentAxis
ScreenCenter ScreenCenter ScreenCenter ScreenCenter
FitAll FitAll FitAll FitAll
FitSelected FitSelected FitSelected FitSelected
Introduction
1-28
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-28
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Set Default Material
To set the default material:
Using the 3D Modeler Materials toolbar, choose vacuum
Create Coax
To create the coax:
Select the menu item Draw > Cylinder
Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the center position
X: 0.0, Y: 0.0, Z: 0.0, Press the Enter key
Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the radius of the cylinder
dX: 0.0, dY: 2.0, dZ: 0.0, Press the Enter key
Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the height of the cylinder
dX: 6.0, dY: 0.0 dZ: 0.0, Press the Enter key
To Parameterize the Height:
Select the Command tab from the Properties window
Height: H
Click the OK button
To set the name:
For the Value of Name type: Coax
Click the OK button
To fit the view:
Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active View
Introduction
1-29
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-29
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Excitation
Face Selection
Select the menu item Edit > Select > Faces
By moving the mouse, graphically highlight the top face of the Coax object
Click the left mouse button to select the face
Assign Excitation
Select the menu item HFSS > Excitations > Assign > Wave Port
Reference Conductors for Terminals
Conducting Objects: Coax_pin
Press OK
Note: Reference conductors are not shown because we are using Outer boundary condition as the
reference conductor. Port properties can be accessed by double clicking on Waveport1 in Project tree
Introduction
1-30
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-30
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Automatic Terminal Assignment
Step1:AssignPort Step1:AssignPort Step1:AssignPort Step1:AssignPort Step2:ChooseConductors/Reference Step2:ChooseConductors/Reference Step2:ChooseConductors/Reference Step2:ChooseConductors/Reference
Note:DialogRemembersReferenceConductors Note:DialogRemembersReferenceConductors Note:DialogRemembersReferenceConductors Note:DialogRemembersReferenceConductors
Introduction
1-31
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-31
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Duplicate boundaries with geometry
Works with all boundaries and excitations
Select the menu item Tools > Options > HFSS Options
HFSS Options Window:
Click the General tab
Use Wizards for data entry when creating new boundaries: Checked
Duplicate boundaries with geometry: Checked
Click the OK button
Example:
Assign an Excitation to the face of an object
Duplicate the object around an axis three times
The Excitation is automatically duplicated
Introduction
1-32
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-32
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Set Object Selection
Set select to objects
Select the menu item Edit > Select > Objects
Create Tee
To create Tee:
Select the menu item Edit > Select All Visible. Or press the CTRL+A key.
Select the menu item, Edit > Duplicate > Around Axis.
Axis: Z
Angle: 90
Total Number: 3
Click the OK button
Click the OK button
To fit the view:
Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active View.
Introduction
1-33
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-33
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Unite Conductors
Select Conductors
Select the menu item Edit > Select > By Name
Select Object Dialog,
Select the objects named: Coax_Pin, Coax_Pin_1, Coax_Pin_2
Click the OK button
Unite
Select the menu item Modeler > Boolean > Unite
Unite Coax
Select Coax
Select the objects named: Coax, Coax_1, Coax_2
Click the OK button
Unite
Select the menu item Modeler > Boolean > Unite
Introduction
1-34
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-34
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Solution Setup
Creating an Analysis Setup
To create an analysis setup:
Select the menu item HFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Solution Setup
Solution Setup Window:
Click the General tab:
Solution Frequency: 10.0 GHz
Click the OK button
AdaptFrequency AdaptFrequency AdaptFrequency AdaptFrequency
AddSolutionSetup AddSolutionSetup AddSolutionSetup AddSolutionSetup
Introduction
1-35
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-35
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Adding a Frequency Sweep
To add a frequency sweep:
Select the menu item HFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Sweep
Select Solution Setup: Setup1
Click the OK button
Edit Sweep Window:
Sweep Type: Fast
Frequency Setup Type: Linear Step
Start: 1.0 GHz
Stop: 10.0 GHz
Step: 0.1 GHz
Save Fields: Checked
Click the OK button
HFSS Frequency Sweep
Discrete Solves using adaptive mesh at every frequency
Matrix Data and Fields at every frequency in sweep
Fast - ALPS
Matrix Data and Fields at every frequency in sweep
Interpolating Adaptively determines discrete solve
points using the adaptive mesh
Matrix Data at every frequency in sweeps
Fields at last adaptive solution
AddSweep AddSweep AddSweep AddSweep
Introduction
1-36
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-36
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
See: IEEE Trans. Microwave Theory Tech., Vol. 46, No. 9, Sept. 1998
Interpolating Sweep
The calculation of wide-band s-parameters in HFSS is achieved using the interpolating sweep. This method fits s-
parameter data to a rational polynomial transfer function using a minimum number of discrete finite element method
(FEM) solutions.
The interpolating sweep yields the poles and zeros of the transfer function. This information can be directly used in the
Laplace Element from which a Full-Wave SPICEmodel can be generated (HSPICE, Spectre RF, PSPICE).
( )( ) ( )
( )( ) ( )
1 1
1 1
...
...
p s p s p s
z s z s z s
S
q q q
q q q

=
Rational Polynomial:
S
1
1

(
d
B
)
Example:InterpolatingSweep Example:InterpolatingSweep Example:InterpolatingSweep Example:InterpolatingSweep
5cmmicrostriptransmissionline 5cmmicrostriptransmissionline 5cmmicrostriptransmissionline 5cmmicrostriptransmissionline
Introduction
1-37
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-37
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
S
1
1

(
d
B
)
Adaptive Frequency
S
1
1

(
d
B
)
S
1
1

(
d
B
)
S
1
1

(
d
B
)
S
1
1

(
d
B
)
S
1
1

(
d
B
)
S
1
1

(
d
B
)
S
1
1

(
d
B
)
S
1
1

(
d
B
)
S
1
1

(
d
B
)
S
1
1

(
d
B
)
S
1
1

(
d
B
)
S
1
1

(
d
B
)
DONE!
Introduction
1-38
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-38
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Save Project
To save the project:
In an Ansoft HFSS window, select the menu item File > Save As.
From the Save As window, type the Filename: hfss_coax_tee
Click the Save button
Analyze
Model Validation
To validate the model:
Select the menu item HFSS > Validation Check
Click the Close button
Note: To view any errors or warning messages, use the Message Manager.
Analyze
To start the solution process:
Select the menu item HFSS > Analyze All
Validate Validate Validate Validate
AnalyzeAll AnalyzeAll AnalyzeAll AnalyzeAll
Introduction
1-39
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-39
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
To create a report:
Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Create Terminal Solution Data Report> Rectangular Plot
New Report Window:
Solution: Setup1: Sweep1
Domain: Sweep
Category: Terminal S Parameter
Quantity: St(coax_pin_T1, coax_pin_T1), St(coax_pin_T1, coax_pin_T2), St(coax_pin_T2,
coax_pin_T3) Note: Hold Ctrl key to select multiple traces
Function: db
Click New Report button
Click Close button
Introduction
1-40
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-40
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Introduction
1-41
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-41
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Field Overlays
To create a field plot:
Select an object to overlay fields
Select the objects named: Coax
Click the OK button
Select the menu item HFSS > Fields > Fields > E > Mag_E
Create Field Plot Window
Solution: Setup1 : LastAdaptive
Quantity: Mag_E
In Volume: All
Click the Done button
To modify the attributes of a field plot:
Select the menu item HFSS > Fields > Modify Plot Attributes
Select Plot Folder Window:
Select: E Field
Click the OK button
E-Field Window:
Click the Scale tab
Scale: Log
Click the Plot tab
IsoValType: IsoValSurface
Click the Apply button.
Click the Close button
Introduction
1-42
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-42
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Introduction
1-43
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-43
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Core Technology
HFSS High Frequency Structure Simulator
Arbitrary 3D Volumetric Full-Wave Field Solver
Ansoft Desktop
Advanced ACIS based Modeling
True Parametric Technology Dynamic Editing
Powerful Report Generation
Dynamic Field Visualization
Design Flow Automation
Optimetrics/Ansoft Designer/AnsoftLinks
Advanced Material Types
Frequency Dependent Materials
Non-linear Materials
Anisotropic Materials
Advanced Boundary Conditions
Radiation and Perfectly Matched Layers
Symmetry, Finite Conductivity, Infinite Planes, RLC, and Layered Impedance
Master/Slave Unit Cells
Advanced Solver Technology
Automatic Conformal Mesh Generation
Adaptive Mesh Generation
Internal/External Excitations Includes Loss
ALPS Fast Frequency Sweep
Eigenmode
Introduction
1-44
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-44
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Common HFSS Applications
Antenna
Planar Antennas - Patches, Dipoles, Horns, Conformal Cell Phone Antennas, Spirals
Waveguide Circular/Square Horns
Wire Dipole, Helix
Arrays - Infinite Arrays, Frequency Selective Surfaces (FSS) & Photonic Band Gaps (PBG)
Radar Cross Section (RCS)
Microwave
Filters Cavity Filters, Microstrip, Dielectric
EMC/EMI Shield Enclosures, Coupling, Near- or Far-Field Radiation
Connectors Coax, SFP/XFP, Backplane, Transitions
Waveguide Filters, Resonators, Transitions, Couplers
Silicon/GaSa - Spiral Inductors, Transformers
Signal Integrity/High-Speed Digital
Package Modeling BGA, QFP, Flip-Chip
PCB Board Modeling Power/Ground planes, Mesh Grid Grounds, Backplanes
Connectors SFP/XFP, VHDM, GBX, NexLev, Coax
Transitions Differential/Single-ended Vias
Introduction
1-45
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-45
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
HFSS - Results
Matrix Data
Modal/Terminal/Differential
S-, Y-, and Z-Parameters
VSWR
Excitations
Complex Propagation Constant (Gamma)
Zo
Full-Wave Spice
Full-Wave Spice Broadband Model
Lumped RLC Low Frequency Model
Partial Fraction - Matlab
Export Formats HSPICE, PSPICE, Cadence Spectre, and Maxwell SPICE
Common Display Formats:
Rectangular, Polar
Smith Chart
Data Tables
Common Output Formats:
Neutral Models Files (NMF) (Optimetrics only)
Parametric Results
Touchstone, Data Tables, Matlab,
Citifile
Graphics Windows Clipboard
Introduction
1-46
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-46
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
HFSS - Results
Fields
Modal/Terminal/Differential
Electric Field
Magnetic Field
Current (Volume/Surface)
Power
Specific Absorption Rate
Radiation
2D/3D Far-/Near-Fields
Arrays Regular and Custom Setups
RCS
Field Calculator
User Defined Field Calculations
Common Display Formats
Volume
Surface
Vector
2D Reports Rectangular, Polar, Radiation Patterns
Common Output Formats:
Animations AVI, GIF
Data Tables
Graphics Windows Clipboard, BMP, GIF, JPG, TIFF, VRML
Introduction
1-47
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-47
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Modeler Model Tree
Select menu item Modeler > Group by Material
GroupedbyMaterial GroupedbyMaterial GroupedbyMaterial GroupedbyMaterial ObjectView ObjectView ObjectView ObjectView
Material Material Material Material
Object Object Object Object
ObjectCommand ObjectCommand ObjectCommand ObjectCommand
History History History History
Introduction
1-48
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-48
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Modeler Commands
Parametric Technology
Dynamic Edits - Change Dimensions
Add Variables
Project Variables (Global) or Design Variables (Local)
Animate Geometry
Include Units Default Unit is meters
Supports mixed Units
Introduction
1-49
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-49
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Modeler Primitives
2D Draw Objects
The following 2D Draw objects are available:
Line, Spline, Arc, Equation Based Curve,
Rectangle, Ellipse, Circle, Regular Polygon,
Equation Based Surface
3D Draw Objects
The following 3D Draw objects are available:
Box, Cylinder, Regular Polyhedron, Cone,
Sphere, Torus, Helix, Spiral, Bond Wire
Toolbar:2DObjects Toolbar:2DObjects Toolbar:2DObjects Toolbar:2DObjects
Toolbar:3DObjects Toolbar:3DObjects Toolbar:3DObjects Toolbar:3DObjects
Introduction
1-50
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-50
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Modeler Boolean Operations/Transformations
Modeler > Boolean >
Unite combine multiple primitives
Unite disjoint objects (Separate Bodies to separate)
Subtract remove part of a primitive from another
Intersect keep only the parts of primitives that overlap
Split break primitives into multiple parts along a plane (XY, YZ, XZ)
Split Crossing Objects splits objects along a plane (XY, YZ, XZ) only where they intersect
Separate Bodies separates objects which are united but not physically connected into individual objects
Modeler > Surfaces > Move Faces Resize or Reposition an objects face along a normal or vector.
Edit > Arrange >
Move Translates the structure along a vector
Rotate Rotates the shape around a coordinate axis by an angle
Mirror Mirrors the shape around a specified plane
Offset Performs a uniform scale in x, y, and z.
Edit > Duplicate >
Along Line Create multiple copies of an object along a vector
Around Axis Create multiple copies of an object rotated by a fixed angle around the x, y, or z axis
Mirror - Mirrors the shape around a specified plane and creates a duplicate
Edit > Scale Allows non-uniform scaling in the x, y, or z direction
Toolbar:Boolean Toolbar:Boolean Toolbar:Boolean Toolbar:Boolean
Toolbar:Arrange Toolbar:Arrange Toolbar:Arrange Toolbar:Arrange
Toolbar:Duplicate Toolbar:Duplicate Toolbar:Duplicate Toolbar:Duplicate
Introduction
1-51
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-51
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Modeler - Selection
Selection Types
Object (Default)
Face
Edge
Vertex
Selection Modes
All Objects
All Visible Object
By Name
Highlight Selection Dynamically By default, moving the mouse pointer over an object will dynamically
highlight the object for selection. To select the object simply click the left mouse button.
Multiple Object Selection Hold the CTRL key down to graphically select multiple objects
Next Behind To select an object located behind another object, select the front object, press the b key to get
the next behind. Note: The mouse pointer must be located such that the next behind object is under the mouse
pointer.
To Disable: Select the menu item Tools > Options > 3D Modeler Options
From the Display Tab, uncheck Highlight selection dynamically
DynamicallyHighlighted DynamicallyHighlighted DynamicallyHighlighted DynamicallyHighlighted
(Onlyframeofobject) (Onlyframeofobject) (Onlyframeofobject) (Onlyframeofobject)
Selected Selected Selected Selected
Introduction
1-52
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-52
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Modeler Moving Around
Step1:StartPoint Step1:StartPoint Step1:StartPoint Step1:StartPoint Step2:HoldXkeyandselectvertexpoint Step2:HoldXkeyandselectvertexpoint Step2:HoldXkeyandselectvertexpoint Step2:HoldXkeyandselectvertexpoint
Step3:CTRL+EnterKeyssetalocalreference Step3:CTRL+EnterKeyssetalocalreference Step3:CTRL+EnterKeyssetalocalreference Step3:CTRL+EnterKeyssetalocalreference Step4:HoldZkeyandsetheight Step4:HoldZkeyandsetheight Step4:HoldZkeyandsetheight Step4:HoldZkeyandsetheight
EdgeCenterSnap EdgeCenterSnap EdgeCenterSnap EdgeCenterSnap
Toolbar:SnapMode Toolbar:SnapMode Toolbar:SnapMode Toolbar:SnapMode
Introduction
1-53
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-53
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Step1:SelectFace Step1:SelectFace Step1:SelectFace Step1:SelectFace
Step2:SelectOrigin Step2:SelectOrigin Step2:SelectOrigin Step2:SelectOrigin
Step3:SetX Step3:SetX Step3:SetX Step3:SetX- -- -Axis Axis Axis Axis
NewWorkingCS NewWorkingCS NewWorkingCS NewWorkingCS
Modeler Coordinate System
Can be Parameterized
Working Coordinate System
Currently selected CS. This can be a local or global CS
Global CS
The default fixed coordinate system
Relative CS
User defined local coordinate system.
Offset
Rotated
Both
Face CS (setting available to automatically switch to face coordinate system in the 3D Modeler Options)
ConecreatedwithFaceCS ConecreatedwithFaceCS ConecreatedwithFaceCS ConecreatedwithFaceCS
ChangeBoxSizeandConeis ChangeBoxSizeandConeis ChangeBoxSizeandConeis ChangeBoxSizeandConeis
automaticallypositionedwith automaticallypositionedwith automaticallypositionedwith automaticallypositionedwith
thetopfaceofthebox thetopfaceofthebox thetopfaceofthebox thetopfaceofthebox
Toolbar:CoordinateSystem Toolbar:CoordinateSystem Toolbar:CoordinateSystem Toolbar:CoordinateSystem
Introduction
1-54
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-54
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
(Overlapbetweentwocylinders) (Overlapbetweentwocylinders) (Overlapbetweentwocylinders) (Overlapbetweentwocylinders)
Overlapping Geometry
Definition: When an object occupies volume in multiple 3D objects. This does not apply to sheet objects
Solution:
Metal Overlapping Dielectrics
Resolution: Set Material Override
Menu item: HFSS > Set Material Override
Dielectrics Overlapping Dielectrics
Resolution: Correct the Overlap
Split the overlapping object into multiple pieces
Subtract the overlapping geometries
Introduction
1-55
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-55
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Automatic Feature Removal
Holes Holes Holes Holes
Blends Blends Blends Blends
Step1:EnterFeatureDetectionOptions Step1:EnterFeatureDetectionOptions Step1:EnterFeatureDetectionOptions Step1:EnterFeatureDetectionOptions
Introduction
1-56
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-56
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Automatic Feature Removal
Removed Removed Removed Removed
Note: Note: Note: Note: There are two modes of operation for the feature removal: Healing
andModelAnalysis.ModelAnalysiswasusedhereandallowsthe userto
manually select which geometry features are removed. For healing, all
features that meet the user defined criteria are automatically removed.
Both options are found in the menu item Modeler > Model Analysis Modeler > Model Analysis Modeler > Model Analysis Modeler > Model Analysis
Step2:SelectFeaturestoRemove Step2:SelectFeaturestoRemove Step2:SelectFeaturestoRemove Step2:SelectFeaturestoRemove
Introduction
1-57
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-57
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
HFSS Matrix Data
HFSS > Results > Solution Data
Export
NMF, Touchstone, Data Tables, Citifile, MATLAB (*.m)
NOTE: Make sure the Simulation is set to a Sweep before exporting. The Adaptive Passes will only export a
single frequency point.
Equivalent Circuit Export
HSPICE, PSPICE, Spectre, Maxwell SPICE
Introduction
1-58
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-58
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Results Data Management
HFSS > Results > Browse Solutions
Solved model variations are retained.
Unless otherwise notified by HFSS.
HFSS > Results > Clean Up Solutions
HFSS > Results > Import Solutions
Introduction
1-59
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-59
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Results Create Reports
HFSS > Results > Create Report
Output Variables
User Defined Equations
Introduction
1-60
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-60
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Fields
Select Object Volume, Surface, or Line to display fields
HFSS > Fields > Plot Fields >
Modify Plot Solution/Frequency/Qty
Plot Attributes
Edit Sources Change Excitation
Introduction
1-61
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-61
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Mesh Display
Field Overlay
Select an object
Select the menu item HFSS > Fields > Plot Mesh
Introduction
1-62
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-62
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Measure
Modeler > Measure >
Position Points and Distance
Length Edge Length
Area Surface Area
Volume Object Volume
Introduction
1-63
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-63
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Solver Technology
Mesh Mesh Mesh Mesh
Mesh Mesh Mesh Mesh
NO NO NO NO
YES YES YES YES
Introduction
1-64
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-64
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Higher-Order Basis Functions
Solver - Higher-Order Basis Functions
Basis functions are hierarchical
Increased Accuracy with less elements
Convergence is a function of basis order
H
0
(curl)
elements
H
1
(curl)
elements
H
2
(curl)
elements
1 11 1
st st st st
Order Order Order Order
2 22 2
nd nd nd nd
Order Order Order Order
Introduction
1-65
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-65
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Iterative Solver
How does it work?
The Iterative Matrix Solver works by guessing a solution to the matrix of unknowns, and then
recursively updating the guess until an error tolerance has been reached
What is the advantage?
Reduced RAM and Simulation Time
Where do you control the Iterative Solver?
Options Tab from Solution Setup dialog
Initial guess
Preconditioner
Update solution and search
direction
Converges ?
yes
no
Introduction
1-66
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-66
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example Basis Functions & Iterative Solver
Howmanypassesoncomputerw/8GBRAM? Howmanypassesoncomputerw/8GBRAM? Howmanypassesoncomputerw/8GBRAM? Howmanypassesoncomputerw/8GBRAM?
Direct:3Passes Direct:3Passes Direct:3Passes Direct:3Passes
Iterative:11Passes Iterative:11Passes Iterative:11Passes Iterative:11Passes
CopperWall CopperWall CopperWall CopperWall
IncreasedCapacity(4x) IncreasedCapacity(4x) IncreasedCapacity(4x) IncreasedCapacity(4x)
Iterative Iterative Iterative Iterative Direct Direct Direct Direct
4xCapacityonSameMachine 4xCapacityonSameMachine 4xCapacityonSameMachine 4xCapacityonSameMachine
2xUnknowns 2xUnknowns 2xUnknowns 2xUnknowns 2xMemory 2xMemory 2xMemory 2xMemory
Volume: 447cubic wavelengths
Introduction
1-67
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-67
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3.2xLessRAM 3.2xLessRAM 3.2xLessRAM 3.2xLessRAM
6.4xFaster 6.4xFaster 6.4xFaster 6.4xFaster
IterativeandDirect IterativeandDirect IterativeandDirect IterativeandDirect
Convergein3Passes Convergein3Passes Convergein3Passes Convergein3Passes
Introduction
1-68
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-68
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Options General
Tools > Options > General Options
Temp Directory Location used during solution process
Make sure it is at least 512MB free disk.
Options - HFSS
Tools > Options > HFSS Options > Solver
Number of Processors Requires additional license
Desired RAM Limit leave it unchecked for auto-detect
Maximum RAM Limit leave it unchecked for auto-detect
Process Priority set the simulation priority from Critical
(highest) to Idle (lowest)
Introduction
1-69
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-69
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Project Files
Everything regarding the project is stored in an ascii file
File: <project_name>.hfss
Double click from Windows Explorer will open and launch HFSS v11
Results and Mesh are stored in a folder named <project_name>.hfssresults
Lock file: <project_name>.lock.hfss
Created when a project is opened
Auto Save File: <project_name>.hfss.auto
When recovering, software only checks date
If an error occurred when saving the auto file, the date will be newer then the original
Look at file size (provided in recover dialog)
Converting Older HFSS Projects HFSS v9 and HFSS v10 to HFSS v11
From HFSS v11.0,
Select the menu item File > Open
Open dialog
Files of Type: Ansoft HFSS Project Files (.hfss)
Browse to the existing project and select the .hfss file
Click the Open button
Legacy License
The v11 license allows users to run HFSS v9.2.1, v10.1.3 or 11.x.
NOTE: Once a project is saved in v11 it can no longer be opened in previous versions
Introduction
1-70
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-70
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Recommended Service Packs (SP) PC only
Microsoft Windows XP - SP2 or higher
Memory allocation 32-bit Windows
Since the release of HFSS v9.2 you can access sup to 3GB of Ram on a 32-bit PC
All about 3GB switch, supported OS
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;291988
How to use /3GB switch
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-us/ddtools/hh/ddtools/bootini_1fcj.asp
Possible problems
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;328269
Increasing Memory allocation HFSS v11
Since the release of HFSS v10, the solver in HFSS is 64bit and can access a large memory footprint.
Linux Operating Systems
Red Hat Enterprise 3 and 4
SUSE Linux Enterprise 9.x
Note: Requires OpenGL
Note: Please perform required OS updates outlined in readme file on the CD
Introduction
1-71
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-71
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Distributed Solve Option
Distributed Analysis
Automated parser management and reassembly of data
Parametric tables and studies
Frequency sweeps for discrete, fast, and interpolating
Per license, distributed analysis allows up to 10 parallel simulations on remote machines, providing
near-linear reduction of simulation run times
Introduction
1-72
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-72
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Scripts
Default Script recorded in v11
Visual Basic Script
Distributed/Remote Solve
Tools > Options > General Options > Analysis Options
Uses Windows DCOM
Local Local Local Local Remote Remote Remote Remote Distributed Distributed Distributed Distributed
Introduction
1-73
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-73
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
For Technical Support
The following link will direct you to the Ansoft Support Page. The Ansoft Support Pages provide additional
documentation, training, and application notes. Web Site: http://www.ansoft.com/support.cfm
Application Engineers for North America
The names and numbers in this list may change without notice
9-4 EST:
Pittsburgh, PA
Burlington, MA
9-4 PST:
San Jose, CA
Portland, OR
(503) 906-7947
Irvine, CA
(714) 417-9311 x6
THlSPAGElNTENTlONALYLEFTBLANK
1-1
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Chapter 3 Boundary
Conditions
Introduction
1-2
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Why are They Critical?
For most practical problems, the solution to Maxwells equations requires a
rigorous matrix approach such as the Finite Element Method (FEM) which
is used by Ansoft HFSS.
The wave equation solved by Ansoft HFSS is derived from the
differential form of Maxwells equations.
For these expressions to be valid, it is assumed that the field vectors are:
single-valued,
bounded, and have a
continuous distribution (along with their derivatives)
Along boundaries of media or at sources,
Field vectors are discontinuous
Derivatives of the field vectors have no meaning
Boundary Conditions
0 =
=
+ =
=
B
D
t
D
J H
t
B
E
BoundaryConditionsdefinethefieldbehavioracrossdiscontinuo BoundaryConditionsdefinethefieldbehavioracrossdiscontinuo BoundaryConditionsdefinethefieldbehavioracrossdiscontinuo BoundaryConditionsdefinethefieldbehavioracrossdiscontinuousboundaries usboundaries usboundaries usboundaries

Introduction
1-3
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Why do I Care?
They Force the fields to align with the definition of the boundary condition
As a user I should be asking
What assumptions, about the fields, do the boundary conditions make?
Are these assumptions appropriate for the structure being simulated?
Model Scope
To reduce the infinite space of the real world to a finite volume, Ansoft HFSS automatically
applies a boundary to the surface surrounding the geometric model
Outer boundary
Default Boundary: Perfect E
Model Complexity
To reduce the complexity of a model, the boundary conditions can be used to improve the:
Solution Time
Computer Resources
Failuretounderstandboundaryconditionsmayleadtoinconsiste Failuretounderstandboundaryconditionsmayleadtoinconsiste Failuretounderstandboundaryconditionsmayleadtoinconsiste Failuretounderstandboundaryconditionsmayleadtoinconsistentresults ntresults ntresults ntresults
Boundary Conditions
Introduction
1-4
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
What are Common Ansoft HFSS Boundary Conditions?
Excitations
Wave Ports (External)
Lumped Ports (Internal)
Surface Approximations
Perfect E or Perfect H Surface
Finite Conductivity Surface
Impedance Surface
Layered Impedance Surface
Lumped RLC
Symmetry Planes
Radiation Surface
Perfectly Matched Layer (PML)
Strictly not a surface approximation
Master/ Slave
Material Properties
Boundary between two dielectrics
Finite Conductivity of a conductor
Largelytheusersresponsibility Largelytheusersresponsibility Largelytheusersresponsibility Largelytheusersresponsibility
Transparenttotheuser Transparenttotheuser Transparenttotheuser Transparenttotheuser
Boundary Conditions
Introduction
1-5
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Perfect E Forces the electric field perpendicular to the surface
Outer Surface Default Boundary
PEC/Perfect Conductor Material Property
Model complexity: Reduced by eliminating conductor loss
Perfect H Forces the electric field tangent to the surface
Finite Conductivity Lossy electric conductor.
Forces the tangential electric field at the surface to: Zs(n x Htan).
The surface impedance (Zs) is equal to, (1+j)/( ),
Model complexity: Reduced by eliminating conductor thickness
Impedance Surface Represent surfaces of a known impedance
Forces the tangential electric field at the surface to: Zs(n x Htan).
The surface impedance (Zs) is equal to, Rs + jXs (Ohms/Square)
Layered Impedance Models multiple thin layers in a structure as an Impedance Surface
Lumped RLC Parallel combination
PerfectESurface PerfectESurface PerfectESurface PerfectESurface
Perfect H Surface
Boundary Conditions
Introduction
1-6
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Symmetry Planes Enable you to model only part of a structure
Perfect E or Perfect H Symmetry Planes
Must be exposed to the outer surface
Must be on a planar surface
Remember! Mechanical Symmetry does not Equal Electrical Symmetry
Model complexity: Reduced by eliminating part of the solution volume
FullModel FullModel FullModel FullModel
PerfectESymmetry PerfectESymmetry PerfectESymmetry PerfectESymmetry
PerfectHSymmetry PerfectHSymmetry PerfectHSymmetry PerfectHSymmetry
Boundary Conditions
Introduction
1-7
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Radiation Surface Allows waves to radiate infinitely far into space.
The boundary absorbs wave at the radiation surface
Can be placed on arbitrary surfaces
Accuracy depends on
The distance between the boundary and the radiating object
The radiation boundary should be located at least one-quarter of a wavelength from a radiating structure. If
you are simulating a structure that does not radiate, the boundary can be located less then one-quarter of a
wave length (The validity of this assumption will require your engineering judgment).
The incident angle
The radiation boundary will reflect varying amounts of energy depending on the incidence angle. The best
performance is achieved at normal incidence. Avoid angles greater then ~30degrees. In addition, the
radiation boundary must remain convex relative to the wave.
Perfectly Matched Layer (PML) Allows waves to radiate infinitely far into space.
Not a Boundary Condition.
Fictitious materials that fully absorb the electromagnetic fields impinging upon them.
These materials are complex anisotropic.
Types
Free Space Termination or Reflection Free Termination
Can only be placed on planar surface
Model complexity: They do not suffer from the distance or incident angle issues, but should be place at least
one-tenth of a wave length from strong radiators
Boundary Conditions
Introduction
1-8
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Infinite Ground Planes Simulate the effects of an infinite ground plane
Only affects the calculation of near- or far-field radiation during post processing
Types: Perfect E, Finite Conductivity, or Impedance Surface
Frequency Dependent Boundary Conditions
The following boundary parameters can be assigned an expression that includes Freq:
Finite Conductivity
Impedance
Lumped RLC
Layered Impedance
Supported Frequency Sweeps
Single Frequency
Discrete Sweep
Interpolating Sweep
Boundary Conditions
Introduction
1-9
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Ports
Unique type of boundary condition
Allow energy to flow into and out of a structure.
Defined on 2D planar surface
Arbitrary port solver calculates the natural field patterns or modes
Assumes semi-infinitely long waveguide
Same cross-section and material properties as port surface
2D field patterns serve as boundary conditions for the full 3D problem
Excitation Types
Wave Port (Waveguide) External
Recommended only for surfaces exposed to the background
Supports multiple modes (Example: Coupled Lines) and deembedding
Compute Generalized S-Parameters
Frequency dependent Characteristic Impedance (Zo)
Perfectly matched at every frequency
Lumped Port Internal
Recommended only for surfaces internal to geometric model
Single mode (TEM) and no deembedding
Normalized to a constant user defined Zo
Port1 Port1 Port1 Port1
Excitations
Measurements Measurements Measurements Measurements
ConstantZo ConstantZo ConstantZo ConstantZo
Introduction
1-10
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Excitations
Wave Equation
The field pattern of a traveling wave inside a waveguide can be determined by solving Maxwells equations. The
following equation that is solved by the 2D solver is derived directly from Maxwells equation.
where:
E(x,y) is a phasor representing an oscillating electric field.
k
0
is the free space wave number,

r
is the complex relative permeability.

r
is the complex relative permittivity.
To solve this equation, the 2D solver obtains an excitation field pattern in the form of a phasor solution, E(x,y). These
phasor solutions are independent of z and t; only after being multiplied by e
-z
do they become traveling waves.
Also note that the excitation field pattern computed is valid only at a single frequency. A different excitation field pattern
is computed for each frequency point of interest.
( ) 0 ) , ( ,
1
2
0
=
y x E k y x E
r
r
Introduction
1-11
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Excitations
Modes, Reflections, and Propagation
It is also possible for a 3D field solution generated by an excitation signal of one specific mode to contain reflections of
higher-order modes which arise due to discontinuities in a high frequency structure.
If these higher-order modes are reflected back to the excitation port or transmitted onto another port, the S-parameters
associated with these modes should be calculated.
If the higher-order mode decays before reaching any porteither because of attenuation due to losses or because it is
a non-propagating evanescent modethere is no need to obtain the S-parameters for that mode.
Wave Ports Require a Length of Uniform Cross Section
Ansoft HFSS assumes that each port you define is connected to a semi-infinitely long waveguide that has the same
cross section as the Wave Port
nouniformcrosssection nouniformcrosssection nouniformcrosssection nouniformcrosssection
atWavePorts atWavePorts atWavePorts atWavePorts
uniformcrosssection uniformcrosssection uniformcrosssection uniformcrosssection
addedforeachWavePort addedforeachWavePort addedforeachWavePort addedforeachWavePort
Introduction
1-12
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Excitations
Wave Port Boundary Conditions
Perfect E or Finite Conductivity
Default: All outer edges are Perfect E boundary.
Port is defined within a waveguide.
Easy for enclosed transmission lines: Coax or Waveguide
Challenging for unbalanced or non-enclosed lines: Microstrip, CPW, Slotline, etc.
Symmetry or Impedance
Recognized at the port edges
Radiation
Default interface is a Perfect E boundary
Introduction
1-13
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Excitations
Lumped Port Boundary Conditions
Perfect E or Finite Conductivity
Any port edge that interfaces with a conductor or another port edge
Perfect H
All remaining port edges
Perfect H
Perfect H
Perfect E
Perfect E
Introduction
1-14
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Excitations
Excitation Calibration
Ports must be calibrated to ensure consistent results. Determines:
Direction and polarity of fields
Voltage/ Current calculations.
Solution Type: Driven Modal
Expressed in terms of the incident and reflected powers of the waveguide modes.
Definition not desirable for problems having several propagating quasi-TEM modes
Coupled/Multi-Coupled Transmission Lines
Always used by the solver
Calibration: Integration Line
Phase between Ports
Modal voltage integration path: Zpi, Zpv, Zvi
Solution Type: Driven Terminal
Linear combination of nodal voltages and currents for the Wave Port.
Equivalent transformation performed from Modal Solution
Calibration: Terminal Assignments
Polarity
Nodal current integration path
Introduction
1-15
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example Solution Types:
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2 T2 T2
IntegrationLine IntegrationLine IntegrationLine IntegrationLine
Mode1 Mode1 Mode1 Mode1
(EvenMode) (EvenMode) (EvenMode) (EvenMode)
IntegrationLine IntegrationLine IntegrationLine IntegrationLine
Mode2 Mode2 Mode2 Mode2
(OddMode) (OddMode) (OddMode) (OddMode)
ModestoNodes ModestoNodes ModestoNodes ModestoNodes
Transformation Transformation Transformation Transformation
SPICE SPICE SPICE SPICE
DifferentialPairs DifferentialPairs DifferentialPairs DifferentialPairs
Modal Modal Modal Modal
Port1 Port1 Port1 Port1 Port2 Port2 Port2 Port2
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2 T2 T2
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2 T2 T2
2Modes 2Modes 2Modes 2Modes 2Modes 2Modes 2Modes 2Modes
Excitations
Introduction
1-16
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Boundary Conditions Application
Application of Boundary Conditions - Case 1
Emulate laboratory measurements
Verification/Validation before production
PicturecourtesyofDelphi PicturecourtesyofDelphi PicturecourtesyofDelphi PicturecourtesyofDelphi
PicturecourtesyofTektronix PicturecourtesyofTektronix PicturecourtesyofTektronix PicturecourtesyofTektronix
Introduction
1-17
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Application of Boundary Conditions - Case 2
Isolate part of a structure (i.e. Exciting arbitrary transmission lines)
Not physically possible to measure in the laboratory
Full-Wave analysis not required for total system
Or total system too complex
Design work/Component level optimization
Post production problem solving
IsolatedComponent IsolatedComponent IsolatedComponent IsolatedComponent ViaTransition ViaTransition ViaTransition ViaTransition
TotalSystem TotalSystem TotalSystem TotalSystem
Boundary Conditions Application
Introduction
1-18
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example Structure
Coax to Stripline
LAYER2(SIGNAL) LAYER2(SIGNAL) LAYER2(SIGNAL) LAYER2(SIGNAL)
LAYER3(BOTTOMSIDE) LAYER3(BOTTOMSIDE) LAYER3(BOTTOMSIDE) LAYER3(BOTTOMSIDE)
LAYER1(TOPSIDE) LAYER1(TOPSIDE) LAYER1(TOPSIDE) LAYER1(TOPSIDE)
Coax to Stripline Example
Introduction
1-19
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Material Properties
All 3D (Solid) objects have material definitions
To complete the model shown previously we must include the air
that surrounds the structure.
air air air air
Note: Note: Note: Note: Substrate/Airboundary Substrate/Airboundary Substrate/Airboundary Substrate/Airboundary
includedinstructure includedinstructure includedinstructure includedinstructure
Introduction
1-20
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Remember! Material Boundary conditions are transparent to the user
They are not visible in the Project Tree
Example Material Boundary: Conductors Surface Approximations
Perfect Conductors Perfect E Boundary (Boundary Name: smetal)
Forces E-Field perpendicular to surface
Lossy Conductors Finite Conductivity Boundary
Forces tangential E-Field to ((1+j)/( ))(n x H
tan
).
Assumes one skin depth User must manually force Ansoft HFSS to
solve inside lossy conductors that are a skin depth
smetal smetal smetal smetal
Introduction
1-21
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Surface Approximations
Background or Outer Boundary
Not visible in the Project Tree
Any object surface that touches it Perfect E Boundary
Default boundary applied to the region surrounding the geometric model
Model is encased in a thin metal layer that no fields propagate through
Overridewith Overridewith Overridewith Overridewith
RadiationBoundary RadiationBoundary RadiationBoundary RadiationBoundary
outer outer outer outer
Introduction
1-22
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
What Port Type Should I Use?
Example is easy decision
Port touches background (External)
Cross Section is Coax (Enclosed Transmission Line)
Wave Port
Solution Type: Driven Terminal
SPICE Output
IdentifyPortType& IdentifyPortType& IdentifyPortType& IdentifyPortType&
CrossSection CrossSection CrossSection CrossSection
AssignExcitation& AssignExcitation& AssignExcitation& AssignExcitation&
CalibratePort CalibratePort CalibratePort CalibratePort
DefineDefault DefineDefault DefineDefault DefineDefault
PostProcessing PostProcessing PostProcessing PostProcessing
Introduction
1-23
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Is it Really that Simple?
Yes, but the geometric model was setup with several considerations
1.Only the face of the coax dielectric was selected for the port face
Port Boundary conditions define outer conductor
Material Definitions define inner conductor
2.Uniform port cross-section
Only supports a single mode
Higher-order modes caused by reflections would attenuate before port
Modes attenuate as a function of e
- z
, assuming propagation in the z-direction.
Required distance (uniform port length) depends on modes propagation constant.
Uniformcross Uniformcross Uniformcross Uniformcross- -- -section section section section
RuleofThumb:5x RuleofThumb:5x RuleofThumb:5x RuleofThumb:5x
CriticalDistance CriticalDistance CriticalDistance CriticalDistance
Introduction
1-24
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
How often is the Setup that Simple?
If you are emulating laboratory measurements? [Case 1 ]
Most of the time!
Laboratory equipment does not directly connect to arbitrary transmission
lines
Exceptions
Emulating Complex Probes with a Port Understanding of Probe
If you are isolating part of a structure? [Case 2 ]
For real designs - usually only by dumb luck!
User Must Understand and/or Implement Correctly:
1.Port Boundary conditions and impact of boundary condition
2.Fields within the structure
3.Assumptions made by port solver
4.Return path
Introduction
1-25
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-25
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Side Note: Problems Associated with Correlating Results [Case 2]
Can be broken into two categories of problems
1.Complex Structure
BGA, Backplane, Antenna Feed, Waveguide Plumbing, etc
Most common problems result from
Measurement setup Test fixtures, deembedding, etc.
Failing to understand the fields in the structure Boundary Problem
Return path problems Model truncation
2.Simple Structures
Uniform transmission lines
Equations or Circuit Elements
Most common problems result from
Improper use of default or excitation boundary conditions
Failure to understand the assumptions used by correct results
(Equations or Circuit Elements)
Introduction
1-26
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-26
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Why are they critical?
Any current injected into a system must return to the source
DC
Chooses path of least resistance
AC
Chooses path of least inductance
A signal propagates between the signal trace and its reference plane
Reference plane is just as important as signal trace!
Why do I care?
Many real designs have nonideal return paths
These effects are only captured by full-wave simulators
Isolating parts of a structure
Failure to maintain the correct return path will
Limit correlation to measurements
Mask or create design problems
Port and Boundary setup is the most common source of error in model setup
Introduction
1-27
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-27
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
NoDC NoDC NoDC NoDC
ReturnPath ReturnPath ReturnPath ReturnPath
No Return Path
Introduction
1-28
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-28
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
DC DC DC DC
DC Return Path
Introduction
1-29
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-29
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
DC&RF DC&RF DC&RF DC&RF
S21 S21 S21 S21
S11 S11 S11 S11
S31 S31 S31 S31
DC/AC Return Path
Introduction
1-30
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-30
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Isolate part of structure - Case 2
Isolate Transition
Deembed
Recombine using Ansoft Designer - Circuit
WavePort WavePort WavePort WavePort
Introduction
1-31
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-31
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
AnsoftDesigner AnsoftDesigner AnsoftDesigner AnsoftDesigner- -- - Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit
Introduction
1-32
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-32
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Introduction
1-33
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-33
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
What went wrong?
Isolate Port from Discontinuity?
Yes
Uniform Cross-Section?
NO The cross section of the port (including its boundaries) is not maintained
Maintain Return Path?
NO Boundary on port shorts the planes together at edges
Identical to placing vias at port edge!
All Modes Accounted for?
NO Did not consider Parallel Plate mode
Even if we did, the via (port edge) cuts off mode Reason vias are used!
Introduction
1-34
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-34
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Stripline Stripline Stripline Stripline
Parallel Parallel Parallel Parallel
Plate Plate Plate Plate
AnsoftDesigner AnsoftDesigner AnsoftDesigner AnsoftDesigner- -- - Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit
WavePort WavePort WavePort WavePort
2Terminals 2Terminals 2Terminals 2Terminals
Introduction
1-35
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-35
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
NoDC NoDC NoDC NoDC
PortInfluences PortInfluences PortInfluences PortInfluences
LumpedPort LumpedPort LumpedPort LumpedPort
Introduction
1-36
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-36
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Introduction
1-37
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-37
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
TOP
T1
T2
T3
Power
GND
BOTTOM
G
P
SIDE
Power
GND
Signal
Lumped Gap Port
Terminal Line
Introduction
1-38
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-38
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Lumped Gap Port
Introduction
1-39
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-39
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
DifferentialLumpedGapPorts DifferentialLumpedGapPorts DifferentialLumpedGapPorts DifferentialLumpedGapPorts
Introduction
1-40
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-40
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
G GG G S SS S G GG G
Port Port Port Port
1-1
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Chapter 4 Appendix:
Boundary Conditions
Introduction
1-2
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Excitations and Boundary Conditions
Majority of HFSS errors are related to improper usage of excitations and boundary conditions
Boundary conditions are important because they significantly impact electromagnetic solution
Determine model scope
To truncate infinite space to finite volume, HFSS applies PEC boundary to surface surrounding
geometric model
Can reduce model complexity
Boundary conditions can be used to reduce solution time and computing resource demands
P
e
r
f
e
c
t

E

S
y
m
m
e
t
r
y

P
l
a
n
e
P
e
r
f
e
c
t

H

S
y
m
m
e
t
r
y

P
l
a
n
e
TE10 Cavity
Resonator
Pyramidal
Horn
Antenna
Introduction
1-3
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Surface approximations
Perfect E surface
Perfect H surface
Finite conductivity surface
Impedance surface
Layered impedance
Lumped RLC boundary
Symmetry planes
Radiation (absorbing) boundary surface
Perfectly matched layer (PML)
Strictly not boundary condition, but effectively behaves like one
Master/slave (linked or periodic) boundaries
Screening impedance
Excitations
Wave ports (external)
Lumped ports (internal)
User-Defined Boundary Conditions
0 =
=
+ =
=
B
D
t
D
J H
t
B
E
Introduction
1-4
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Perfect E and Perfect H Boundaries
Perfect E is perfect electrical conductor (PEC)
Forces E-field perpendicular to surface
Represents metal surfaces, ground planes, ideal cavity walls, etc.
Infinite ground plane option simulates effects of infinite ground plane in post-processing radiated fields
Perfect H is perfect magnetic conductor (PMC)
Forces H-field perpendicular to surface and E-field tangential
Does not exist in real world
Useful boundary constraint for electromagnetic models
Represents openings in metal surfaces, etc.
Parameters
None
Perfect E Boundary Perfect H Boundary
When you define a solid object as a
perf_conductor, a Perfect E boundary
condition is applied to its exterior surfaces.
E-field Parallel to surface
E-field Perpendicular to surface
Introduction
1-5
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
All methods utilize an equivalent surface impedance applied to the field as it travels across
the surface
Z
s,input
Z
s,Au
L
Au
Z
s,Ni
L
Ni
Z
s,Cu
L
Cu
Z
s,input
Z
s,Au
L
Au
Z
s,Ni
L
Ni
Z
s,Cu
L
Cu
Four Surface Loss Modeling Methods
j
Z
s
+
=
1
2
=
Z
s
specified as /sq
0.7mil Copper
500 in Nickel 500 in Gold
0.7mil Copper
Finite Conductivity
Impedance
Layered Impedance
Lumped RLC
Parallel RLC Circuit
t >>
Introduction
1-6
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Finite Conductivity Boundary
Lossy electrical conductor
Forces E-field perpendicular to surface
Surface impedance includes resistive and reactive surface losses
Used for non-ideal conductor analysis
Infinite ground plane option simulates effects of infinite ground plane in post-
processing radiated fields
Parameters
Conductivity (S/m)
Relative permeability (unitless)
When you define a solid object as a non-
ideal metal (e.g. copper or aluminum), and it
is set to Solve Surface, a finite conductivity
boundary is applied to its exterior faces.
2
=
j
Z
s
+
=
1
Surface Impedance Skin Depth Field Relationship
t >>
Good conductor in
skin depth regime
Introduction
1-7
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Impedance Boundary
User-defined surface impedance
Represents thin film resistors or reactive loads
Infinite ground plane option simulates effects of infinite surface in post-processing
radiated fields
Calculate required impedance from desired lumped value, width, and length
Length (in direction of current flow) width = number of squares
Impedance per square = desired lumped impedance number of squares
Parameters:
Resistance (/square)
Reactance (/square)
Example: Resistor in Wilkinson Power Divider
Resistor is 3.5 mils long (in direction of flow) and
4 mils wide. Desired lumped value is 35 .
square
N
R
R
N
lumped
sheet
/ 40
875 . 0
35
875 . 0
4
5 . 3
= = =
= =
Introduction
1-8
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Layered Impedance Boundary
Models multiple thin layers in a structure as single impedance surface
Effect is same as impedance boundary, except that HFSS calculates surface impedance based on
data entered for layered structure
Surface roughness can be included
Plating layers can be modeled by using an equivalent surface impedance
Not available for fast frequency sweeps
Parameters
Layer thicknesses
Material properties
Surface roughness (optional)
0.7mil Copper
Z
s,input
Z
s,Au
L
Au
Z
s,Ni
L
Ni
Z
s,Cu
L
Cu
Impedance of the layered structure is calculated by
recursively calling the impedance calculation
formulation from transmission line theory
Introduction
1-9
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Lumped RLC Boundary
Represents any combination of parallel-connected lumped RLC elements on surfaces
in terms of circuit definition
Supply values for R, L, and C
HFSS determines impedance per square of lumped RLC boundary at any frequency
Fast frequency sweeps are supported
Parameters
Resistance
Inductance
Capacitance
Line for current flow
Introduction
1-10
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Allows for modeling portion of entire structure
For Driven Modal solutions
Two symmetry options are available
Use perfect E when electric field is perpendicular to symmetry plane
Use perfect H when electric field is tangential to symmetry plane
Involve further implications to boundary manager and fields post-processing
May need to specify impedance multiplier
Existence of symmetry boundary allows for near- and far-field calculation of entire structure
Parameters
Type
Impedance multiplier
Symmetry Plane
Conductive edges on
all four sides
Waveguide contains symmetric propagating
mode which could be modeled using half the
volume vertically or horizontally.
Perfect E Symmetry
(bottom)
Perfect H Symmetry
(left side)
Introduction
1-11
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
When symmetry is used, Zpi and impedance line-dependent Zpv and Zvi calculations
will be incorrect since entire port aperture is not represented
Impedance is halved for model with Perfect E symmetry plane
Impedance is doubled for model with Perfect H symmetry plane
Port impedance multiplier is renormalizing factor used to obtain correct impedance
Value applied to all ports
Global parameter set during assignment of any port
Symmetry Plane Impedance Multiplier
Rectangular WG
(No Symmetry)
Half Rectangular WG
(Perfect E Symmetry)
Impedance Multiplier = 2
Half Rectangular WG
(Perfect H Symmetry)
Impedance Multiplier = 0.5
Introduction
1-12
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Perfect E Symmetry (top)
Perfect H Symmetry
(right side)
TE20 mode in full model
Properly represented
with Perfect E symmetry
Mode cannot occur
with Perfect H
symmetry
Symmetry Plane Mode Implications
Geometric symmetry does not necessarily imply field symmetry for higher-order
modes
Symmetry boundaries can act as mode filters
Next higher propagating waveguide mode is not symmetric about vertical center plane of waveguide
Therefore one symmetry case is valid while the other is not
Use caution when using symmetry planes to assure that real behavior is not filtered
out by boundary conditions
Introduction
1-13
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Radiation Boundary
Mimics continued propagation beyond boundary plane
Absorption achieved via 2nd order radiation boundary
Place at least /4 from strongly radiating structure
Place at least /10 from weakly radiating structure
Absorbs best when incident energy flow is normal to surface
Must be concave to all incident fields from within modeled space
Parameters
Advanced options used for incident wave and HFSS DataLink problems
Boundary is /4 away from
horn aperture in all directions
Radiation boundary functions
well for incident angles less
than 25-30
Introduction
1-14
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Fictitious lossy anisotropic material which fully absorbs electromagnetic fields
Two types of PML applications
PML objects accept free radiation if PML terminates free space
PML objects continue guided waves if PML terminates transmission line
Guidelines for assigning PML boundaries
Use PML setup wizard for most cases
Manually create a PML when base object is curved or inhomogeneous
Parameters
Uniform thickness
Minimum frequency
Minimum radiating distance (between PML and antenna)
Perfectly Matched Layer (PML)
PML functions well for
incident angles less
than 65-70
Introduction
1-15
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Radiation Boundary vs PML
Radiation Boundary PML
Type 2D 3D
(occupies volume)
Incident angle from normal < ~30 < ~70
Distance from radiator > /4 > /10
Setup complexity Low Medium
Introduction
1-16
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Master/Slave Boundaries
Used to model unit cell of periodic structure
Also referred to as linked or periodic boundaries
Master and slave boundaries are always paired
Fields on master surface are mapped to slave surface with a phase shift
Phase shift specified either as absolute phase value or using scan angle
Constraints
Master and slave surfaces must be identical in shape and size
Coordinate systems must be created to identify point-to-point
correspondence
Parameters
Master/slave pairing
UV coordinate systems
Phase shift method
Unit Cell Model of Waveguide Array
WG Port
(bottom)
Ground Plane
PML (top)
Master
Boundary
Slave
Boundary
V-
axis
U-axis
Introduction
1-17
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Screening Impedance Boundary
Used to efficiently represent periodic screens or grids with impedance boundary
condition
Can be anisotropic (different values in x and y directions)
Can be frequency-dependent
Periodic grid characterized by unit cell
Dynamic link support to import impedance values from unit cell
Includes effects of polarization
Parameters
Resistance and reactance (/square)
Coordinate system if anisotropic
HFSS design for dynamic link
Introduction
1-18
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Default Outer Boundary
Any exterior face of modeled geometry not given user-defined boundary condition is
assumed to be Perfect E boundary
Default boundary called outer
Imagine entire model buried in solid metal unless HFSS is instructed otherwise
Use HFSS Boundary Display to view all boundary assignments
Graphical window shows both user and auto-assigned boundaries
Introduction
1-19
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Excitations
Provide means for energy to enter and exit model
Types of excitations
Ports
Wave ports
Lumped ports
Floquet ports
Voltage sources
Current sources
Magnetic biases
Incident waves
Plane waves
Hertzian dipole
Cylindrical wave
Gaussian beam
Linear antenna wave
Far-field wave
Near-field wave
Only ports provide S-parameters
This presentation will focus on this type of excitation
Introduction
1-20
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Driven Modal vs Driven Terminal Solutions
Driven modal
S-matrix solution expressed in terms of incident and reflected powers of waveguide modes
Always used by wave solver
Integration lines set phase between ports and modal voltage integration path (Zpv and Zvi)
Use for modal-based S-parameters of passive, high-frequency structures such as microstrips,
waveguides, and transmission lines
Driven terminal
S-matrix solution expressed in terms of linear combination of nodal voltages and currents for wave
port
Equivalent modes-to-nodes transformation performed from modal solution
Use for terminal-based S-parameters of multi-conductor transmission line ports (with several quasi-
TEM modes, etc.)
Introduction
1-21
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Ports
Ports are unique type of boundary condition
Allow energy to flow into and out of structure
Defined on 2D planar surface
2D field patterns serve as boundary conditions for full 3D problem
Incorrect port setup will produce incorrect results
If port fields are incorrect, then solution will be incorrect
Assumed boundary condition on port edges should always be considered
Initial
Mesh
Seeding and
Lambda Refinement
(Single Frequency)
Port Solution
(Adaptive)
Full
Volumetric
Solution
Introduction
1-22
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
External port type
Arbitrary port solver calculates natural waveguide field patterns (modes)
Assumes semi-infinitely long waveguide with same cross-section and material properties as port
surface
Recommended only for surfaces exposed to background object
Supports multiple modes, de-embedding, and re-normalization
Computes generalized S-parameters
Frequency-dependent characteristic impedance
Perfectly matched at every frequency
Wave Ports
Introduction
1-23
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Port Solver
Wave port solver solves two-dimensional wave equation
Field pattern of traveling wave inside waveguide can be determined by solving
Maxwells equations
Wave equation is derived directly from Maxwells equations
where
E(x,y) is phasor representing oscillating electric field
k0 is free space wave number
r is complex relative permeability
r is complex relative permittivity
2D solver obtains excitation field pattern in form of phasor solution E(x,y)
Phasor solutions are independent of z and time
Only after being multiplied by e-z do they become traveling waves
Different excitation field pattern is computed for each frequency point of interest
( ) 0 ) , ( ,
1
2
0
=
y x E k y x E
r
r
Introduction
1-24
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Wave Port Boundary Conditions
All outer edges are assigned Perfect E boundary by default
Port is defined within waveguide
Simple setup for enclosed transmission lines (coax, waveguide, etc.)
Challenging setup for unbalanced or non-enclosed lines (microstrip, CPW, slotline, etc.)
Symmetry or impedance boundaries also recognized at port edges
For port on same surface as radiation boundary, default interface is Perfect E
boundary
Can set option to use radiation boundary on port edges during port solution
Creating port edges too close to current-carrying lines will allow coupling from trace to
port walls
Causes incorrect modal solution which will suffer immediate discontinuity as energy is injected past
port into model
Port too narrow
(fields coupled to sidewalls)
Correct port size
Introduction
1-25
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-25
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Wave Port Sizing Guidelines
Microstrip port height between 6h and
10h
Tend towards upper limit as dielectric
constant drops and fringing fields increase
Make bottom edge of port co-planar with
upper face of ground plane
Microstrip port width
10w for w h
5w, or on order of 3h to 4h, for w < h
Extend stripline port height from upper
to lower groundplane (h)
Stripline port width
8w for w h
5w, or on order of 3h to 4h, for w < h
Can also make side walls of port Perfect
H boundaries
w
h
6h to
10h
10w, w h
or
5w (3h to 4h), w < h
Port sizing guidelines are not inviolable rules. If meeting height
and width requirements result in rectangular aperture larger than
/2 in one dimension, the substrate and trace may be ignored in
favor of a waveguide mode. When in doubt, run a ports-only
solution to determine which modes are propagating.
w
h
8w, w h
or
5w (3h to 4h), w < h
Introduction
1-26
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-26
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Wave Port Sizing Guidelines
Slotline port height at least 4h or 4g
(whichever is larger)
Include air above and below substrate
If ground plane is present, port should
terminate at ground plane
Port width should contain at least 3g to
either side of slot or 7g total minimum
Port boundary must intersect both side
ground planes or they will float and become
signal conductors
Coplanar waveguide port height at least
4h or 4g (whichever is larger)
Include air above and below substrate
If ground plane is present, port should
terminate at ground plane
Port width should contain 3-5g or 3-5s of
side grounds (whichever is larger)
Total width ~10g or ~10s
Port outline must intersect both side grounds
or they will float and become signal
conductors
g
Approx 7g minimum
h
Larger of 4h or 4g
For Driven Modal solutions, use
Z
pv
for impedance calculation
Larger of approx. 10g or 10s
s
h
Larger of 4h or 4g
g
Introduction
1-27
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-27
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Uniformcross Uniformcross Uniformcross Uniformcross- -- -section section section section
addedforeachwaveport addedforeachwaveport addedforeachwaveport addedforeachwaveport
Wave Port Implications
Modes, reflections, and propagation
It is possible for 3D field solution generated by excitation signal of one specific mode to contain
reflections of higher-order modes which arise due to discontinuities
If higher-order mode is reflected back to excitation port or transmitted onto another port, its S-
parameters should be calculated
If higher-order mode decays before reaching any port (because of attenuation or because it is a non-
propagating evanescent mode), there is no need to obtain its S-parameters
Wave ports require a length of uniform cross-section
HFSS assumes that each port is connected to semi-infinitely long waveguide with same cross-section
as wave port
Nouniformcrosssection Nouniformcrosssection Nouniformcrosssection Nouniformcrosssection
atwaveports atwaveports atwaveports atwaveports
Introduction
1-28
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-28
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Wave ports can be placed internal to model by providing boundary condition normally
seen by external wave port
Create PEC cap to back the wave port and enable excitation in proper direction
Example coax feed within solution volume
Coaxial antenna feed
with coaxial wave port
capped by PEC object
Internal Wave Ports
Introduction
1-29
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-29
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Integration Lines
Applicable to driven modal solution types
Port vector which can serve several purposes
Calibration line which specifies direction of excitation electric field pattern at port
Define separate integration line for each mode on multi-mode ports
Impedance line along which to compute Zpv or Zvi port impedance
Select two points with maximum voltage differential
Microstrip line
Waveguide
Slotline
Introduction
1-30
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-30
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Lumped Ports
Recommended only for surfaces internal to model
Single TEM mode with no de-embedding
Uniform electric field on port surface
Normalized to constant user-defined Z0
Lumped port boundary conditions
Perfect E or finite conductivity boundary for port edges which interface
with conductor or another port edge
Perfect H for all remaining port edges
Uniform electric field
User-defined Z
o
Z
o
Dipole element
with lumped port
Introduction
1-31
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-31
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Wave Ports vs Lumped Ports
Wave port Lumped port
Accessibility
External Faces
Internal to Model
Higher order modes
Yes
No
De-embedding
Yes
No
Re-normalization
Yes
Yes
Setup complexity
Moderate
Low
TrainingManual
AnsoftHFSS UserGuide
5.1-1
ANSYS,Inc.Proprietary
2009ANSYS,Inc.Allrightsreserved.
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
TheUltra-HighFrequency(UHF)Probe
Thisexampleisintendedtoshowyouhowtocreate,simulate,andanalyzea
UHFprobe,usingtheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment.
TrainingManual
5.1-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
AnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment
ThefollowingfeaturesoftheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironmentare usedto
createthispassivedevicemodel
3DSolidModeling
Primitives:Cylinders,Boxes Cylinders,Boxes Cylinders,Boxes Cylinders,Boxes
BooleanOperations:Unite,Subtract Unite,Subtract Unite,Subtract Unite,Subtract
Boundaries/Excitations
Ports: WavePorts WavePorts WavePorts WavePorts
Analysis
Sweep:FastFrequency :FastFrequency :FastFrequency :FastFrequency
Results
Cartesianplotting Cartesianplotting Cartesianplotting Cartesianplotting
FieldOverlays:
3DFarFieldPlots 3DFarFieldPlots 3DFarFieldPlots 3DFarFieldPlots
TrainingManual
5.1-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
GettingStarted
LaunchingAnsoftHFSS LaunchingAnsoftHFSS LaunchingAnsoftHFSS LaunchingAnsoftHFSS
1. ToaccessAnsoftHFSS,clicktheMicrosoftStart Start Start Start button,selectPrograms Programs Programs Programs,andselect
theAnsoft,HFSS11 Ansoft,HFSS11 Ansoft,HFSS11 Ansoft,HFSS11 programgroup.ClickHFSS11 HFSS11 HFSS11 HFSS11.
SettingToolOptions SettingToolOptions SettingToolOptions SettingToolOptions
Tosetthetooloptions: Tosetthetooloptions: Tosetthetooloptions: Tosetthetooloptions:
Note: Note: Note: Note:Inordertofollowthestepsoutlinedinthisexample,verifythatthe
followingtooloptionsareset : : : :
1. SelectthemenuitemTools>Options>HFSSOptions Tools>Options>HFSSOptions Tools>Options>HFSSOptions Tools>Options>HFSSOptions
2. HFSSOptionsWindow:
1. ClicktheGeneral General General General tab
UseWizardsfordatainputwhencreatingnewboundaries: : : :
Checked Checked Checked Checked
Duplicateboundarieswithgeometry: : : : Checked Checked Checked Checked
2. ClicktheOK OK OK OK button
3. SelectthemenuitemTools>Options>ModelerOptions Tools>Options>ModelerOptions Tools>Options>ModelerOptions Tools>Options>ModelerOptions.
4. ModelerOptionsWindow:
1. ClicktheOperation Operation Operation Operation tab
Automaticallycoverclosedpolylines: : : : Checked Checked Checked Checked
2. ClicktheDrawing Drawing Drawing Drawing tab
Editpropertyofnewprimitives: : : : Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
5.1-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
OpeningaNewProject OpeningaNewProject OpeningaNewProject OpeningaNewProject
Toopenanewproject: Toopenanewproject: Toopenanewproject: Toopenanewproject:
1. InanAnsoftHFSSwindow,clickthe OntheStandardtoolbar,orselect
themenuitemFile>New File>New File>New File>New.
2. FromtheProject Project Project Project menu,selectInsertHFSSDesign InsertHFSSDesign InsertHFSSDesign InsertHFSSDesign. .. .
SetSolutionType SetSolutionType SetSolutionType SetSolutionType
Tosetthesolutiontype: Tosetthesolutiontype: Tosetthesolutiontype: Tosetthesolutiontype:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>SolutionType HFSS>SolutionType HFSS>SolutionType HFSS>SolutionType
2. SolutionTypeWindow:
1. ChooseDrivenTerminal DrivenTerminal DrivenTerminal DrivenTerminal
TrainingManual
5.1-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
Creatingthe3DModel
SetModelUnits SetModelUnits SetModelUnits SetModelUnits
Tosettheunits: Tosettheunits: Tosettheunits: Tosettheunits:
1. SelectthemenuitemModeler>Units Modeler>Units Modeler>Units Modeler>Units
2. SetModelUnits:
1. SelectUnits:in(inches) in(inches) in(inches) in(inches)
SetDefaultMaterial SetDefaultMaterial SetDefaultMaterial SetDefaultMaterial
Tosetthedefaultmaterial: Tosetthedefaultmaterial: Tosetthedefaultmaterial: Tosetthedefaultmaterial:
1. Usingthe3DModelerMaterialstoolbar,chooseSelect Select Select Select
2. SelectDefinitionWindow:
1. Typecopper copper copper copper intheSearchbyName SearchbyName SearchbyName SearchbyName field
TrainingManual
5.1-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
CreatingAnnularRings CreatingAnnularRings CreatingAnnularRings CreatingAnnularRings
Creatingaringisaccomplishedbycreatingacylinderthatrepresentstheouter
radiusandacylinderthatrepresentstheinnerradius.ByperformingaBoolean
subtraction,theresultinggeometryisaring.
Forthismodel,twosetsofringsarenecessary.Insteadofmanuallycreating
bothrings,wewillcreateonering,copyit,andeditthedimensionsofthecopy.
CreateRing1 CreateRing1 CreateRing1 CreateRing1
1. SelectthemenuitemDraw>Cylinder Draw>Cylinder Draw>Cylinder Draw>Cylinder
2. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthecylinderposition
X:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheradius:
dX:0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31,dY:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ:0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
4. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheheight:
Tosetthename: Tosetthename: Tosetthename: Tosetthename:
1. SelecttheAttribute Attribute Attribute Attribute tabfromtheProperties Properties Properties Properties window.
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:ring_inner ring_inner ring_inner ring_inner
Tofittheview: Tofittheview: Tofittheview: Tofittheview:
1. SelectthemenuitemView>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView. . . .OrpresstheCTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D
key
TrainingManual
5.1-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
CreatingAnnularRings(Continued) CreatingAnnularRings(Continued) CreatingAnnularRings(Continued) CreatingAnnularRings(Continued)
CreateRing1(Continued) CreateRing1(Continued) CreateRing1(Continued) CreateRing1(Continued)
X:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
dX:0.37 0.37 0.37 0.37,dY:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:ring_1 ring_1 ring_1 ring_1
Toselectobjectstobesubtracted: Toselectobjectstobesubtracted: Toselectobjectstobesubtracted: Toselectobjectstobesubtracted:
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>Select>ByName Edit>Select>ByName Edit>Select>ByName Edit>Select>ByName
2. SelectObjectDialog,
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:ring_1,ring_inner ring_1,ring_inner ring_1,ring_inner ring_1,ring_inner
2. ClicktheOK OK OK OKbutton
Tosubtract: Tosubtract: Tosubtract: Tosubtract:
1. SelectthemenuitemModeler>Boolean>Subtract Modeler>Boolean>Subtract Modeler>Boolean>Subtract Modeler>Boolean>Subtract
2. SubtractWindow
BlankParts:ring_1 ring_1 ring_1 ring_1
ToolParts:ring_inner ring_inner ring_inner ring_inner
Clonetoolobjectsbeforesubtract: Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked
ClicktheOK OK OK OK button
TrainingManual
5.1-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
CreatingAnnularRings(Continued) CreatingAnnularRings(Continued) CreatingAnnularRings(Continued) CreatingAnnularRings(Continued)
CreateRing2 CreateRing2 CreateRing2 CreateRing2
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:ring_1 ring_1 ring_1 ring_1
3. SelectthemenuitemEdit>Copy Edit>Copy Edit>Copy Edit>Copy
4. SelectthemenuitemEdit>Paste Edit>Paste Edit>Paste Edit>Paste
ChangethedimensionsofRing2 ChangethedimensionsofRing2 ChangethedimensionsofRing2 ChangethedimensionsofRing2
1. Tochangethedimensionsofring_2,expandthemodeltreeasshown
below.Itshouldbenotedthatorderoftheeditingisimportant.Ifyoumake
theinnerradius>thentheouterradius,ainvalidobjectwillresultanditwill
beremovedfromthemodel.
2. Usingthemouse,doubleclicktheleftmousebuttonontheCreateCylinder CreateCylinder CreateCylinder CreateCylinder
commandforring_2 ring_2 ring_2 ring_2
3. Propertiesdialog
1. Changetheradiusto:0.5in 0.5in 0.5in 0.5in
4. Usingthemouse,doubleclicktheleftmousebuttonontheCreateCylinder CreateCylinder CreateCylinder CreateCylinder
commandforthering_inner1 ring_inner1 ring_inner1 ring_inner1
5. Propertiesdialog
1. Changetheradiusto:0.435in 0.435in 0.435in 0.435in
TrainingManual
5.1-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
CreateArm_1 CreateArm_1 CreateArm_1 CreateArm_1
TocreateArm_1 TocreateArm_1 TocreateArm_1 TocreateArm_1
1. SelectthemenuitemDraw>Box Draw>Box Draw>Box Draw>Box
2. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheboxposition
X:- -- -0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1,Y:- -- -0.31 0.31 0.31 0.31,Z:5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheoppositecornerofthebase
rectangle:
dX:0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2,dY:- -- -4.69 4.69 4.69 4.69,dZ:- -- -0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Arm_1 Arm_1 Arm_1 Arm_1
1. SelectthemenuitemView>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView. . . .OrpresstheCTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D
key.
GroupConductors GroupConductors GroupConductors GroupConductors
Togrouptheconductors: Togrouptheconductors: Togrouptheconductors: Togrouptheconductors:
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible. . . .OrpresstheCTRL+A CTRL+A CTRL+A CTRL+A key
2. Selectthemenuitem,Modeler>Boolean>Unite Modeler>Boolean>Unite Modeler>Boolean>Unite Modeler>Boolean>Unite
TrainingManual
5.1-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
CreatetheCenterpin CreatetheCenterpin CreatetheCenterpin CreatetheCenterpin
Tocreatethecenterpin Tocreatethecenterpin Tocreatethecenterpin Tocreatethecenterpin
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:center_pin center_pin center_pin center_pin
TrainingManual
5.1-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
CreateArm_2 CreateArm_2 CreateArm_2 CreateArm_2
TocreateArm_2 TocreateArm_2 TocreateArm_2 TocreateArm_2
X:- -- -0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1,Y:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z:5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
rectangle:
dX:0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2,dY:5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0,dZ:- -- -0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Arm_2 Arm_2 Arm_2 Arm_2
1. SelectthemenuitemView>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView. . . .
TrainingManual
5.1-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
CreatetheGroundingPin CreatetheGroundingPin CreatetheGroundingPin CreatetheGroundingPin
Tocreatethegroundingpin Tocreatethegroundingpin Tocreatethegroundingpin Tocreatethegroundingpin
X:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y:1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0,Z:0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
dX:0.0625 0.0625 0.0625 0.0625,dY:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0, PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:pin pin pin pin
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Arm_2,center_pin,pin Arm_2,center_pin,pin Arm_2,center_pin,pin Arm_2,center_pin,pin
Note: Note: Note: Note: UsetheCtrl+Leftmousebuttontoselectmultiple
objects
TrainingManual
5.1-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
CreatetheWaveport CreatetheWaveport CreatetheWaveport CreatetheWaveport
Tocreateacirclethatrepresentstheport: Tocreateacirclethatrepresentstheport: Tocreateacirclethatrepresentstheport: Tocreateacirclethatrepresentstheport:
1. SelectthemenuitemDraw>Circle Draw>Circle Draw>Circle Draw>Circle
2. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthecenterposition
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheradiusofthecircle:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:p1 p1 p1 p1
TrainingManual
5.1-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
Usingthe3DModelerMaterialstoolbar,choosevacuum vacuum vacuum vacuum
CreateAir CreateAir CreateAir CreateAir
TocreateAir TocreateAir TocreateAir TocreateAir
X:- -- -5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0,Y:- -- -10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0,Z:0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
rectangle:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Air Air Air Air
3. SettheDisplayWireframe DisplayWireframe DisplayWireframe DisplayWireframe optionto Checked Checked Checked Checked
Todeselectallobjects: Todeselectallobjects: Todeselectallobjects: Todeselectallobjects:
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll. . . .
CreateRadiationBoundary CreateRadiationBoundary CreateRadiationBoundary CreateRadiationBoundary
Tocreatearadiationboundary Tocreatearadiationboundary Tocreatearadiationboundary Tocreatearadiationboundary
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>Select>Faces Edit>Select>Faces Edit>Select>Faces Edit>Select>Faces
2. WhileholdingtheCTRL CTRL CTRL CTRLkey,selectallofthefacesoftheAir Air Air Airvacuum
objectexcept except except except thefaceontheXYplane.Usetherotatebuttoninbetween
selectionstoaccessthebacksidefaces.
3. Oncethe5facesareselected,gotothemenuitemHFSS>Boundaries HFSS>Boundaries HFSS>Boundaries HFSS>Boundaries
>Assign>Radiation >Assign>Radiation >Assign>Radiation >Assign>Radiation
4. RadiationBoundarywindow
1. Name:Rad1 Rad1 Rad1 Rad1
TrainingManual
5.1-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
CreateWavePortExcitation1(Continued) CreateWavePortExcitation1(Continued) CreateWavePortExcitation1(Continued) CreateWavePortExcitation1(Continued)
Toselecttheobjectp1: Toselecttheobjectp1: Toselecttheobjectp1: Toselecttheobjectp1:
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>Select>Objects Edit>Select>Objects Edit>Select>Objects Edit>Select>Objects
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:p1 p1 p1 p1
Toassignwaveportexcitation Toassignwaveportexcitation Toassignwaveportexcitation Toassignwaveportexcitation
1. Selectthemenuitem HFSS>Excitations>Assign>WavePort HFSS>Excitations>Assign>WavePort HFSS>Excitations>Assign>WavePort HFSS>Excitations>Assign>WavePort
2. PlaceArm_2 Arm_2 Arm_2 Arm_2intheConductingObject ConductingObject ConductingObject ConductingObject listandArm_1 Arm_1 Arm_1 Arm_1intheReference Reference Reference Reference
Conductor Conductor Conductor Conductorlist
RenametheWavePortandTerminal RenametheWavePortandTerminal RenametheWavePortandTerminal RenametheWavePortandTerminal
1. DoubleclickonWavePort1 WavePort1 WavePort1 WavePort1 underExcitations Excitations Excitations Excitations intheprojecttree.
2. Renametheporttop1 p1 p1 p1
4. DoubleclickontheterminalnamedArm_2_T1 Arm_2_T1 Arm_2_T1 Arm_2_T1
5. RenametheterminaltoT1 T1 T1 T1
TrainingManual
5.1-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
CreateInfiniteGroundPlane CreateInfiniteGroundPlane CreateInfiniteGroundPlane CreateInfiniteGroundPlane
TocreateanInfiniteground TocreateanInfiniteground TocreateanInfiniteground TocreateanInfiniteground
2. GraphicallyselectthefaceoftheAirobjectatZ=0
3. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Boundaries>Assign>FiniteConductivity HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>FiniteConductivity HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>FiniteConductivity HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>FiniteConductivity
4. FiniteConductivityBoundarywindow
1. Name:gnd_plane gnd_plane gnd_plane gnd_plane
2. UseMaterial: Checked Checked Checked Checked
3. Clickthevacuum vacuum vacuum vacuum button
1. Typecopper copper copper copper intheSearch Search Search Search
byName byName byName byName field
5. InfiniteGroundPlane: Checked Checked Checked Checked
CreateaRadiationSetup CreateaRadiationSetup CreateaRadiationSetup CreateaRadiationSetup
Todefinetheradiationsetup Todefinetheradiationsetup Todefinetheradiationsetup Todefinetheradiationsetup
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Radiation>InsertFarFieldSetup>Infinite HFSS>Radiation>InsertFarFieldSetup>Infinite HFSS>Radiation>InsertFarFieldSetup>Infinite HFSS>Radiation>InsertFarFieldSetup>Infinite
Sphere Sphere Sphere Sphere
2. FarFieldRadiationSphereSetupdialog
1. 1. 1. 1. InfiniteSphere InfiniteSphere InfiniteSphere InfiniteSphere Tab
1. Name:ff_2d ff_2d ff_2d ff_2d
2. Phi:(Start:0, 0, 0, 0,Stop:90, 90, 90, 90,StepSize:90) 90) 90) 90)
3. Theta:(Start:- -- -180, 180, 180, 180,Stop:180, 180, 180, 180,StepSize:2) 2) 2) 2)
TrainingManual
5.1-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
AddLengthBasedMeshOperationtotheRadiationBoundary AddLengthBasedMeshOperationtotheRadiationBoundary AddLengthBasedMeshOperationtotheRadiationBoundary AddLengthBasedMeshOperationtotheRadiationBoundary
Farfieldsarecalculatedbyintegratingthefieldsontheradia Farfieldsarecalculatedbyintegratingthefieldsontheradia Farfieldsarecalculatedbyintegratingthefieldsontheradia Farfieldsarecalculatedbyintegratingthefieldsontheradiationsurface.To tionsurface.To tionsurface.To tionsurface.To
obtainaccuratefarfieldsforantennaproblems,theintegration obtainaccuratefarfieldsforantennaproblems,theintegration obtainaccuratefarfieldsforantennaproblems,theintegration obtainaccuratefarfieldsforantennaproblems,theintegration surfaceshouldbe surfaceshouldbe surfaceshouldbe surfaceshouldbe
forcedtohavea forcedtohavea forcedtohavea forcedtohavea /6to /6to /6to /6to /8maximumtetrahedralength. /8maximumtetrahedralength. /8maximumtetrahedralength. /8maximumtetrahedralength.
Tocreatealengthbasedseedontheradiationboundary: Tocreatealengthbasedseedontheradiationboundary: Tocreatealengthbasedseedontheradiationboundary: Tocreatealengthbasedseedontheradiationboundary:
SwitchbacktoobjectselectionbyselectingthemenuitemEdit>Select Edit>Select Edit>Select Edit>Select
Objects Objects Objects Objects
SelecttheAir Air Air Air objectbyleftclickingitinthedrawingwindow
WhiletheAir Air Air Airobjectisselected,movethemousetotheprojecttreeand
rightclickonMeshOperations MeshOperations MeshOperations MeshOperations > > > >Assign Assign Assign Assign> > > >OnSelection OnSelection OnSelection OnSelection> > > >LengthBased LengthBased LengthBased LengthBased
Name:LengthOnRadiation LengthOnRadiation LengthOnRadiation LengthOnRadiation
MaximumLengthofElements:3.5in 3.5in 3.5in 3.5in(thisisabout /6 /6 /6 /6 at0.55GHz 0.55GHz 0.55GHz 0.55GHz)
TrainingManual
5.1-18
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
AnalysisSetup
CreatinganAnalysisSetup CreatinganAnalysisSetup CreatinganAnalysisSetup CreatinganAnalysisSetup
Tocreateananalysissetup: Tocreateananalysissetup: Tocreateananalysissetup: Tocreateananalysissetup:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup
2. SolutionSetupWindow:
1. ClicktheGeneral General General General tab: :: :
SolutionFrequency:0.55GHz :0.55GHz :0.55GHz :0.55GHz
MaximumNumberofPasses:10 10 10 10
MaximumDeltaSperPass:0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02
2. ClicktheOptions Options Options Options tab:
EnableIterativeSolver: Checked Checked Checked Checked
3. MaximumClicktheOK OK OK OK button
AddingaFrequencySweep AddingaFrequencySweep AddingaFrequencySweep AddingaFrequencySweep
Toaddafrequencysweep: Toaddafrequencysweep: Toaddafrequencysweep: Toaddafrequencysweep:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddFrequencySweep HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddFrequencySweep HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddFrequencySweep HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddFrequencySweep
1. SelectSolutionSetup:Setup1 Setup1 Setup1 Setup1
2. EditSweepWindow:
1. SweepType:Fast :Fast :Fast :Fast
2. FrequencySetupType:LinearCount :LinearCount :LinearCount :LinearCount
Start: 0.35GHz 0.35GHz 0.35GHz 0.35GHz
Stop:0.75GHz :0.75GHz :0.75GHz :0.75GHz
Count:401 :401 :401 :401
SaveFields: Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
5.1-19
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
SaveProject SaveProject SaveProject SaveProject
Tosavetheproject: Tosavetheproject: Tosavetheproject: Tosavetheproject:
1. InanAnsoftHFSSwindow,selectthemenuitemFile>SaveAs File>SaveAs File>SaveAs File>SaveAs.
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:hfss_uhf_probe hfss_uhf_probe hfss_uhf_probe hfss_uhf_probe
3. ClicktheSave Save Save Save button
ModelValidation ModelValidation ModelValidation ModelValidation
Tovalidatethemodel: Tovalidatethemodel: Tovalidatethemodel: Tovalidatethemodel:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>ValidationCheck HFSS>ValidationCheck HFSS>ValidationCheck HFSS>ValidationCheck
2. ClicktheClose Close Close Closebutton
Note: Note: Note: Note: Toviewanyerrorsorwarningmessages,usetheMessage
Manager.
Tostartthesolutionprocess: Tostartthesolutionprocess: Tostartthesolutionprocess: Tostartthesolutionprocess:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>AnalyzeAll HFSS>AnalyzeAll HFSS>AnalyzeAll HFSS>AnalyzeAll
TrainingManual
5.1-20
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
SolutionData SolutionData SolutionData SolutionData
ToviewtheSolutionData: ToviewtheSolutionData: ToviewtheSolutionData: ToviewtheSolutionData:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Results>SolutionData HFSS>Results>SolutionData HFSS>Results>SolutionData HFSS>Results>SolutionData
ToviewtheProfile: ToviewtheProfile: ToviewtheProfile: ToviewtheProfile:
1. ClicktheProfile Profile Profile Profile Tab.
ToviewtheConvergence: ToviewtheConvergence: ToviewtheConvergence: ToviewtheConvergence:
1. ClicktheConvergence Convergence Convergence Convergence Tab
Note: Note: Note: Note:ThedefaultviewisforconvergenceisTable Table Table Table.Select
thePlot Plot Plot Plot radiobuttontoviewagraphicalrepresentationsof
theconvergencedata.
ToviewtheMatrixData: ToviewtheMatrixData: ToviewtheMatrixData: ToviewtheMatrixData:
1. ClicktheMatrixData MatrixData MatrixData MatrixData Tab
Note: Note: Note: Note:Toviewareal-timeupdateoftheMatrixData,setthe
SimulationtoSetup1,LastAdaptive Setup1,LastAdaptive Setup1,LastAdaptive Setup1,LastAdaptive
ToviewtheMeshStatistics: ToviewtheMeshStatistics: ToviewtheMeshStatistics: ToviewtheMeshStatistics:
1. ClicktheMeshStatistics MeshStatistics MeshStatistics MeshStatistics Tab.
2. ClicktheClose Close Close Close button
TrainingManual
5.1-21
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
CreateReports
CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS- -- -ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot- -- - Magnitude Magnitude Magnitude Magnitude
Tocreateareport: Tocreateareport: Tocreateareport: Tocreateareport:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Results>CreateTerminalSolutionData HFSS>Results>CreateTerminalSolutionData HFSS>Results>CreateTerminalSolutionData HFSS>Results>CreateTerminalSolutionData
Report>RectangularPlot Report>RectangularPlot Report>RectangularPlot Report>RectangularPlot
2. TracesWindow: :: :
1. Solution:Setup1:Sweep1 Setup1:Sweep1 Setup1:Sweep1 Setup1:Sweep1
2. Domain:Sweep Sweep Sweep Sweep
3. Category: TerminalSParameter TerminalSParameter TerminalSParameter TerminalSParameter
4. Quantity:St(T1,T1) St(T1,T1) St(T1,T1) St(T1,T1)
5. Function:dB dB dB dB
6. ClicktheNewReport NewReport NewReport NewReport button
Changethex Changethex Changethex Changethex- -- -axislabelsettings: axislabelsettings: axislabelsettings: axislabelsettings:
1. Doubleclickonthenumbersontheplotsx-axistobringuptheproperties
window
2. ChangetheNumberFormat NumberFormat NumberFormat NumberFormat fromAuto Auto Auto Auto to Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal
3. ChangetheFieldPrecision FieldPrecision FieldPrecision FieldPrecision from2 22 2 to0 00 0
TrainingManual
5.1-22
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example UHFProbe
FarFieldOverlays
CreateFarFieldOverlay CreateFarFieldOverlay CreateFarFieldOverlay CreateFarFieldOverlay
Tocreatea2Dpolarfarfieldplot: Tocreatea2Dpolarfarfieldplot: Tocreatea2Dpolarfarfieldplot: Tocreatea2Dpolarfarfieldplot:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Results>CreateFarFieldsReport> HFSS>Results>CreateFarFieldsReport> HFSS>Results>CreateFarFieldsReport> HFSS>Results>CreateFarFieldsReport>
RadiationPattern RadiationPattern RadiationPattern RadiationPattern
1. Solution:Setup1:LastAdaptive Setup1:LastAdaptive Setup1:LastAdaptive Setup1:LastAdaptive
2. Geometry: ff_2d ff_2d ff_2d ff_2d
3. IntheTracetab Tracetab Tracetab Tracetab
1. Category:Gain Gain Gain Gain
2. Quantity:GainTotal GainTotal GainTotal GainTotal
TrainingManual
5.2-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
DualModeConicalHorn
waveguidehornantennausingtheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment.
TrainingManual
5.2-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
ThefollowingfeaturesoftheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment areusedto
createthispassivedevicemodel:
3DSolidModeling
Primitives:Cylinders Cylinders Cylinders Cylinders
Boolean:Union,Subtract,Connect Union,Subtract,Connect Union,Subtract,Connect Union,Subtract,Connect
Excitations:WavePorts WavePorts WavePorts WavePorts
Boundaries:Radiation Radiation Radiation Radiation
Results
Plotting: RadiationPattern RadiationPattern RadiationPattern RadiationPattern
TrainingManual
5.2-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
DesignReview
PortSize/Type PortSize/Type PortSize/Type PortSize/Type
SincetheportisexternaltothemodelwecoulduseaWavePort.Thesize
oftheportisdeterminedbythephysicaldimensionsofthewaveguide.
Becausethewaveguideiscircular,wemustPolarizetheE-Fieldforthe
portdefinition.
FreeSpace FreeSpace FreeSpace FreeSpace
Sinceweareevaluatingaradiatingstructure,weneedtocreate afree
spaceenvironmentforthedevicetooperatein.Thiscanbeachievedby
usingtheRadiationBoundaryconditionoraPerfectlyMatchedLayer
(PML).WewilluseaRadiationBoundarysincethesurfacewillbe
cylindrical.
TheRadiationBoundaryneedstobeplacedatleast/4fromradiating
devices.Forourexamplewewillassumethat~/4(0.6in)
TrainingManual
5.2-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
GettingStarted
1. ToaccessAnsoftHFSS,clicktheMicrosoftStart Start Start Start button,selectPrograms Programs Programs Programs,and
selecttheAnsoft,HFSS11 Ansoft,HFSS11 Ansoft,HFSS11 Ansoft,HFSS11 programgroup.ClickHFSS11 HFSS11 HFSS11 HFSS11
UseWizardsfordataentrywhencreatingnewboundaries: : : :
4. 3DModelerOptionsWindow:
TrainingManual
5.2-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
1. IntheAnsoftHFSSdesktop,anewprojectisautomaticallyinserted.
2. Whenanewprojectisautomaticallyopened,anewHFSSDesignis also
automaticallyinsertedintotheproject.
1. ChooseDrivenModal DrivenModal DrivenModal DrivenModal
TrainingManual
5.2-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
Creatingthe3DModel
2. SetModelUnits:
1. SelectUnits:in in in in
CreateCircularWaveguide CreateCircularWaveguide CreateCircularWaveguide CreateCircularWaveguide
Createwaveguide Createwaveguide Createwaveguide Createwaveguide
X: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
dX: 0.838 0.838 0.838 0.838,dY: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
dX: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0, dY: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ: 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Waveguide Waveguide Waveguide Waveguide
OrpresstheCTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D key
TrainingManual
5.2-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
CreateOffsetCoordinateSystem CreateOffsetCoordinateSystem CreateOffsetCoordinateSystem CreateOffsetCoordinateSystem
CreateCS CreateCS CreateCS CreateCS
1. SelectthemenuitemModeler>CoordinateSystem>Create>Relative Modeler>CoordinateSystem>Create>Relative Modeler>CoordinateSystem>Create>Relative Modeler>CoordinateSystem>Create>Relative
CS>Offset CS>Offset CS>Offset CS>Offset
2. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheorigin
X: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z: 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
CreateTransitionRegion CreateTransitionRegion CreateTransitionRegion CreateTransitionRegion
Createwaveguidetransition Createwaveguidetransition Createwaveguidetransition Createwaveguidetransition
1. SelectthemenuitemDraw>Cone Draw>Cone Draw>Cone Draw>Cone
X: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthelowerradius:
dX: 0.838 0.838 0.838 0.838,dY: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
4. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheupperradius:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Taper Taper Taper Taper
TrainingManual
5.2-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
CreatetheThroat CreatetheThroat CreatetheThroat CreatetheThroat
CreateThroat CreateThroat CreateThroat CreateThroat
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Throat Throat Throat Throat
TrainingManual
5.2-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
GroupObjects GroupObjects GroupObjects GroupObjects
Togrouptheobjects: Togrouptheobjects: Togrouptheobjects: Togrouptheobjects:
Renamegroup Renamegroup Renamegroup Renamegroup
Torenamethegroupofobjects: Torenamethegroupofobjects: Torenamethegroupofobjects: Torenamethegroupofobjects:
1. FromtheModel Model Model Model tree,selecttheonlyobjectshown
2. ClicktheProperties Properties Properties Propertiesbutton
1. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Horn_Air Horn_Air Horn_Air Horn_Air
3. ClicktheDone Done Done Done button
SetWorkingCoordinateSystem SetWorkingCoordinateSystem SetWorkingCoordinateSystem SetWorkingCoordinateSystem
Tosettheworkingcoordinatesystem: Tosettheworkingcoordinatesystem: Tosettheworkingcoordinatesystem: Tosettheworkingcoordinatesystem:
1. SelectthemenuitemModeler>CoordinateSystem>SetWorkingCS Modeler>CoordinateSystem>SetWorkingCS Modeler>CoordinateSystem>SetWorkingCS Modeler>CoordinateSystem>SetWorkingCS
2. SelectCoordinateSystemWindow,
1. Fromthelist,selecttheCS:Global Global Global Global
2. ClicktheSelect Select Select Select button
1. Typepec pec pec pec intheSearchbyName SearchbyName SearchbyName SearchbyName field
TrainingManual
5.2-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
CreatetheHornWall CreatetheHornWall CreatetheHornWall CreatetheHornWall
Createhorn Createhorn Createhorn Createhorn
dX: 1.647 1.647 1.647 1.647,dY: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
dX:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0,dY:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0,dZ:7.463 :7.463 :7.463 :7.463PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Horn Horn Horn Horn
CompletetheHorn CompletetheHorn CompletetheHorn CompletetheHorn
Toselecttheobject Toselecttheobject Toselecttheobject Toselecttheobject
SelectthemenuitemEdit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible. . . .OrpresstheCTRL+A CTRL+A CTRL+A CTRL+A key
Tocompletethehorn: Tocompletethehorn: Tocompletethehorn: Tocompletethehorn:
2. SubtractWindow
BlankParts:Horn Horn Horn Horn
ToolParts:Horn_Air Horn_Air Horn_Air Horn_Air
TrainingManual
5.2-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
X: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
1. SelectthemenuitemView>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView. .. .
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Air Air Air Air
3. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Radiation HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Radiation HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Radiation HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Radiation
TrainingManual
5.2-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
X:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0,Y:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0,Z:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
TrainingManual
5.2-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
2. WavePort:General
1. Name:p1 p1 p1 p1
2. ClicktheNext Next Next Next button
3. WavePort:Modes
1. NumberofModes:2 22 2
2. ForMode1 Mode1 Mode1 Mode1,clicktheNone None None None underIntegrationLine IntegrationLine IntegrationLine IntegrationLinecolumnandselect
NewLine NewLine NewLine NewLine
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthevectorposition
X: : : :- -- -0.838 0.838 0.838 0.838,Y:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0,Z:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
4. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthevertex
5. PolarizeEField: Checked Checked Checked Checked
4. WavePort:PostProcessing
5. ClicktheFinish Finish Finish Finish button
TrainingManual
5.2-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
X:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0,Y:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0,Z:7.463 :7.463 :7.463 :7.463PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
InfiniteSphere InfiniteSphere InfiniteSphere InfiniteSphere Tab
1. 1. 1. 1. CoordinateSystem CoordinateSystem CoordinateSystem CoordinateSystemTab
1. SelectUselocalcoordinatesystem Uselocalcoordinatesystem Uselocalcoordinatesystem Uselocalcoordinatesystem
2. ChooseRelativeCS3 RelativeCS3 RelativeCS3 RelativeCS3
TrainingManual
5.2-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
AnalysisSetup
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:hfss_chorn hfss_chorn hfss_chorn hfss_chorn
Analyze
Manager.
TrainingManual
5.2-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
theconvergencedata.
TrainingManual
5.2-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
FarFieldOverlays
EditSources EditSources EditSources EditSources
ToModifyaTerminalexcitation: ToModifyaTerminalexcitation: ToModifyaTerminalexcitation: ToModifyaTerminalexcitation:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Fields>EditSources HFSS>Fields>EditSources HFSS>Fields>EditSources HFSS>Fields>EditSources
2. EditSourceswindow
1. Source:p1:1 p1:1 p1:1 p1:1
1. ScalingFactor:1 11 1
2. Offset:0 00 0
2. Source: p1:2 p1:2 p1:2 p1:2
1. ScalingFactor:1 11 1
2. OffsetPhase:90 90 90 90
4. Quantity:GainLHCP,GainRHCP GainLHCP,GainRHCP GainLHCP,GainRHCP GainLHCP,GainRHCP
TrainingManual
5.2-18
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ConicalHorn
-36.00
-22.00
-8.00
6.00
90
60
30
0
-30
-60
-90
-120
-150
-180
150
120
Ansoft Corporation HFSSDesign1
Radiation Pattern 1
Curve Info
dB(GainLHCP)
Setup1 : LastAdaptive
Freq='5GHz' Phi='0deg'
dB(GainLHCP)
dB(GainRHCP)
dB(GainRHCP)
TrainingManual
5.3-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ProbeFeedPatchAntenna
TheProbeFeedPatchAntenna
probefeedpatchantennausingtheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment.
InfiniteGround
Sub1(Dielectric)
Patch(Signal)
0.32cm
TrainingManual
5.3-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GettingStarted
theAnsoft>HFSS11 Ansoft>HFSS11 Ansoft>HFSS11 Ansoft>HFSS11 programgroup.ClickHFSS11 HFSS11 HFSS11 HFSS11.
TrainingManual
5.3-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
5.3-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Creatingthe3DModel
2. SetModelUnits:
1. SelectUnits:cm cm cm cm
1. TypeRogersRT/duroid5880(tm) RogersRT/duroid5880(tm) RogersRT/duroid5880(tm) RogersRT/duroid5880(tm) intheSearchbyName SearchbyName SearchbyName SearchbyName field
TrainingManual
5.3-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateSubstrate CreateSubstrate CreateSubstrate CreateSubstrate
Tocreatethesubstrate: Tocreatethesubstrate: Tocreatethesubstrate: Tocreatethesubstrate:
2. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheoppositecornerofthebox
TosettheAttribute TosettheAttribute TosettheAttribute TosettheAttribute
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Sub1 Sub1 Sub1 Sub1
3. SetTransparent Transparent Transparent Transparent levelto0.7
1. SelectthemenuitemView>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView. . . .OrpresstheCTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D key
TrainingManual
5.3-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateInfiniteGround CreateInfiniteGround CreateInfiniteGround CreateInfiniteGround
Tocreatetheinfiniteground: Tocreatetheinfiniteground: Tocreatetheinfiniteground: Tocreatetheinfiniteground:
1. SelectthemenuitemDraw>Rectangle Draw>Rectangle Draw>Rectangle Draw>Rectangle
2. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertherectangleposition
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheoppositecorneroftherectangle:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Inf_GND Inf_GND Inf_GND Inf_GND
AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheInfiniteGround AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheInfiniteGround AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheInfiniteGround AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheInfiniteGround
Toselectthetrace: Toselectthetrace: Toselectthetrace: Toselectthetrace:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Inf_GND Inf_GND Inf_GND Inf_GND
ToassignthePerfectEboundary ToassignthePerfectEboundary ToassignthePerfectEboundary ToassignthePerfectEboundary
1. Selectthemenuitem HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>PerfectE HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>PerfectE HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>PerfectE HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>PerfectE
2. PerfectEBoundarywindow
1. Name:PerfE_Inf_GND PerfE_Inf_GND PerfE_Inf_GND PerfE_Inf_GND
2. InfiniteGroundPlane: Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
5.3-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateInfiniteGroundCutOut CreateInfiniteGroundCutOut CreateInfiniteGroundCutOut CreateInfiniteGroundCutOut
Tocreatethecutout: Tocreatethecutout: Tocreatethecutout: Tocreatethecutout:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Cut_Out Cut_Out Cut_Out Cut_Out
1. SelectthemenuitemView>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView
CompletetheInfiniteGround CompletetheInfiniteGround CompletetheInfiniteGround CompletetheInfiniteGround
ToselecttheobjectsInf_GND&Cut_Out: ToselecttheobjectsInf_GND&Cut_Out: ToselecttheobjectsInf_GND&Cut_Out: ToselecttheobjectsInf_GND&Cut_Out:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Inf_GND,Cut_Out Inf_GND,Cut_Out Inf_GND,Cut_Out Inf_GND,Cut_Out
Tocompletethering: Tocompletethering: Tocompletethering: Tocompletethering:
2. SubtractWindow
BlankParts:Inf_GnD Inf_GnD Inf_GnD Inf_GnD
ToolParts:Cut_Out Cut_Out Cut_Out Cut_Out
TrainingManual
5.3-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatePatch CreatePatch CreatePatch CreatePatch
Tocreatethepatch: Tocreatethepatch: Tocreatethepatch: Tocreatethepatch:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Patch Patch Patch Patch
AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheTrace AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheTrace AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheTrace AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheTrace
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Patch Patch Patch Patch
1. Name:PerfE_Patch PerfE_Patch PerfE_Patch PerfE_Patch
TrainingManual
5.3-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. Usingthe3DModelerMaterialstoolbar,choosevacuum vacuum vacuum vacuum
CreatetheCoax CreatetheCoax CreatetheCoax CreatetheCoax
Tocreatethecoax: Tocreatethecoax: Tocreatethecoax: Tocreatethecoax:
X: - -- -0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5,Y: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
dX: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dY: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ: - -- -0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Coax Coax Coax Coax
TrainingManual
5.3-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatetheCoaxPin CreatetheCoaxPin CreatetheCoaxPin CreatetheCoaxPin
Tocreatethecoaxpin: Tocreatethecoaxpin: Tocreatethecoaxpin: Tocreatethecoaxpin:
dX: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dY: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ: - -- -0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Coax_Pin Coax_Pin Coax_Pin Coax_Pin
TrainingManual
5.3-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
X: : : :- -- -0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5,Y:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0,Z: : : :- -- -0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Port1 Port1 Port1 Port1
ToselecttheobjectPort1: ToselecttheobjectPort1: ToselecttheobjectPort1: ToselecttheobjectPort1:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Port1 Port1 Port1 Port1
2. InthepopupReferenceConductorsforTerminals ReferenceConductorsforTerminals ReferenceConductorsforTerminals ReferenceConductorsforTerminalswindow,leavePin Pin Pin Pinin
ConductingObjects. ConductingObjects. ConductingObjects. ConductingObjects.ClickOK OK OK OK
TrainingManual
5.3-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatetheProbe CreatetheProbe CreatetheProbe CreatetheProbe
Tocreatetheprobe: Tocreatetheprobe: Tocreatetheprobe: Tocreatetheprobe:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Probe Probe Probe Probe
TrainingManual
5.3-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Tocreatetheair: Tocreatetheair: Tocreatetheair: Tocreatetheair:
TosettheAtttribute: TosettheAtttribute: TosettheAtttribute: TosettheAtttribute:
3. SetTransparent Transparent Transparent Transparent levelto 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
TrainingManual
5.3-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Pickingthefaces: Pickingthefaces: Pickingthefaces: Pickingthefaces:
2. Graphicallyselectall all all all ofthefaces faces faces faces oftheAir Air Air Air objectexcept except except exceptthefaceatZ=0.0cm faceatZ=0.0cm faceatZ=0.0cm faceatZ=0.0cm
1. SelecttheInfiniteSphere InfiniteSphere InfiniteSphere InfiniteSphere Tab
TrainingManual
5.3-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AnalysisSetup
2. ClicktheOption Option Option Option tab:
SolutionOperations/OrderofBasisFunctions:SecondOrder SecondOrder SecondOrder SecondOrder
EnableIterativeSolver Checked Checked Checked Checked
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSweep HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSweep HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSweep HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSweep
2. EditSweepWindow:
Count:201 :201 :201 :201
TrainingManual
5.3-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:hfss_probepatch hfss_probepatch hfss_probepatch hfss_probepatch
Analyze
Manager.
TrainingManual
5.3-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
theconvergencedata.
ToviewtheMeshStatistics ToviewtheMeshStatistics ToviewtheMeshStatistics ToviewtheMeshStatistics
1. ClicktheMeshStatistics MeshStatistics MeshStatistics MeshStatistics Tab
TrainingManual
5.3-18
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
3. ClicktheTrace Trace Trace Trace tab
2. Quantity:St(coax_pin_T1,coax_pin_T1) St(coax_pin_T1,coax_pin_T1) St(coax_pin_T1,coax_pin_T1) St(coax_pin_T1,coax_pin_T1)Function:dB dB dB dB
Markalltraces Markalltraces Markalltraces Markalltraces
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>SelectAll Edit>SelectAll Edit>SelectAll Edit>SelectAll
2. Selectthemenuitem Report2D>Marker>AddMinimum Report2D>Marker>AddMinimum Report2D>Marker>AddMinimum Report2D>Marker>AddMinimum
3. Whenyouarefinished,selectthemenuitemReport2D>Marker>Clear Report2D>Marker>Clear Report2D>Marker>Clear Report2D>Marker>Clear
All All All Alltoremovethemarker.
1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50
Freq [GHz]
-25.00
-20.00
-15.00
-10.00
-5.00
0.00
d
B
(
S
t
(
c
o
a
x
_
p
i
n
_
T
1
,
c
o
a
x
_
p
i
n
_
T
1
)
)
XY Plot 1
m1
Curve Info
dB(St(coax_pin_T1,coax_pin_T1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
Name X Y
m1 2.3625 -21.4575
TrainingManual
5.3-19
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
FarFieldOverlays
3. IntheFamilies Families Families Families tab,changethefrequencyto2.3625GHz 2.3625GHz 2.3625GHz 2.3625GHz
1. PrimarySweep: Theta Theta Theta Theta
3. Quantity:GainTotal GainTotal GainTotal GainTotal
-14.00
-8.00
-2.00
4.00
90
60
30
0
-30
-60
-90
-120
-150
-180
150
120
Radiation Pattern 1
Curve Info
dB(GainTotal)
Setup1 : Sweep1
Phi='0deg'
dB(GainTotal)
Setup1 : Sweep1
Phi='90deg'
TrainingManual
5.4-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example SlotCoupledPatchAntenna
TheSlotCoupledPatchAntenna
probefeedpatchantennausingtheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment.
Slot(Plane)
Feed(Signal)
Sub2(Dielectric)
0.16cm
Sub1(Dielectric)
Patch(Signal)
0.16cm
TrainingManual
5.4-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GettingStarted
theAnsoft>HFSS11 Ansoft>HFSS11 Ansoft>HFSS11 Ansoft>HFSS11 programgroup.ClickHFSS11 HFSS11 HFSS11 HFSS11
UseWizardsfordatainputwhencreatingnewboundaries: : : :
TrainingManual
5.4-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
5.4-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Creatingthe3DModel
2. SetModelUnits:
1. TypeRogers Rogers Rogers RogersintheSearchbyName SearchbyName SearchbyName SearchbyName fieldandselecttherowfor
RogersRT/duroid5880(tm) RogersRT/duroid5880(tm) RogersRT/duroid5880(tm) RogersRT/duroid5880(tm)
TrainingManual
5.4-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Sub1 Sub1 Sub1 Sub1
3. ChangetheColor Color Color Color toLightGray LightGray LightGray LightGray
4. ChangetheTrasparency Trasparency Trasparency Trasparency to0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
TrainingManual
5.4-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatetheFeed CreatetheFeed CreatetheFeed CreatetheFeed
Tocreatethefeed: Tocreatethefeed: Tocreatethefeed: Tocreatethefeed:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Feed Feed Feed Feed
3. ChangetheColor Color Color Color toBrightBlue BrightBlue BrightBlue BrightBlue
AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheFeed AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheFeed AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheFeed AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheFeed
Toselectthefeed: Toselectthefeed: Toselectthefeed: Toselectthefeed:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Feed Feed Feed Feed
1. Name:PerfE_Feed PerfE_Feed PerfE_Feed PerfE_Feed
2. InfiniteGroundPlane: Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked
TrainingManual
5.4-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateGround CreateGround CreateGround CreateGround
Tocreatetheground: Tocreatetheground: Tocreatetheground: Tocreatetheground:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Ground Ground Ground Ground
3. ChangetheColor Color Color Color toRed Red Red Red
4. ChangetheTransparency Transparency Transparency Transparency to0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheGround AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheGround AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheGround AssignaPerfectEboundarytotheGround
Toselecttheground: Toselecttheground: Toselecttheground: Toselecttheground:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Ground Ground Ground Ground
1. Name:PerfE_Ground PerfE_Ground PerfE_Ground PerfE_Ground
2. InfiniteGroundPlane: Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked
TrainingManual
5.4-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateSlotCutOut CreateSlotCutOut CreateSlotCutOut CreateSlotCutOut
Tocreatethecutout: Tocreatethecutout: Tocreatethecutout: Tocreatethecutout:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Slot Slot Slot Slot
CompletetheGround CompletetheGround CompletetheGround CompletetheGround
Toselecttheobjectsground&slot Toselecttheobjectsground&slot Toselecttheobjectsground&slot Toselecttheobjectsground&slot
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Ground,Slot Ground,Slot Ground,Slot Ground,Slot
Toperformthebooleansubtraction: Toperformthebooleansubtraction: Toperformthebooleansubtraction: Toperformthebooleansubtraction:
2. SubtractWindow
BlankParts:Ground Ground Ground Ground
ToolParts:Slot Slot Slot Slot
TrainingManual
5.4-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatePatch CreatePatch CreatePatch CreatePatch
Tocreatethepatch: Tocreatethepatch: Tocreatethepatch: Tocreatethepatch:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Patch Patch Patch Patch
3. ChangetheColor Color Color Color toOrange Orange Orange Orange
4. ChangetheTransparency Transparency Transparency Transparency to0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
Toselectthepatch: Toselectthepatch: Toselectthepatch: Toselectthepatch:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Patch Patch Patch Patch
1. Name:PerfE_Patch PerfE_Patch PerfE_Patch PerfE_Patch
TrainingManual
5.4-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
X:- -- -7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0,Y:- -- -4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5,Z:- -- -2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
3. ChangetheColor Color Color Color toBlack Black Black Black
4. ChangeDisplayWireframe DisplayWireframe DisplayWireframe DisplayWireframeto Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
5.4-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Pickingthefaces: Pickingthefaces: Pickingthefaces: Pickingthefaces:
1. SelecttheInfiniteSphere InfiniteSphere InfiniteSphere InfiniteSphere Tab
TrainingManual
5.4-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AddLengthBasedMeshOperationtotheRadiationBoundary AddLengthBasedMeshOperationtotheRadiationBoundary AddLengthBasedMeshOperationtotheRadiationBoundary AddLengthBasedMeshOperationtotheRadiationBoundary
Farfieldsarecalculatedbyintegratingthefieldsontheradia Farfieldsarecalculatedbyintegratingthefieldsontheradia Farfieldsarecalculatedbyintegratingthefieldsontheradia Farfieldsarecalculatedbyintegratingthefieldsontheradiationsurface.To tionsurface.To tionsurface.To tionsurface.To
obtainaccuratefarfieldsforantennaproblems,theintegration obtainaccuratefarfieldsforantennaproblems,theintegration obtainaccuratefarfieldsforantennaproblems,theintegration obtainaccuratefarfieldsforantennaproblems,theintegration surfaceshouldbe surfaceshouldbe surfaceshouldbe surfaceshouldbe
forcedtohavea forcedtohavea forcedtohavea forcedtohavea /6to /6to /6to /6to /8maximumtetrahedralength. /8maximumtetrahedralength. /8maximumtetrahedralength. /8maximumtetrahedralength.
Tocreatealengthbasedseedontheradiationboundary: Tocreatealengthbasedseedontheradiationboundary: Tocreatealengthbasedseedontheradiationboundary: Tocreatealengthbasedseedontheradiationboundary:
1. SelecttheAir Air Air Air objectbyleftclickingitinthedrawingwindow
2. WhiletheAir Air Air Airobjectisselected,movethemousetotheprojecttreeand
rightclickonMeshOperations MeshOperations MeshOperations MeshOperations > > > >Assign Assign Assign Assign> > > >OnSelection OnSelection OnSelection OnSelection> > > >LengthBased LengthBased LengthBased LengthBased
3. Name:LengthOnRadiation LengthOnRadiation LengthOnRadiation LengthOnRadiation
4. MaximumLengthofElements:2cm 2cm 2cm 2cm(thisisabout /6 /6 /6 /6 at2.3GHz 2.3GHz 2.3GHz 2.3GHz)
TrainingManual
5.4-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
SetGridPlane SetGridPlane SetGridPlane SetGridPlane
Tosetthegridplane: Tosetthegridplane: Tosetthegridplane: Tosetthegridplane:
1. SelectthemenuitemModeler>GridPlane>YZ Modeler>GridPlane>YZ Modeler>GridPlane>YZ Modeler>GridPlane>YZ
CreateSource CreateSource CreateSource CreateSource
Tocreatesource: Tocreatesource: Tocreatesource: Tocreatesource:
rectangle:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Source Source Source Source
3. ChangetheColor Color Color Color toBrightGreen BrightGreen BrightGreen BrightGreen
TrainingManual
5.4-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AssignExcitation AssignExcitation AssignExcitation AssignExcitation
ToselecttheobjectSource: ToselecttheobjectSource: ToselecttheobjectSource: ToselecttheobjectSource:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Source Source Source Source
Note Note Note Note:YoucanalsoselecttheobjectfromtheModel
Tree
Toassignlumpedportexcitation Toassignlumpedportexcitation Toassignlumpedportexcitation Toassignlumpedportexcitation
1. Selectthemenuitem HFSS>Excitations>Assign>LumpedPort HFSS>Excitations>Assign>LumpedPort HFSS>Excitations>Assign>LumpedPort HFSS>Excitations>Assign>LumpedPort
2. PlaceFeed Feed Feed FeedintheConductingObject ConductingObject ConductingObject ConductingObject listandGround Ground Ground Ground intheReference Reference Reference Reference
Conductor Conductor Conductor Conductorlist
RenametheLumpedPortandTerminal RenametheLumpedPortandTerminal RenametheLumpedPortandTerminal RenametheLumpedPortandTerminal
1. DoubleclickonLumpPort1 LumpPort1 LumpPort1 LumpPort1 underExcitations Excitations Excitations Excitations intheprojecttree.
2. Renametheporttop1 p1 p1 p1
4. DoubleclickontheterminalnamedFeed_T1 Feed_T1 Feed_T1 Feed_T1
5. RenametheterminaltoT1 T1 T1 T1
TrainingManual
5.4-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AnalysisSetup
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolution HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolution HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolution HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolution
Setup Setup Setup Setup
MaximumDeltaS:0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02
2. ClicktheOptions Options Options Options tab:
EnableIterativeSolver: Checked Checked Checked Checked
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddFrequency HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddFrequency HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddFrequency HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddFrequency
Sweep Sweep Sweep Sweep
2. EditSweepWindow:
Count:201 :201 :201 :201
TrainingManual
5.4-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:hfss_slotpatch hfss_slotpatch hfss_slotpatch hfss_slotpatch
Manager.
TrainingManual
5.4-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
theconvergencedata.
ToviewtheMeshStatistics: ToviewtheMeshStatistics: ToviewtheMeshStatistics: ToviewtheMeshStatistics:
1. ClicktheMeshStatistics MeshStatistics MeshStatistics MeshStatistics Tab.
TrainingManual
5.4-18
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
4. Quantity:St(T1,T1), St(T1,T1), St(T1,T1), St(T1,T1),
3. Addaminimummarkertothetrace
1. Selectthetracebyleftclickingonit
2. GotoReport2D Report2D Report2D Report2D> > > >Marker Marker Marker Marker> > > >AddMinimum AddMinimum AddMinimum AddMinimum
1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50
Freq [GHz]
-12.00
-10.00
-8.00
-6.00
-4.00
-2.00
0.00
d
B
(
S
t
(
p
1
,
p
1
)
)
Ansoft Corporation HFSSModel1 XY Plot 1
m1
Curve Info
dB(St(p1,p1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
Name X Y
m1 2.2875 -10.1263
TrainingManual
5.4-19
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
FarFieldOverlays
3. IntheFamilies Families Families Families tab,changethefrequencyto2.2875GHz 2.2875GHz 2.2875GHz 2.2875GHz
2. Quantity:GainPhi,GainTheta GainPhi,GainTheta GainPhi,GainTheta GainPhi,GainTheta
-60.00
-40.00
-20.00
0.00
90
60
30
0
-30
-60
-90
-120
-150
-180
150
120
Ansoft Corporation HFSSModel1
Radiation Pattern 1
Curve Info
dB(GainPhi)
Setup1 : Sweep1
Freq='2.2875GHz' Phi='0deg'
dB(GainPhi)
Setup1 : Sweep1
dB(GainTheta)
Setup1 : Sweep1
dB(GainTheta)
Setup1 : Sweep1
TrainingManual
5.5-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example WaveguideArrayExample
TheWaveguideArray
WaveguidearrayantennausingtheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment
AWavePortwillbeusedforthewaveguidefeedexcitation
AFloquetPortwillbeusedforthephasedarraysfreespaceexcitationand
termination
Master/Slaveboundaryconditionswillbeusedtocreatethearraysunitcell
Reference:
[1]N.Amitay,V.GalindoandC.Wu,TheoryandAnalysisofPhasedArrayAntennas,Wiley-Interscience,
1972,ISBN0-471-02553-4,section5.2.1.
TrainingManual
5.5-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
DesignReview
Insteadofmodelingtheentirearray,wewillmakeuseofthemaster/slave
boundariesandonlymodelaunitcell.
AFloquetPortwillbeusedtoexciteandterminatethemodelfromfreespace.
ThisportworksinconjunctionwiththeMaster/Slaveboundariestoenforcethe
arraysperiodicityandallowforachangingscanangle.
3DSolidModeling
Primitives:Box
Ports:WavePorts,FloquetPorts
Boundaries:Master/Slave
Analysis
Sweep:Interpolating
Results
Cartesianplotting
Optimetrics
Parametricsweep
TrainingManual
5.5-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
LaunchingAnsoftHFSS
ToaccessAnsoftHFSS,clicktheMicrosoftStartbutton,selectPrograms,and
selecttheAnsoft>HFSS11programgroup.ClickHFSS11
SettingToolOptions
Tosetthetooloptions:
Note:Inordertofollowthestepsoutlinedinthisexample,verifythatthe
followingtooloptionsareset:
SelectthemenuitemTools>Options>HFSSOptions Tools>Options>HFSSOptions Tools>Options>HFSSOptions Tools>Options>HFSSOptions
HFSSOptionsWindow:
ClicktheGeneral General General General tab
UseWizardsfordataentrywhencreatingnewboundaries:
Duplicateboundarieswithgeometry: Checked Checked Checked Checked
SelectthemenuitemTools>Options>ModelerOptions Tools>Options>ModelerOptions Tools>Options>ModelerOptions Tools>Options>ModelerOptions.
3DModelerOptionsWindow:
ClicktheOperation Operation Operation Operation tab
Automaticallycoverclosedpolylines: Checked Checked Checked Checked
ClicktheDrawing Drawing Drawing Drawing tab
Editpropertiesofnewprimitives: Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
5.5-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
OpeningaNewProject
Toopenanewproject:
WhenAnsoftHFSSopensitshouldautomaticallyopenanewproject.
SetSolutionType
Tosetthesolutiontype:
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>SolutionType HFSS>SolutionType HFSS>SolutionType HFSS>SolutionType
SolutionTypeWindow:
ChooseDrivenModal DrivenModal DrivenModal DrivenModal
Creatingthe3DModel
SetModelUnits
Tosettheunits:
SelectthemenuitemModeler>Units Modeler>Units Modeler>Units Modeler>Units
SetModelUnits:
SelectUnits:in in in in
SetDefaultMaterial
Tosetthedefaultmaterial:
Usingthe3DModelerMaterialstoolbar,makesurethatvacuum vacuum vacuum vacuum isthe
defaultmaterial
TrainingManual
5.5-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateWaveguide
Tocreatethewaveguide:
SelectthemenuitemDraw>Box Draw>Box Draw>Box Draw>Box
Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheboxposition
X:- -- -12.28 12.28 12.28 12.28,Y:- -- -12.28 12.28 12.28 12.28,Z:- -- -55 55 55 55,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheoppositecornerofthebox
dX:24.56 24.56 24.56 24.56,dY:24.56 :24.56 :24.56 :24.56,dZ:55 55 55 55,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
Tosetthename:
SelecttheAttribute Attribute Attribute Attribute tabfromthePropertieswindow.
FortheValueofName Name Name Name type:waveguide waveguide waveguide waveguide
ClickontheValueofTransparent Transparent Transparent Transparent andchangetheValueto0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
ClicktheOK OK OK OK buttontoacceptthetransparencychanges
Tofittheview:
SelectthemenuitemView>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveVieworpresstheCTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D
keys
TrainingManual
5.5-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateAirbox
Tocreatetheairbox:
Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheboxposition
Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheoppositecornerofthebox
Tosetthename:
SelecttheAttribute Attribute Attribute Attribute tabfromthePropertieswindow.
FortheValueofName Name Name Name type:Airbox Airbox Airbox Airbox
ClickontheValueofTransparent Transparent Transparent Transparent andchangetheValueto0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
ClicktheOK OK OK OK buttontoacceptthetransparencychanges
Tofittheview:
SelectthemenuitemView>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView orpresstheCTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D
keys
Todeselectallobject:
SelectthemenuitemEdit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll
TrainingManual
5.5-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateFirstMasterBoundary
ToselecttheMasterboundaryface
SelectthemenuitemEdit>Select>Faces Edit>Select>Faces Edit>Select>Faces Edit>Select>Faces
SelectthemenuitemEdit>Select>ByName Edit>Select>ByName Edit>Select>ByName Edit>Select>ByName
SelectFacedialog:SelecttheobjectAirbox Airbox Airbox Airbox fromtheleftcolumn
Select Select Select Select differentFaceIDs FaceIDs FaceIDs FaceIDs untilthesidefacelocatedonthe
positivex positivex positivex positivex- -- -axis axis axis axisoftheAirbox Airbox Airbox Airbox ishighlighted.
TocreatetheMasterBoundary
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Master HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Master HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Master HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Master
CompleteMasterBoundarydialogwindow
Name:Master1 Master1 Master1 Master1
CoordinateSystem:UVector UVector UVector UVector:ClicktheUndefined Undefined Undefined Undefined pulldownand
select select select select NewVector NewVector NewVector NewVector.
Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthestartposition
X:13.246 13.246 13.246 13.246,Y:- -- -13.246 13.246 13.246 13.246,Z:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthestoppositionofthe
vector
dX:0 00 0,dY:26.492 26.492 26.492 26.492,dZ:0 00 0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
FortheVvector Vvector Vvector Vvector,checktheReverseDirection: ReverseDirection: ReverseDirection: ReverseDirection: Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
5.5-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateSecondMasterBoundary
ToselecttheMasterboundaryface
Select Select Select Select differentFaceID FaceID FaceID FaceIDsuntilthesidefacelocatedonthe
positivey positivey positivey positivey- -- -axis axis axis axisoftheAirbox Airbox Airbox Airbox ishighlighted.
TocreatetheMasterBoundary
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Master HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Master HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Master HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Master
CompleteMasterBoundarydialogwindow
Name:Master2 Master2 Master2 Master2
CoordinateSystem:UVecto UVecto UVecto UVector:clicktheUndefined Undefined Undefined Undefined pulldownand
selectNewVector selectNewVector selectNewVector selectNewVector.
vector
dX:- -- -26.492 26.492 26.492 26.492,dY:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
FortheVvector Vvector Vvector Vvector,checktheReverseDirection: ReverseDirection: ReverseDirection: ReverseDirection: Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
5.5-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateFirstSlaveBoundary
ToselecttheSlaveboundaryface
Select Select Select Select differentFaceID FaceID FaceID FaceIDsuntilthesidefacelocatedonthe
negativex negativex negativex negativex- -- -axis axis axis axisoftheAirbox Airbox Airbox Airbox ishighlighted.
TocreatetheSlaveBoundary
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Slave HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Slave HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Slave HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Slave
CompleteGeneralDataTab
Name:Slave1 Slave1 Slave1 Slave1
MasterBoundary:clickonUndefined Undefined Undefined Undefined pulldownandselect:Master1 Master1 Master1 Master1
CoordinateSystem:UVecto UVecto UVecto UVector:clicktheUndefined Undefined Undefined Undefined pulldownand
selectNewVector selectNewVector selectNewVector selectNewVector.
vector
ClicktheNext Next Next Next button
Continuedonnextpage
TrainingManual
5.5-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TocreatetheSlaveBoundary(Continued)
CompletePhaseDelayTab
MakesurethatUseScanAnglesToCalculatePhaseDelay UseScanAnglesToCalculatePhaseDelay UseScanAnglesToCalculatePhaseDelay UseScanAnglesToCalculatePhaseDelay is
checked
ForPhi Phi Phi Phi,enteravariablenamephi_scan phi_scan phi_scan phi_scan
ForTheta Theta Theta Theta,enteravariablename theta_scan theta_scan theta_scan theta_scan
ClicktheFinish Finish Finish Finish button
FortheAddVariable AddVariable AddVariable AddVariable dialogcorrespondingtophi_scan phi_scan phi_scan phi_scan,
Enter90deg 90deg 90deg 90deg
ClicktheOK OK OK OKbutton
FortheAddVariable AddVariable AddVariable AddVariable dialogcorrespondingtotheta_scan theta_scan theta_scan theta_scan,
Enter0deg 0deg 0deg 0deg
CreateSecondSlaveBoundary
ToselecttheSlaveboundaryface
Select Select Select Select differentFaceID FaceID FaceID FaceIDsuntilthesidefacelocatedonthenegative negative negative negative
y yy y- -- -axis axis axis axisoftheAirbox Airbox Airbox Airbox ishighlighted.
TrainingManual
5.5-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateSecondSlaveBoundary(continued)
TocreateSlaveboundary
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Slave HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Slave HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Slave HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Slave
CompleteGeneralDataTab
Name:Slave2 Slave2 Slave2 Slave2
MasterBoundary:clickonUndefined Undefined Undefined Undefined pulldownandselect:Master2 Master2 Master2 Master2
CoordinateSystem:UVector UVector UVector UVector:clicktheUndefined Undefined Undefined Undefined pulldownand
selectNewVector. NewVector. NewVector. NewVector.
X:13.246 13.246 13.246 13.246,Y: : : :- -- -13.246 13.246 13.246 13.246,Z:0.0,PresstheEnterkey
vector
dX:- -- -26.492 26.492 26.492 26.492,dY:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,PresstheEnterkey
checked
TrainingManual
5.5-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateWavePort
ToselecttheWaveportface
Selecttheobjectwaveguide waveguide waveguide waveguide fromtheleftcolumn
Select Select Select Select differentFaceID FaceID FaceID FaceIDsuntilthebottom bottom bottom bottomfaceofthe
waveguide waveguide waveguide waveguide ishighlighted.
TocreateWavePort:
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Excitation>Assign>WavePort HFSS>Excitation>Assign>WavePort HFSS>Excitation>Assign>WavePort HFSS>Excitation>Assign>WavePort
CompletetheGeneralTab
Name:p1 p1 p1 p1
ClickNext Next Next Next
CompletetheModesTab
NumberofModes:2 22 2
Mode1 Mode1 Mode1 Mode1:clickontheNone None None None pulldownlocatedundertheIntegration Integration Integration Integration
LineColumn LineColumn LineColumn LineColumnandselectNewLine NewLine NewLine NewLine
X:- -- -12.28 12.28 12.28 12.28,Y:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z:- -- -55.0 55.0 55.0 55.0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
vector
Continuedonnextpage
TrainingManual
5.5-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TocreateWavePort(continued):
CompleteModeTab(continued)
Mode2:clickontheNone None None None pulldownlocatedundertheIntegration Integration Integration Integration
LineColumn LineColumn LineColumn LineColumnandselectNewLine NewLine NewLine NewLine
X:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y:- -- -12.28 12.28 12.28 12.28,Z:- -- -55 55 55 55,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
vector
PolarizeEField: Checked Checked Checked Checked
CheckingPolarizeEFieldwillcauseHFSStousethe
analyticalwaveguidemodesolutionstoproperlypolarizethe
electricfieldintheport.Theanalyticalsolutionisonly
invokedforcanonicalwaveguidestructureslikerectangular
waveguide,circularwaveguideandcoaxialwaveguide.For
allotherportgeometriesHFSSwillenforcethepolarization
withouttheanalyticalsolution.HFSSstillperformsa
numericalsolutionoftheportsmodes,butwillorientthefield
polarizationsthroughitsknowledgeoftheanalyticalsolution.
CompletethePostProcessingTab
ClickFinish Finish Finish Finish
TrainingManual
5.5-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateFloquetPort
ToselecttheFloquetPortface
SelecttheobjectAirbox Airbox Airbox Airbox fromtheleftcolumn
Select Select Select Select differentFaceID FaceID FaceID FaceIDsuntilthetop top top top faceoftheAirBox AirBox AirBox AirBox is
highlighted.
TocreateFloquetPort:
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Excitation>Assign>FloquetPort HFSS>Excitation>Assign>FloquetPort HFSS>Excitation>Assign>FloquetPort HFSS>Excitation>Assign>FloquetPort
CompletetheGeneralTab
Name:FP1 FP1 FP1 FP1
ADirectionLatticeCoordinate:click click click click ontheUndefined Undefined Undefined Undefinedpulldown
locatedandselectNewVector NewVector NewVector NewVector
X:- -- -13.246 13.246 13.246 13.246,Y:- -- -13.246 13.246 13.246 13.246,Z:55 55 55 55,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
vector
BDirectionLatticeCoordinate:click click click click ontheUndefined Undefined Undefined Undefined pulldown
locatedandselectNewVector NewVector NewVector NewVector
X:- -- -13.246 13.246 13.246 13.246,Y:- -- -13.246 13.246 13.246 13.246,Z:55 55 55 55,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
vector
ClickNext Next Next Next
Continuedonnextpage
TrainingManual
5.5-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TocreateFloquetPort(continued):
checked
ClicktheModesCalculator ModesCalculator ModesCalculator ModesCalculatorbutton
CompletetheModesSetupTab
NumberofModes:10 10 10 10
Frequency:299.79MHz 299.79MHz 299.79MHz 299.79MHz
checked
Phi:90deg 90deg 90deg 90deg
Theta:90deg 90deg 90deg 90deg
HFSShasaModesCalculatortohelpdeterminethenumberofmodesthatshould
beincludedintheFloquetPort.AnymodethatisnotdefinedintheModesSetup
Tabwillbeshortcircuitedattheportandreflectedbacktowardthearray.For
accurateresultsallmodesthathaveasignificantamountofenergyattheport
mustbeincludedintheModesSetupTab.
TheFloquetModecalculatorisgoingtorequestthenumberofmodesthatshould
beevaluated,afrequencyandascanangletocalculateeachmodesattenuation
constant.Themodeswiththeleastattenuationaregoingtooccuratthehighest
simulationfrequencyandatlocationsinthescanvolumethatareclosetograting
lobes.Therefore,wearegoingtosettheseconditionsintheModesCalculatorto
determinetheattenuationindB/lengthforeachmode.Wewillthenrestrictthe
numberofmodestoonlyincludethemodeswithasignificantcontributiontothe
arraysperformance
HFSShasaModesCalculatortohelpdeterminethenumberofmodesthatshould
beincludedintheFloquetPort.AnymodethatisnotdefinedintheModesSetup
Tabwillbeshortcircuitedattheportandreflectedbacktowardthearray.For
accurateresultsallmodesthathaveasignificantamountofenergyattheport
mustbeincludedintheModesSetupTab.
TheFloquetModecalculatorisgoingtorequestthenumberofmodesthatshould
beevaluated,afrequencyandascanangletocalculateeachmodesattenuation
constant.Themodeswiththeleastattenuationaregoingtooccuratthehighest
simulationfrequencyandatlocationsinthescanvolumethatareclosetograting
lobes.Therefore,wearegoingtosettheseconditionsintheModesCalculatorto
determinetheattenuationindB/lengthforeachmode.Wewillthenrestrictthe
numberofmodestoonlyincludethemodeswithasignificantcontributiontothe
arraysperformance
TrainingManual
5.5-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Noticethatthefirst4modeshaveanattenuationof0.00dB/length.Thisindicatesthatthey
arepropagatingmodes.TheTE00andTM00modescorrespondtothemainbeamsofthex
andypolarizedpatterns.respectively.TheTE0-1andTM0-1modescorrespondtothe
gratinglobesofxandypolarizedpatterns.
Modes5through10haveattenuationof1.67dB/lengthor2.06dB/lengthdependingthe
mode.Thelengthportionofthisattenuationiscalculatedinthemodelsunit(inchesforthis
example).TocalculateamodestotalattenuationfromthearraytotheFloquetPort,the
attenuationvaluedisplayedintheModesSetupTabneedstobemultipliedbythedistance
betweenthearrayfaceandtheFloquetPort.
Forthisexamplethisdistanceis55in.ThereforetheTE-1-1modeexperiences1.67*55=
91.85dBofattenuationasitpropagatesfromthearrayfacetotheFloquetPort.
LikewisetheTE10modeexperience2.06*55=113.3dBofattenuationacrossthissame
distance.
Itthereforeissafetoonlyincludethefirst4modesintheFloquetPortdefinition.
Noticethatthefirst4modeshaveanattenuationof0.00dB/length.Thisindicatesthatthey
arepropagatingmodes.TheTE00andTM00modescorrespondtothemainbeamsofthex
andypolarizedpatterns.respectively.TheTE0-1andTM0-1modescorrespondtothe
gratinglobesofxandypolarizedpatterns.
Modes5through10haveattenuationof1.67dB/lengthor2.06dB/lengthdependingthe
mode.Thelengthportionofthisattenuationiscalculatedinthemodelsunit(inchesforthis
example).TocalculateamodestotalattenuationfromthearraytotheFloquetPort,the
attenuationvaluedisplayedintheModesSetupTabneedstobemultipliedbythedistance
betweenthearrayfaceandtheFloquetPort.
Forthisexamplethisdistanceis55in.ThereforetheTE-1-1modeexperiences1.67*55=
91.85dBofattenuationasitpropagatesfromthearrayfacetotheFloquetPort.
LikewisetheTE10modeexperience2.06*55=113.3dBofattenuationacrossthissame
distance.
Itthereforeissafetoonlyincludethefirst4modesintheFloquetPortdefinition.
TrainingManual
5.5-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TocreateFloquetPort(continued):
ChangetheNumberofModes NumberofModes NumberofModes NumberofModes:4 44 4
Completethe3DRefinementTab
CompletethePostProcessingTab
Forthisexampleweonlyincludedthemodesthatpropagateatthehighestsimulated
frequencyforthelargestscanangleintheplanecorrespondingtheclosestgrating
lobe.Althoughthesemodesarepropagatingforthisinstance,theymaynotbe
propagatingforothercaseswherethefrequencyislowerorthescanangleas
extreme.Thecaseswhereanyofthesemodesareheavilyattenuatedcancausean
unusuallydensemeshconcentratedattheport.Thiswillsignificantlydecreasethe
simulationefficiencyandinmanyphasedarraycasesthereismoreinterestin
terminatingthesemodesthanexcitingthem.Toimprovethesimulationsefficiency
HFSSallowsyoutodeterminewhichFloquetModesareexcitedfor thepurposesof
refiningthemeshduringtheadaptivemeshingprocess.Whichmodesaffectthe
adaptivemeshingprocessiscontrolledbycheckingtheboxunder theAffects
Refinementcolumnonthe3DRefinementTab.Thisexerciseisonlyinterestedin
excitingtheproblemfromthewaveguideside.ThereforenoneoftheFloquetModes
aregoingtobeexcitedintheadaptivemeshrefinement
Forthisexampleweonlyincludedthemodesthatpropagateatthehighestsimulated
frequencyforthelargestscanangleintheplanecorrespondingtheclosestgrating
lobe.Althoughthesemodesarepropagatingforthisinstance,theymaynotbe
propagatingforothercaseswherethefrequencyislowerorthescanangleas
extreme.Thecaseswhereanyofthesemodesareheavilyattenuatedcancausean
unusuallydensemeshconcentratedattheport.Thiswillsignificantlydecreasethe
simulationefficiencyandinmanyphasedarraycasesthereismoreinterestin
terminatingthesemodesthanexcitingthem.Toimprovethesimulationsefficiency
HFSSallowsyoutodeterminewhichFloquetModesareexcitedfor thepurposesof
refiningthemeshduringtheadaptivemeshingprocess.Whichmodesaffectthe
adaptivemeshingprocessiscontrolledbycheckingtheboxunder theAffects
Refinementcolumnonthe3DRefinementTab.Thisexerciseisonlyinterestedin
excitingtheproblemfromthewaveguideside.ThereforenoneoftheFloquetModes
aregoingtobeexcitedintheadaptivemeshrefinement
TrainingManual
5.5-18
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatinganAnalysisSetup
Tocreateananalysissetup:
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup
SolutionSetupWindow:
ClicktheGeneral General General General tab:
SolutionFrequency:299.79MHz 299.79MHz 299.79MHz 299.79MHz
MaximumNumberofPasses:6 66 6
MaximumDeltaS:0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02
ClicktheOptions Options Options Options tab:
MinimumNumberofPasses:5 55 5
CreatingaFrequencySweep:
Tocreateananalysissetup:
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddFrequencySweep HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddFrequencySweep HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddFrequencySweep HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddFrequencySweep
ChooseSetup1 Setup1 Setup1 Setup1 frompop-upwindowandclicktheOK OK OK OK button
EditSweepWindow
SweepType:Interpolating Interpolating Interpolating Interpolating
FrequencySetupType:LinearStep LinearStep LinearStep LinearStep
Start:200MHz 200MHz 200MHz 200MHz
Stop:300MHz 300MHz 300MHz 300MHz
Step:0.1MHz 0.1MHz 0.1MHz 0.1MHz
TrainingManual
5.5-19
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
SaveProject
Tosavetheproject:
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:hfss_array hfss_array hfss_array hfss_array
Analyze
ModelValidation
Tovalidatethemodel:
Manager.
Analyze
Tostartthesolutionprocess:
TrainingManual
5.5-20
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
SolutionData
ToviewtheSolutionData:
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Results>SolutionData HFSS>Results>SolutionData HFSS>Results>SolutionData HFSS>Results>SolutionData
ToviewtheProfile:
ClicktheProfile Profile Profile Profile Tab.
ToviewtheConvergence:
ClicktheConvergence Convergence Convergence Convergence Tab
Note Note Note Note:ThedefaultviewforconvergenceisTable.Selectthe
Plotradiobuttontoviewagraphicalrepresentationsofthe
convergencedata.
ToviewtheMatrixData:
ClicktheMatrixData MatrixData MatrixData MatrixDataTab
Note Note Note Note:Toviewareal-timeupdateoftheMatrixData,setthe
SimulationtoSetup1,LastAdaptiveduringsolution.
ClicktheClose Close Close Close buttonwhendoneviewingorsimulation
complete.
TrainingManual
5.5-21
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateFloquetModePlotvsFrequency
TocreateaRectangularplot:
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Results>CreateModalSolutionData HFSS>Results>CreateModalSolutionData HFSS>Results>CreateModalSolutionData HFSS>Results>CreateModalSolutionData
NewReport NewTracesWindow:
Solution:Setup1:Sweep1 Setup1:Sweep1 Setup1:Sweep1 Setup1:Sweep1
Category:S SS S- -- -Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter
Quantity:S(FP1:3,P1:1),S(FP1:4,P1:1),S(P1:1,P1:1) S(FP1:3,P1:1),S(FP1:4,P1:1),S(P1:1,P1:1) S(FP1:3,P1:1),S(FP1:4,P1:1),S(P1:1,P1:1) S(FP1:3,P1:1),S(FP1:4,P1:1),S(P1:1,P1:1)
Function:dB dB dB dB
ClicktheNewReport NewReport NewReport NewReportbutton
ClicktheClosebutton
ThisplotshowshowtheX-PolarizedWaveguidemodecouplesintotheTE00andTM00
modesatboresightasfrequencyissweptfrom200MHzto300MHz.
Noticethatjustabove240MHzthereturnlossspikesto0dBandthecouplingtoboththeTE00
andTM00modesshowasharpdiscontinuity.ThisiscausedbytheTE10waveguidemode
transitioningoutfrombeingcutoff.
ThisplotshowshowtheX-PolarizedWaveguidemodecouplesintotheTE00andTM00
modesatboresightasfrequencyissweptfrom200MHzto300MHz.
Noticethatjustabove240MHzthereturnlossspikesto0dBandthecouplingtoboththeTE00
andTM00modesshowasharpdiscontinuity.ThisiscausedbytheTE10waveguidemode
transitioningoutfrombeingcutoff.
TrainingManual
5.5-22
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
OptimetricsSetup
Forthisarraydesign,wewanttoseetheeffectofscanangleontheinputmatch
oftheantenna.Todothis,wemustsweepthescananglewithaparametric
sweep.
AddaSecondSolutionSetup
Createananalysissetup:
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup HFSS>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup
SolutionSetupWindow:
ClicktheGeneraltab:
SetupName:Setup2 Setup2 Setup2 Setup2
SolutionFrequency:299.79MHz 299.79MHz 299.79MHz 299.79MHz
MaximumDeltaS:0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02
ClicktheOptionstab:
MinimumNumberofPasses:2 22 2
TrainingManual
5.5-23
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AddaParametricSweep
Tocreateaparametricsetup
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>AddParametric HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>AddParametric HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>AddParametric HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>AddParametric
SetupSweepAnalysisWindow:
ClicktheSweepDefinitionstab:
ClicktheAdd Add Add Add button
Add/EditSweepDialog
SelectVariable:theta_scan theta_scan theta_scan theta_scan
SelectLinearStep LinearStep LinearStep LinearStep
Start:0deg 0deg 0deg 0deg
Stop:90deg 90deg 90deg 90deg
Step:10deg 10deg 10deg 10deg
ClicktheAdd>> Add>> Add>> Add>> button
ClicktheGeneral General General Generaltab:
UncheckSetup1Include Setup1Include Setup1Include Setup1Include
ClicktheOptions Options Options Options tab:
CheckSaveFieldsandMeshes SaveFieldsandMeshes SaveFieldsandMeshes SaveFieldsandMeshes
CheckCopygeometricallyequivalentmeshes Copygeometricallyequivalentmeshes Copygeometricallyequivalentmeshes Copygeometricallyequivalentmeshes
ClickOK OK OK OK toaccepttheParametricSweepsettings
Note:Theplotsshownfortheparametricsweepcontain
anadditionalsweepfortheta_scantoimprovetheplot
resolution:
Type:LinearStep
Start:27.1deg
Stop:27.9deg
Step:0.1deg
Note:Theplotsshownfortheparametricsweepcontain
anadditionalsweepfortheta_scantoimprovetheplot
resolution:
Type:LinearStep
Start:27.1deg
Stop:27.9deg
Step:0.1deg
TrainingManual
5.5-24
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
SaveProject
Tosavetheproject:
InanAnsoftHFSSwindow,selectthemenuitemFile>Save File>Save File>Save File>Save
AnalyzeParametricSweep
Tostartthesolutionprocess:
ExpandtheProjectTreetodisplaytheitemslistedunderOptimetrics
Right-clickthemouseonParametricSetup1 ParametricSetup1 ParametricSetup1 ParametricSetup1andchooseAnalyze Analyze Analyze Analyze
OptimetricsResults
ToviewtheOptimetricsResults:
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>OptimetricsResults HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>OptimetricsResults HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>OptimetricsResults HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>OptimetricsResults
SelecttheProfileTabtoviewthesolutionprogressforeachsetup.
ClicktheClose Close Close Close buttonwhenyouarefinishedviewingtheresults
TrainingManual
5.5-25
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatePropagationConstantPlot
Tocreateareport:
TracesWindow:
Solution:Setup2:LastAdaptive Setup2:LastAdaptive Setup2:LastAdaptive Setup2:LastAdaptive
X XX X:Switchtotheta_scan theta_scan theta_scan theta_scan
Category:Gamma Gamma Gamma Gamma
Quantity:SelectAllQuantities SelectAllQuantities SelectAllQuantities SelectAllQuantities
Function:Im Im Im Im
ClicktheClose Close Close Close button
NoticethatFloquetModes1and2donotstartpropagatinguntil thearrayisscannedto29deg.
ThesemodearetheTE0-1andTM0-1modesrespectivelyandrepresentthegratinglobes
associatedwiththeE-phiandE-thetapatternsrespectively.Themainbeams(TE00and
TM00)arethe3rdand4thFloquetModes.Thesemodespropagatetotheedgeofrealspace.
NoticethatFloquetModes1and2donotstartpropagatinguntil thearrayisscannedto29deg.
ThesemodearetheTE0-1andTM0-1modesrespectivelyandrepresentthegratinglobes
associatedwiththeE-phiandE-thetapatternsrespectively.Themainbeams(TE00and
TM00)arethe3rdand4thFloquetModes.Thesemodespropagatetotheedgeofrealspace.
TrainingManual
5.5-26
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateS-ParameterPlot
Tocreateareport:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Results>CreateModalSolutionData HFSS>Results>CreateModalSolutionData HFSS>Results>CreateModalSolutionData HFSS>Results>CreateModalSolutionData
2. X:Switchtotheta_scan theta_scan theta_scan theta_scan
3. Category:SParameter SParameter SParameter SParameter
4. Quantity:S(FP1:2,p1:2),S(FP1:4,p1:2),S(p1:2,p1:2) S(FP1:2,p1:2),S(FP1:4,p1:2),S(p1:2,p1:2) S(FP1:2,p1:2),S(FP1:4,p1:2),S(p1:2,p1:2) S(FP1:2,p1:2),S(FP1:4,p1:2),S(p1:2,p1:2)
5. Function:mag mag mag mag
Noticethetransmissionforthe1stFloquetModeisnotsignificantuntiljustbelow30degscan.
ThismodecorrespondstotheTM0-1modewhichdoesntpropagateuntil29degscan.Atthis
samescanangleascanblindnessisobservedinthereturnlossandthetransmissionforthe
4thFloquetMode(TM00)dropssharply.
Noticethetransmissionforthe1stFloquetModeisnotsignificantuntiljustbelow30degscan.
ThismodecorrespondstotheTM0-1modewhichdoesntpropagateuntil29degscan.Atthis
samescanangleascanblindnessisobservedinthereturnlossandthetransmissionforthe
4thFloquetMode(TM00)dropssharply.
0.00 10.00 20.00 30.00 40.00 50.00 60.00 70.00 80.00 90.00
theta_scan [deg]
0.00
0.10
0.20
0.30
0.40
0.50
0.60
0.70
0.80
0.90
1.00
Y
1
XY Plot 5
Curve Info
mag(S(FP1:2,p1:1))
Freq='0.29979GHz'
mag(S(FP1:4,p1:1))
Freq='0.29979GHz'
mag(S(p1:1,p1:1))
Freq='0.29979GHz'
TrainingManual
5.5-27
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateActiveElementPattern
Tocreateareport:
TracesWindow:
Solution:Setup2:LastAdaptive Setup2:LastAdaptive Setup2:LastAdaptive Setup2:LastAdaptive
X:Switchtotheta_scan theta_scan theta_scan theta_scan
Y:
10*log(4*pi*701.8/39.361^2*mag(S(p1:2,FP1:4))^2*cos(theta_scan)) 10*log(4*pi*701.8/39.361^2*mag(S(p1:2,FP1:4))^2*cos(theta_scan)) 10*log(4*pi*701.8/39.361^2*mag(S(p1:2,FP1:4))^2*cos(theta_scan)) 10*log(4*pi*701.8/39.361^2*mag(S(p1:2,FP1:4))^2*cos(theta_scan))
701.8istheunitcellareainsquareinches
39.361inchesisthewavelengthinfreespace
ClicktheClose Close Close Close button
DoubleclickontheY-axisoftheplot
ClicktheScaletab:
SpecifyMin: Checked Checked Checked Checked
Min:- -- -60 60 60 60
Spacing:10 10 10 10
0.00 10.00 20.00 30.00 40.00 50.00 60.00 70.00 80.00 90.00
theta_scan [deg]
-60.00
-50.00
-40.00
-30.00
-20.00
-10.00
0.00
10.00
20.00
1
0
*
l
o
g
(
4
*
p
i
*
7
0
1
.
8
/
3
9
.
3
6
1
^
2
*
m
a
g
(
S
(
p
1
:
1
,
F
P
1
:
4
)
)
^
2
*
c
o
s
(
t
h
e
t
a
_
s
c
a
n
)
)
XY Plot 6
Curve Info
10*log(4*pi*701.8/39.361^2*mag(S(p1:1,FP1:4))^2*cos(theta_scan))
Freq='0.29979GHz'
TrainingManual
6.1-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example MagicT
TheMagicT
MagicT,whichisacommonlyusedmicrowavedevice,usingtheAnsoftHFSS
DesignEnvironment.
NominalDesign: NominalDesign: NominalDesign: NominalDesign:
Waveguide: Waveguide: Waveguide: Waveguide:
Width=50.0mm Width=50.0mm Width=50.0mm Width=50.0mm
Height=20.0mm Height=20.0mm Height=20.0mm Height=20.0mm
Length= Length= Length= Length= 75.0mm 75.0mm 75.0mm 75.0mm
Port1
Port2
Port3 Port4
Width
Length
Height
TrainingManual
6.1-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example MagicT
ThefollowingfeaturesoftheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment areusedtocreate
thispassivedevicemodel
3DSolidModeling
Primitives:Box Box Box Box
BooleanOperations: Unite,Duplicate Unite,Duplicate Unite,Duplicate Unite,Duplicate
Excitations
Ports:WavePorts WavePorts WavePorts WavePorts
Analysis
Sweep:InterpolatingFrequency :InterpolatingFrequency :InterpolatingFrequency :InterpolatingFrequency
Results
Fields
3DFieldPlots,Animations 3DFieldPlots,Animations 3DFieldPlots,Animations 3DFieldPlots,Animations
TrainingManual
6.1-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example MagicT
GettingStarted
TrainingManual
6.1-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example MagicT
Bydefault,whenHFSSfirststartsup,anewprojectwillbeope Bydefault,whenHFSSfirststartsup,anewprojectwillbeope Bydefault,whenHFSSfirststartsup,anewprojectwillbeope Bydefault,whenHFSSfirststartsup,anewprojectwillbeopened. ned. ned. ned.
IfyouhavebeenworkinginHFSSandneedtoopenanewproject: IfyouhavebeenworkinginHFSSandneedtoopenanewproject: IfyouhavebeenworkinginHFSSandneedtoopenanewproject: IfyouhavebeenworkinginHFSSandneedtoopenanewproject:
2. Expandthefolderandreviewthesub-foldersintheProjectManager
TrainingManual
6.1-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example MagicT
Creatingthe3DModel
2. SetModelUnits:
1. SelectUnits:mm mm mm mm
1. Usingthe3DModelerMaterialspicklist inthetoolbar,choosevacuum vacuum vacuum vacuum
CreateTopArm CreateTopArm CreateTopArm CreateTopArm
Tocreatearm1: Tocreatearm1: Tocreatearm1: Tocreatearm1:
2. 2. 2. 2. PresstheTabkeytomovethecursortothecoordinateentryfie PresstheTabkeytomovethecursortothecoordinateentryfie PresstheTabkeytomovethecursortothecoordinateentryfie PresstheTabkeytomovethecursortothecoordinateentryfields lds lds lds
rectangle:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Arm Arm Arm Arm
TrainingManual
6.1-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example MagicT
CreateWavePortExcitation1 CreateWavePortExcitation1 CreateWavePortExcitation1 CreateWavePortExcitation1
Pickingtheportface: Pickingtheportface: Pickingtheportface: Pickingtheportface:
2. Graphicallyselect(clickon)thetopfaceofthearmatZ=75mm
2. WavePort:General
1. Name:p1 p1 p1 p1
3. WavePort:Modes
Topface
WavePortFace
TrainingManual
6.1-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example MagicT
SetObjectSelection SetObjectSelection SetObjectSelection SetObjectSelection
Setselecttoobjects Setselecttoobjects Setselecttoobjects Setselecttoobjects
CreateArm2 CreateArm2 CreateArm2 CreateArm2
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible. . . .OrpresstheCTRL+A CTRL+A CTRL+A CTRL+A key.
2. Selectthemenuitem,Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis.
1. Axis:X XX X
2. Angle:90 90 90 90
3. TotalNumber:2 22 2
5. ClickOKinthePropertiesdialog
CreateArm3&4 CreateArm3&4 CreateArm3&4 CreateArm3&4
ToselecttheobjectArm_1: ToselecttheobjectArm_1: ToselecttheobjectArm_1: ToselecttheobjectArm_1:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Arm_1 Arm_1 Arm_1 Arm_1
Tocreatearm3&4: Tocreatearm3&4: Tocreatearm3&4: Tocreatearm3&4:
1. Axis:Z ZZ Z
2. Angle:90 90 90 90
5. ClickOKinthePropertiesdialog
TrainingManual
6.1-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example MagicT
GrouptheArms GrouptheArms GrouptheArms GrouptheArms
Togroupthearms: Togroupthearms: Togroupthearms: Togroupthearms:
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>DeselectAll. Edit>DeselectAll. Edit>DeselectAll. Edit>DeselectAll.OrpresstheCTRL+SHIFT+A CTRL+SHIFT+A CTRL+SHIFT+A CTRL+SHIFT+Akey
3. Selectthemenuitem Modeler>Boolean>Unite Modeler>Boolean>Unite Modeler>Boolean>Unite Modeler>Boolean>Unite
4. SelectthemenuitemEdit>DeselectAll. Edit>DeselectAll. Edit>DeselectAll. Edit>DeselectAll.OrpresstheCTRL+SHIFT+A CTRL+SHIFT+A CTRL+SHIFT+A CTRL+SHIFT+A
key
BoundaryDisplay BoundaryDisplay BoundaryDisplay BoundaryDisplay
Toverifytheboundarysetup: Toverifytheboundarysetup: Toverifytheboundarysetup: Toverifytheboundarysetup:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>BoundaryDisplay HFSS>BoundaryDisplay HFSS>BoundaryDisplay HFSS>BoundaryDisplay (SolverView) (SolverView) (SolverView) (SolverView)
2. FromtheSolverViewofBoundaries,toggletheVisibilitycheckboxforthe
boundariesyouwishtodisplay.
Note: Note: Note: Note: Thebackground(PerfectConductor)isdisplayedastheouter outer outer outer
boundary.
Note: Note: Note: Note: ThePerfectConductorsaredisplayedasthesmetal smetal smetal smetal boundary.
Note: Note: Note: Note: Selectthemenuitem,View>ActiveViewVisibility View>ActiveViewVisibility View>ActiveViewVisibility View>ActiveViewVisibility tohideall
ofthegeometryobjects.Thismakesiteasiertoseetheboundary
conditions.
3. ClicktheClose Close Close Close buttonwhenyouarefinished
TrainingManual
6.1-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example MagicT
AnalysisSetup
2. ClicktheOptionsTab
1. MinimumConvergedPasses:3 33 3
2. EditSweepWindow:
1. SweepType:Interpolating :Interpolating :Interpolating :Interpolating
Count:1001 :1001 :1001 :1001
TrainingManual
6.1-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example MagicT
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:hfss_magic_t hfss_magic_t hfss_magic_t hfss_magic_t
Analyze
Manager.
TrainingManual
6.1-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example MagicT
theconvergencedata.
Note: Note: Note: Note:Toviewareal-timeupdateoftheMatrixDataduring
analysis,openthisdialogandsettheSimulationtoSetup1, Setup1, Setup1, Setup1,
LastAdaptive LastAdaptive LastAdaptive LastAdaptive
TrainingManual
6.1-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example MagicT
CreateReports
CreateModalS CreateModalS CreateModalS CreateModalS- -- -ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass
Note: Note: Note: Note:Ifthisreportiscreatedpriororduringthesolutionprocess,areal-time
updateoftheresultsaredisplayed
2. ReportDialog: :: :
1. Solution:Setup1: Setup1: Setup1: Setup1:AdaptivePass AdaptivePass AdaptivePass AdaptivePass
2. ClicktheTrace Trace Trace Tracetab
1. X:Pass Pass Pass Pass
3. Quantity:S(p1,p1),S(p1,p2),S(p1,p3),S(p1,p4) S(p1,p1),S(p1,p2),S(p1,p3),S(p1,p4) S(p1,p1),S(p1,p2),S(p1,p3),S(p1,p4) S(p1,p1),S(p1,p2),S(p1,p3),S(p1,p4)(Note:Hold
downtheCtrlkeytoselectmultipleQuantities)
3. ClicktheNewReport NewReport NewReport NewReportbutton
1 . 0 0 1 . 5 0 2 . 0 0 2 . 5 0 3 . 0 0 3 . 5 0 4 . 0 0
P a s s
- 7 0 . 0 0
- 6 0 . 0 0
- 5 0 . 0 0
- 4 0 . 0 0
- 3 0 . 0 0
- 2 0 . 0 0
- 1 0 . 0 0
0 . 0 0
Y
1
A n s o f t C o r p o r a ti o n H F S S D e s i g n 1
X Y P lo t 2
C u r ve In fo
d B ( S ( p 1 , p 1 ) )
S e t u p 1 : A d a p t i ve P a s s
F r e q = '4 G H z '
d B ( S ( p 1 , p 2 ) )
F r e q = '4 G H z '
d B ( S ( p 1 , p 3 ) )
F r e q = '4 G H z '
d B ( S ( p 1 , p 4 ) )
TrainingManual
6.1-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example MagicT
CreateModalS CreateModalS CreateModalS CreateModalS- -- -ParameterPlotvs.Freq ParameterPlotvs.Freq ParameterPlotvs.Freq ParameterPlotvs.Freq
2. 2. 2. 2. Domain:Sweep Domain:Sweep Domain:Sweep Domain:Sweep
1. X:Freq Freq Freq Freq
3. Quantity:S(p1,p1),S(p1,p2),S(p1,p3),S(p1,p4) S(p1,p1),S(p1,p2),S(p1,p3),S(p1,p4) S(p1,p1),S(p1,p2),S(p1,p3),S(p1,p4) S(p1,p1),S(p1,p2),S(p1,p3),S(p1,p4)(Holddown
theCtrlkeytoselectmultipleQuantities)
TrainingManual
6.1-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example MagicT
CreateFieldOverlay CreateFieldOverlay CreateFieldOverlay CreateFieldOverlay
Toselectanobject: Toselectanobject: Toselectanobject: Toselectanobject:
1. SelectmenuitemWindows>hfss_magic_T Windows>hfss_magic_T Windows>hfss_magic_T Windows>hfss_magic_T- -- -HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1- -- -Modeler Modeler Modeler Modeler
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Arm Arm Arm Arm
4. SelectthemenuEdit>Properties Edit>Properties Edit>Properties Edit>Properties
1. SelectAttributeTab
2. ClickontheTransparencybutton
3. SetTransparencytoaprox .75
4. ClickOK OK OK OK button
5. Click OK OK OK OK buttontoexitpropertieswindow
5. Press Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl- -- -A AA A toensurewaveguideisselected.
6. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E> HFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E> HFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E> HFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E>Mag_E Mag_E Mag_E Mag_E
7. CreateFieldPlotWindow
1. Solution:Setup1: Setup1: Setup1: Setup1:LastAdaptive LastAdaptive LastAdaptive LastAdaptive
2. Quantity:Mag_E Mag_E Mag_E Mag_E
3. InVolume:AllObjects AllObjects AllObjects AllObjects
FieldAnimations FieldAnimations FieldAnimations FieldAnimations
ToAnimateaMagnitudefieldplot: ToAnimateaMagnitudefieldplot: ToAnimateaMagnitudefieldplot: ToAnimateaMagnitudefieldplot:
1. SelectthemenuitemView>Animate View>Animate View>Animate View>Animate
2. IntheSweptVariable SweptVariable SweptVariable SweptVariable tab,acceptthedefaultssettings:
1. Sweptvariable:Phase Phase Phase Phase
2. Start:0deg 0deg 0deg 0deg
3. Stop:180deg 180deg 180deg 180deg
4. Steps:9 99 9
3. ClickOK OK OK OK
TrainingManual
6.2-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example CoaxialConnector
TheCoaxialConnector
coaxialconnector,usingtheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment.
TrainingManual
6.2-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
3DSolidModeling
Primitives:Cylinders, Cylinders, Cylinders, Cylinders,Polylines Polylines Polylines Polylines,Circles ,Circles ,Circles ,Circles
BooleanOperations:Unite,Subtract,andSweep Unite,Subtract,andSweep Unite,Subtract,andSweep Unite,Subtract,andSweep
Ports: WavePortsandTerminalLines WavePortsandTerminalLines WavePortsandTerminalLines WavePortsandTerminalLines
Analysis
Results
FieldOverlays:
3DFieldPlots,Animations,Cut 3DFieldPlots,Animations,Cut 3DFieldPlots,Animations,Cut 3DFieldPlots,Animations,Cut- -- -Planes Planes Planes Planes
TrainingManual
6.2-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GettingStarted
3. SelectthemenuitemTools>Options>3DModelerOptions Tools>Options>3DModelerOptions Tools>Options>3DModelerOptions Tools>Options>3DModelerOptions.
TrainingManual
6.2-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
6.2-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Creatingthe3DModel
2. SetModelUnits:
1. UsingtheModelerMaterialstoolbar,chooseSelect Select Select Select
TrainingManual
6.2-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatetheConductor1 CreatetheConductor1 CreatetheConductor1 CreatetheConductor1
Tocreatetheconductor Tocreatetheconductor Tocreatetheconductor Tocreatetheconductor
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Conductor1 Conductor1 Conductor1 Conductor1
TocreateanoffsetCoordinateSystem: TocreateanoffsetCoordinateSystem: TocreateanoffsetCoordinateSystem: TocreateanoffsetCoordinateSystem:
1. SelectthemenuitemModeler>CoordinateSystem>Create> Modeler>CoordinateSystem>Create> Modeler>CoordinateSystem>Create> Modeler>CoordinateSystem>Create>
RelativeCS>Offset RelativeCS>Offset RelativeCS>Offset RelativeCS>Offset
CreateaSection CreateaSection CreateaSection CreateaSection
Tosectiontheconductor Tosectiontheconductor Tosectiontheconductor Tosectiontheconductor
2. SelectthemenuitemModeler>Surface>Section Modeler>Surface>Section Modeler>Surface>Section Modeler>Surface>Section
3. SectionWindow
SectionPlane: XY XY XY XY
TrainingManual
6.2-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
RenametheSection RenametheSection RenametheSection RenametheSection
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>List HFSS>List HFSS>List HFSS>List
2. FromtheModel Model Model Model tab,selecttheobjectnamedConductor1_Section1 Conductor1_Section1 Conductor1_Section1 Conductor1_Section1
3. ClicktheProperties Properties Properties Propertiesbuttoninthebottom
1. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Bend Bend Bend Bend
CreateConductorBend CreateConductorBend CreateConductorBend CreateConductorBend
Tocreatethebend: Tocreatethebend: Tocreatethebend: Tocreatethebend:
1. SelectthemenuitemDraw>Arc>CenterPoint Draw>Arc>CenterPoint Draw>Arc>CenterPoint Draw>Arc>CenterPoint
2. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthevertexpoint:
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheradialpoint:
4. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthesweeparclength:
X:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y:0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4,Z:0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4, PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
5. Usingthemouse,right-clickandselectDone Done Done Done
6. ClicktheOK OK OK OK buttonwhenthePropertiesdialogappears
SweepBend: SweepBend: SweepBend: SweepBend:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Bend,Polyline1 Bend,Polyline1 Bend,Polyline1 Bend,Polyline1
3. SelectthemenuitemDraw>Sweep>AlongPath Draw>Sweep>AlongPath Draw>Sweep>AlongPath Draw>Sweep>AlongPath
4. SweepalongpathWindow
Angleoftwist: 0 00 0
DraftAngle:0 00 0
DraftType:Round Round Round Round
TrainingManual
6.2-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. SelectthemenuitemModeler>GridPlane>XZ Modeler>GridPlane>XZ Modeler>GridPlane>XZ Modeler>GridPlane>XZ
1. SelectthemenuitemModeler>CoordinateSystem> Modeler>CoordinateSystem> Modeler>CoordinateSystem> Modeler>CoordinateSystem>
Create>RelativeCS>Offset Create>RelativeCS>Offset Create>RelativeCS>Offset Create>RelativeCS>Offset
TrainingManual
6.2-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GrouptheConductors GrouptheConductors GrouptheConductors GrouptheConductors
SelectthemenuitemEdit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll
2. Selectthemenuitem,3DModeler>Boolean>Unite 3DModeler>Boolean>Unite 3DModeler>Boolean>Unite 3DModeler>Boolean>Unite
TrainingManual
6.2-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatetheFemaleEnd CreatetheFemaleEnd CreatetheFemaleEnd CreatetheFemaleEnd
Tocreatethefemaleend: Tocreatethefemaleend: Tocreatethefemaleend: Tocreatethefemaleend:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Female Female Female Female
CreatetheFemaleBend CreatetheFemaleBend CreatetheFemaleBend CreatetheFemaleBend
Tocreatethebend: Tocreatethebend: Tocreatethebend: Tocreatethebend:
X:0.0,Y:0.0,Z:0.0, X:0.0,Y:0.0,Z:0.0, X:0.0,Y:0.0,Z:0.0, X:0.0,Y:0.0,Z:0.0,PresstheEnterkey
dX dX dX dX:0.351, :0.351, :0.351, :0.351,dY dY dY dY:0.0, :0.0, :0.0, :0.0,dZ dZ dZ dZ:0.0, :0.0, :0.0, :0.0,PresstheEnterkey
dX dX dX dX:0.0, :0.0, :0.0, :0.0,dY dY dY dY: : : :- -- -1.236, 1.236, 1.236, 1.236,dZ dZ dZ dZ:0.0, :0.0, :0.0, :0.0,PresstheEnterkey
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:FemaleBend FemaleBend FemaleBend FemaleBend
TrainingManual
6.2-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. SelectthemenuitemModeler>GridPlane>XY Modeler>GridPlane>XY Modeler>GridPlane>XY Modeler>GridPlane>XY
CreatetheMaleEnd CreatetheMaleEnd CreatetheMaleEnd CreatetheMaleEnd
Tocreatethemaleend: Tocreatethemaleend: Tocreatethemaleend: Tocreatethemaleend:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Male Male Male Male
TrainingManual
6.2-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GrouptheVacuumObjects GrouptheVacuumObjects GrouptheVacuumObjects GrouptheVacuumObjects
TounitetheobjectsFemale, TounitetheobjectsFemale, TounitetheobjectsFemale, TounitetheobjectsFemale,FemaleBend FemaleBend FemaleBend FemaleBend andMale: andMale: andMale: andMale:
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Female, Female, Female, Female,FemaleBend FemaleBend FemaleBend FemaleBend,Male ,Male ,Male ,Male
AddNewMaterial AddNewMaterial AddNewMaterial AddNewMaterial
Toaddanewmaterial: Toaddanewmaterial: Toaddanewmaterial: Toaddanewmaterial:
2. FromtheSelectDefinitionwindow,clicktheAddMaterial AddMaterial AddMaterial AddMaterial button
3. View/EditMaterialWindow:
1. FortheMaterialName MaterialName MaterialName MaterialName type:My_Ring My_Ring My_Ring My_Ring
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofRelativePermittivity RelativePermittivity RelativePermittivity RelativePermittivity type:3 33 3
TrainingManual
6.2-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatetheRing CreatetheRing CreatetheRing CreatetheRing
Tocreatethering: Tocreatethering: Tocreatethering: Tocreatethering:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Ring Ring Ring Ring
CompletetheRing CompletetheRing CompletetheRing CompletetheRing
ToselecttheobjectsRingandMale: ToselecttheobjectsRingandMale: ToselecttheobjectsRingandMale: ToselecttheobjectsRingandMale:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Ring,Female Ring,Female Ring,Female Ring,Female
Tocompletethering: Tocompletethering: Tocompletethering: Tocompletethering:
1. Selectthemenuitem3DModeler>Boolean>Subtract 3DModeler>Boolean>Subtract 3DModeler>Boolean>Subtract 3DModeler>Boolean>Subtract
2. SubtractWindow
BlankParts:Ring Ring Ring Ring
ToolParts:Female Female Female Female
Clonetoolobjectsbeforesubtract: Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
6.2-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. FortheMaterialName MaterialName MaterialName MaterialName type:My_Teflon My_Teflon My_Teflon My_Teflon
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofRelativePermittivity RelativePermittivity RelativePermittivity RelativePermittivity type:2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1
CreatetheMaleTeflon CreatetheMaleTeflon CreatetheMaleTeflon CreatetheMaleTeflon
Tocreatethe Tocreatethe Tocreatethe Tocreatetheteflon teflon teflon teflon: :: :
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:MaleTeflon MaleTeflon MaleTeflon MaleTeflon
TrainingManual
6.2-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Note: Note: Note: Note:Tosimplifytheinstructions,a2Dobjectwillbecreatedtorepresentthe
port.Thisisnotarequirementfordefiningports.Graphicalfaceselectioncan
beusedasanalternative.
Note Note Note Note:YoucanalsoselecttheobjectfromtheModelTree
TrainingManual
6.2-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. ReferenceConductorsforTerminalswindow
1. ConductingObjects:Conductor1 Conductor1 Conductor1 Conductor1
2. ReferenceConductors:blank blank blank blank
3. Renameportandterminalnames
1. HighlightWavePort1undertheprojecttree,rightclickmouse,and
clickrename,typep1 p1 p1 p1,andpressEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. SamestepsapplytoConductor1_T1,andrenameittoT1 T1 T1 T1
1. Fromthelist,selecttheCS:RelativeCS3 RelativeCS3 RelativeCS3 RelativeCS3
TrainingManual
6.2-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Note: Note: Note: Note:Tosimplifytheinstructions,a2Dobjectwillbecreatedtorepresentthe
port.Thisisnotarequirementfordefiningports.Graphicalfaceselectioncan
beusedasanalternative.
2. ReferenceConductorsforTerminalswindow
1. ConductingObjects:Conductor1 Conductor1 Conductor1 Conductor1
2. ReferenceConductors:blank blank blank blank
3. Renameportandterminalnames
1. HighlightWavePort1undertheprojecttree,rightclickmouse,and
clickrename,typep2 p2 p2 p2,andpressEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. SamestepsapplytoConductor1_T2,andrenameittoT2 T2 T2 T2
TrainingManual
6.2-18
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatetheFemaleTeflon CreatetheFemaleTeflon CreatetheFemaleTeflon CreatetheFemaleTeflon
TocreatetheTeflon: TocreatetheTeflon: TocreatetheTeflon: TocreatetheTeflon:
dX dX dX dX:0.0, :0.0, :0.0, :0.0,dY dY dY dY: : : :- -- -0.236, 0.236, 0.236, 0.236,dZ dZ dZ dZ:0.0, :0.0, :0.0, :0.0,PresstheEnterkey
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon
CompletetheVacuumObject CompletetheVacuumObject CompletetheVacuumObject CompletetheVacuumObject
ToselecttheobjectsFemale, ToselecttheobjectsFemale, ToselecttheobjectsFemale, ToselecttheobjectsFemale,MaleTeflon MaleTeflon MaleTeflon MaleTeflon, , , ,FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Female, Female, Female, Female,MaleTeflon MaleTeflon MaleTeflon MaleTeflon, , , ,FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon
Tocompletethe Tocompletethe Tocompletethe Tocompletethevacumm vacumm vacumm vacumm objects: objects: objects: objects:
2. SubtractWindow
BlankParts:Female Female Female Female
ToolParts:MaleTeflon MaleTeflon MaleTeflon MaleTeflon, , , ,FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon
TrainingManual
6.2-19
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CompletetheModel CompletetheModel CompletetheModel CompletetheModel
Tocompletethemodel: Tocompletethemodel: Tocompletethemodel: Tocompletethemodel:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Conductor1,Female, Conductor1,Female, Conductor1,Female, Conductor1,Female,MaleTeflon MaleTeflon MaleTeflon MaleTeflon, , , ,
FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon
4. SubtractWindow
BlankParts:Female, Female, Female, Female,FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon FemaleTeflon, , , ,MaleTeflon MaleTeflon MaleTeflon MaleTeflon
ToolParts:Conductor1 Conductor1 Conductor1 Conductor1
boundary.
Note: Note: Note: Note: Selectthemenuitem,View>Visibility View>Visibility View>Visibility View>Visibility tohideallofthe
geometryobjects.Thismakesiteasiertoseetheboundary
TrainingManual
6.2-20
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AnalysisSetup
MaximumDeltaS:0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02
3. ClicktheOptions Options Options Options tab: :: :
MinimumConvergedPasses:2 22 2
2. EditSweepWindow:
Count:801 :801 :801 :801
TrainingManual
6.2-21
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:hfss_coax hfss_coax hfss_coax hfss_coax
Analyze
Manager.
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Analyze HFSS>Analyze HFSS>Analyze HFSS>Analyze
TrainingManual
6.2-22
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
theconvergencedata.
TrainingManual
6.2-23
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS- -- -ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass
Note: Note: Note: Note:Ifthisreportiscreatedpriortoorduringthesolutionprocess,a
real-timeupdateoftheresultsaredisplayed
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Results>CreateTerminal HFSS>Results>CreateTerminal HFSS>Results>CreateTerminal HFSS>Results>CreateTerminal
SolutionDataReport>RectangularPlot SolutionDataReport>RectangularPlot SolutionDataReport>RectangularPlot SolutionDataReport>RectangularPlot
1. Solution:Setup1:Adaptive Setup1:Adaptive Setup1:Adaptive Setup1:Adaptive
2. ClicktheX X X Xtab
1. X:Pass :Pass :Pass :Pass
3. ClicktheY YY Y tab
1. Category:TerminalSParameter TerminalSParameter TerminalSParameter TerminalSParameter
2. Quantity:St(T1,T1),St(T1,T2), St(T1,T1),St(T1,T2), St(T1,T1),St(T1,T2), St(T1,T1),St(T1,T2),
TrainingManual
6.2-24
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. X:Freq :Freq :Freq :Freq
TrainingManual
6.2-25
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS- -- -ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot- -- - Phase Phase Phase Phase
1. X:Freq :Freq :Freq :Freq
3. Function:ang_deg ang_deg ang_deg ang_deg
TrainingManual
6.2-26
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
FieldOverlays
SelectthemenuitemWindow> Window> Window> Window>hfss_coax hfss_coax hfss_coax hfss_coax HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1- -- - Modeler Modeler Modeler Modeler
Tocreateafieldplot: Tocreateafieldplot: Tocreateafieldplot: Tocreateafieldplot:
1. SelecttheGlobalYZPlane
1. UsingtheModelTree,expandPlanes Planes Planes Planes
2. SelectGlobal:YZ Global:YZ Global:YZ Global:YZ
TomodifyaMagnitudefieldplot: TomodifyaMagnitudefieldplot: TomodifyaMagnitudefieldplot: TomodifyaMagnitudefieldplot:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Fields>ModifyPlotAttributes HFSS>Fields>ModifyPlotAttributes HFSS>Fields>ModifyPlotAttributes HFSS>Fields>ModifyPlotAttributes
2. SelectPlotFolderWindow:
1. Select:EField EField EField EField
3. E-FieldWindow:
1. ClicktheScale Scale Scale Scaletab
1. SelectUseLimits UseLimits UseLimits UseLimits
2. Min: 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
3. Max: 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0
4. Scale:Log Log Log Log
TrainingManual
6.2-27
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
EditSources EditSources EditSources EditSources
ToModifyaTerminalexcitation: ToModifyaTerminalexcitation: ToModifyaTerminalexcitation: ToModifyaTerminalexcitation:
2. SelectT2 T2 T2 T2 fromtheEditSourceswindow
ChecktheTerminated Terminated Terminated Terminated box
ToSelecttheElectricFieldplot: ToSelecttheElectricFieldplot: ToSelecttheElectricFieldplot: ToSelecttheElectricFieldplot:
1. ExpandtheProjecttree
2. ExpandtheFieldOverlays FieldOverlays FieldOverlays FieldOverlays
3. ClickontheEField EField EField EField orMag_E1 Mag_E1 Mag_E1 Mag_E1 to
displaythefieldplot
2. IntheSweptVariable SweptVariable SweptVariable SweptVariable tab,acceptdefaultssettings:
4. Steps:9 99 9
5. Click:OK OK OK OK
TrainingManual
6.3-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example 180 RingHybrid
The180 RingHybrid
Thisexampleisintendedtoshowyouhowtocreate,simulate,andanalyzearing
hybrid,usingAnsoftHFSS.
TrainingManual
6.3-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GettingStarted
selecttheAnsoft,HFSS11 Ansoft,HFSS11 Ansoft,HFSS11 Ansoft,HFSS11 programgroup.ClickHFSS11 HFSS11 HFSS11 HFSS11.
Auto-assignterminalsonports: : : : Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
6.3-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
6.3-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Creatingthe3DModel
2. SetModelUnits:
1. UsingtheModelerMaterialspicklistinthetoolbar,chooseSelect Select Select Select
1. ClicktheAddMaterial AddMaterial AddMaterial AddMaterial button
1. FortheMaterialName MaterialName MaterialName MaterialName type:My_Sub My_Sub My_Sub My_Sub
3. FortheValue Value Value Value ofDielectricLossTangent DielectricLossTangent DielectricLossTangent DielectricLossTangent type:4.29e 4.29e 4.29e 4.29e- -- -4 4 4 4
TrainingManual
6.3-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. SelectthemenuitemDraw>RegularPolyhedron Draw>RegularPolyhedron Draw>RegularPolyhedron Draw>RegularPolyhedron
2. PresstheTab Tab Tab Tab keytomovethecursortothecoordinateentryfields
X:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z:- -- -1.143 1.143 1.143 1.143,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
dX:22.345mm/cos(30*pi/180), 22.345mm/cos(30*pi/180), 22.345mm/cos(30*pi/180), 22.345mm/cos(30*pi/180), dY:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
5. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheheight
dX:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 dY:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ:2.286 2.286 2.286 2.286,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
6. SegmentNumberWindow
NumberofSegments:6 66 6
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Substrate Substrate Substrate Substrate
Tochangethetransparencyofthesubstrateobject: Tochangethetransparencyofthesubstrateobject: Tochangethetransparencyofthesubstrateobject: Tochangethetransparencyofthesubstrateobject:
1. Clickthebuttonlabeled0 00 0 nexttotheTransparent Transparent Transparent Transparent attribute.
2. Changethevalueto0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
3. ClickOK OK OK OK todismisstheTransparency
4. ClickOK OK OK OK
TrainingManual
6.3-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateTrace CreateTrace CreateTrace CreateTrace
Tocreatethetrace: Tocreatethetrace: Tocreatethetrace: Tocreatethetrace:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Trace Trace Trace Trace
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Trace Trace Trace Trace
1. Name:PerfE_Trace PerfE_Trace PerfE_Trace PerfE_Trace
TrainingManual
6.3-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Note: Note: Note: Note:Thisstructurerequires4portswith1terminallinesperport. Wecoulduse
faceselectiontoselecttheendsofthesubstratethatrepresenttheport,define
terminallines,assignexcitation,andrepeatforport2-4.Sincewecanduplicate
portdefinitions,itismoreefficienttodefinearectanglewiththeappropriateport
definitionandcopyittothelocationofports2-4.Thesecondmethodis
describedhere:
Tosetgridplane Tosetgridplane Tosetgridplane Tosetgridplane
1. Selectthemenuitem Modeler>GridPlane>XZ Modeler>GridPlane>XZ Modeler>GridPlane>XZ Modeler>GridPlane>XZ
Tosettheview Tosettheview Tosettheview Tosettheview
SelectthemenuitemView>ModifyAttributes>Orientation View>ModifyAttributes>Orientation View>ModifyAttributes>Orientation View>ModifyAttributes>Orientation
SelectViewingDirectionformtheListWindow
1. Fromthelistselecttheviewname:Right Right Right Right
2. ClicktheApply Apply Apply Apply button
Tocreatetherectanglegraphically: Tocreatetherectanglegraphically: Tocreatetherectanglegraphically: Tocreatetherectanglegraphically:
2. Usingthemouse,positiontheactivepositionindicatorsuchthatitsnapsto
thevertexofthelowerleftcornerofthesubstrateface.Theshapeofthe
activepositionindicatorwillchangetoasquarewhenitsnapstothevertex
3. Clicktheleftmousebuttontoselectthispointasthestartposition.
4. Continuedonnextpage
TrainingManual
6.3-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
4. Usingthemouse,positiontheactivepositionindicatorsuchthatitsnapsto
thevertexoftheupperrightcornerofthesubstrateface.The shapeofthe
activepositionindicatorwillchangetoasquarewhenitsnapstothevertex
5. Clicktheleftmousebuttontosettheoppositecorneroftherectangle.
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Port Port Port Port
TrainingManual
6.3-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Port Port Port Port
4. ReferenceConductorsDialog
1. ConductingObjects:Trace
2. ReferenceConductors:<Empty>
TraceObject
WavePortFace
TrainingManual
6.3-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatetheremainingTracesandWavePorts CreatetheremainingTracesandWavePorts CreatetheremainingTracesandWavePorts CreatetheremainingTracesandWavePorts
Toselectobjects: Toselectobjects: Toselectobjects: Toselectobjects:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Trace,Port Trace,Port Trace,Port Trace,Port
Toduplicatetheobjects: Toduplicatetheobjects: Toduplicatetheobjects: Toduplicatetheobjects:
1. Selectthemenuitem,Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis
2. DuplicateAroundAxisWindow
1. Axis:Z ZZ Z
2. Angle:60deg 60deg 60deg 60deg
CreateOuterRing CreateOuterRing CreateOuterRing CreateOuterRing
1. Selectthemenuitem Modeler>GridPlane>XY Modeler>GridPlane>XY Modeler>GridPlane>XY Modeler>GridPlane>XY
2. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheposition
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Outer Outer Outer Outer
1. SelectthemenuitemView>FitDrawing View>FitDrawing View>FitDrawing View>FitDrawing. .. .
TrainingManual
6.3-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GrouptheConductors GrouptheConductors GrouptheConductors GrouptheConductors
1. DeselectallobjectsbyselectingthemenuitemEdit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll
2. Usingthemodeltree,whileholdingdowntheCtrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl key,selectthefollowing
objectsinthisorder:Trace,Trace_1,Trace_2,Trace_3,Outer Trace,Trace_1,Trace_2,Trace_3,Outer Trace,Trace_1,Trace_2,Trace_3,Outer Trace,Trace_1,Trace_2,Trace_3,Outer
1. TheTraceobjectneedstobeselectedfirstastheBoolean
operationsareorderdependent,andthePerfectEboundaryshould
propagatetotheotherobjects.
1. SelectthemenuitemView>FitDrawing View>FitDrawing View>FitDrawing View>FitDrawing. .. .
CreateInnerRing CreateInnerRing CreateInnerRing CreateInnerRing
2. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheposition
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Inner Inner Inner Inner
Selectobjects: Selectobjects: Selectobjects: Selectobjects:
1. DeselectallobjectsbyselectingthemenuitemEdit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll Edit>DeselectAll
2. Usingthemodeltree,whileholdingdowntheCtrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl key,selectthefollowing
objectsinthisorder:Trace,Inner Trace,Inner Trace,Inner Trace,Inner
3. Selectthemenuitem,Modeler>Boolean>Subtract Modeler>Boolean>Subtract Modeler>Boolean>Subtract Modeler>Boolean>Subtract
4. SubtractWindow
1. BlankParts:Trace Trace Trace Trace
2. ToolParts:Inner Inner Inner Inner
3. Clonetoolobjectsbeforesubtracting: : : : Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked
1. SelectthemenuitemView>FitDrawing View>FitDrawing View>FitDrawing View>FitDrawing. .. . OrpresstheCTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D key
TrainingManual
6.3-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AnalysisSetup
MaximumDeltaS:0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
2. EditSweepWindow:
2. FrequencySetupType:LinearStep :LinearStep :LinearStep :LinearStep
Step:0.05GHz :0.05GHz :0.05GHz :0.05GHz
TrainingManual
6.3-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
1. Solution:Setup1:AdaptivePass Setup1:AdaptivePass Setup1:AdaptivePass Setup1:AdaptivePass
3. Quantity:St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2),
St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4) St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4) St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4) St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4) (holddown
theCtrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl keytoselectmultiplequantities)
TrainingManual
6.3-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
3. Quantity:St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2),
St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4) St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4) St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4) St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4)(holddown
theCtrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl keytoselectmultiplequantities)
TrainingManual
6.3-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:hfss_ringhybrid hfss_ringhybrid hfss_ringhybrid hfss_ringhybrid
Analyze
Manager.
TrainingManual
6.3-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
theconvergencedata.
TrainingManual
6.3-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TerminalS TerminalS TerminalS TerminalS- -- -ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass
TerminalS TerminalS TerminalS TerminalS- -- -ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot- -- - Magnitude Magnitude Magnitude Magnitude
TrainingManual
6.4-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example CoaxStubResonator
TheCoaxialStubResonator
Thisexampleisintendedtoshowyouhowtocreate,simulate,andoptimizea
coaxialstubresonator,usingtheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment.
TrainingManual
6.4-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
createthispassivedevicemodel:
3DSolidModeling
Primitives: Cylinders Cylinders Cylinders Cylinders
Boolean:Unite Unite Unite Unite
Duplicate:AroundAxis AroundAxis AroundAxis AroundAxis
Excitations:WavePorts WavePorts WavePorts WavePorts
Analysis
Sweep: FastFrequency FastFrequency FastFrequency FastFrequency
Optimization
Parametrics Parametrics Parametrics Parametrics Setup Setup Setup Setup
Optimetrics Optimetrics Optimetrics Optimetrics Setup Setup Setup Setup
Results
Data:Tabular Tabular Tabular Tabular
Plotting: Cartesian Cartesian Cartesian Cartesian
TrainingManual
6.4-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GettingStarted
theAnsoft,HFSS11 Ansoft,HFSS11 Ansoft,HFSS11 Ansoft,HFSS11programgroup.ClickHFSS11 HFSS11 HFSS11 HFSS11.
TrainingManual
6.4-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
6.4-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Creatingthe3DModel
2. SetModelUnits:
TrainingManual
6.4-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
dX:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dY:- -- -6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0,dZ:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
1. SelecttheAttribute Attribute Attribute Attribute tabfromtheProperties Properties Properties Properties window
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Conductor Conductor Conductor Conductor
TrainingManual
6.4-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatetheStub CreatetheStub CreatetheStub CreatetheStub
Tocreatethestub Tocreatethestub Tocreatethestub Tocreatethestub
Toparameterizetheobject: Toparameterizetheobject: Toparameterizetheobject: Toparameterizetheobject:
1. SelecttheCommand Command Command Command tabfromtheProperties Properties Properties Properties window
2. ForHeight Height Height Height,type:L LL L,ClicktheTab Tab Tab Tab keytoaccept
AddVariableL LL L:4.75mm 4.75mm 4.75mm 4.75mm,ClicktheOK OK OK OK button
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Stub Stub Stub Stub
TrainingManual
6.4-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatetheBody CreatetheBody CreatetheBody CreatetheBody
Tocreatethebody Tocreatethebody Tocreatethebody Tocreatethebody
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Body Body Body Body
ToselectsurfaceforWavePort1 ToselectsurfaceforWavePort1 ToselectsurfaceforWavePort1 ToselectsurfaceforWavePort1
1. PresstheF FF F keyonkeyboard(SelectFacesmode)
2. ClickontheendsurfaceofBody Body Body Body asshown
ToassignreferenceconductorsforTerminals ToassignreferenceconductorsforTerminals ToassignreferenceconductorsforTerminals ToassignreferenceconductorsforTerminals
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Excitations>Assign>WavePort HFSS>Excitations>Assign>WavePort HFSS>Excitations>Assign>WavePort HFSS>Excitations>Assign>WavePort
2. InthepopupReferenceConductorsforTerminals ReferenceConductorsforTerminals ReferenceConductorsforTerminals ReferenceConductorsforTerminalswindow,leave
Conductor Conductor Conductor ConductorinConductingObjects. ConductingObjects. ConductingObjects. ConductingObjects.ClickOK OK OK OK
TrainingManual
6.4-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatePort2Arm CreatePort2Arm CreatePort2Arm CreatePort2Arm
ToselecttheobjectsConductor&Body ToselecttheobjectsConductor&Body ToselecttheobjectsConductor&Body ToselecttheobjectsConductor&Body
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Body,Conductor Body,Conductor Body,Conductor Body,Conductor
Note: Note: Note: Note: UsetheCtrl+Leftmousebuttontoselectmultipleobjects
Tocreatetheport2arm: Tocreatetheport2arm: Tocreatetheport2arm: Tocreatetheport2arm:
1. Axis:X XX X
2. Angle:-90 90 90 90
CreateStubBody CreateStubBody CreateStubBody CreateStubBody
Duplicateboundarieswithgeometry: : : : Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked
ToselecttheobjectsBody: ToselecttheobjectsBody: ToselecttheobjectsBody: ToselecttheobjectsBody:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Body Body Body Body
TrainingManual
6.4-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Tocreatethestubbody: Tocreatethestubbody: Tocreatethestubbody: Tocreatethestubbody:
1. SelectthemenuSelectthemenuitem,Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis.
1. Axis:X XX X
2. Angle:180 180 180 180
GrouptheBodyObjects GrouptheBodyObjects GrouptheBodyObjects GrouptheBodyObjects
ToselecttheobjectsBody,Body_1,Body_2: ToselecttheobjectsBody,Body_1,Body_2: ToselecttheobjectsBody,Body_1,Body_2: ToselecttheobjectsBody,Body_1,Body_2:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Body,Body_1,Body_2 Body,Body_1,Body_2 Body,Body_1,Body_2 Body,Body_1,Body_2
GrouptheConductor&StubObjects GrouptheConductor&StubObjects GrouptheConductor&StubObjects GrouptheConductor&StubObjects
ToselecttheobjectsConductor,Conductor_1,Stub: ToselecttheobjectsConductor,Conductor_1,Stub: ToselecttheobjectsConductor,Conductor_1,Stub: ToselecttheobjectsConductor,Conductor_1,Stub:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Conductor,Conductor_1,Stub Conductor,Conductor_1,Stub Conductor,Conductor_1,Stub Conductor,Conductor_1,Stub
TrainingManual
6.4-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
boundary.
MeshOperations MeshOperations MeshOperations MeshOperations
ToselecttheobjectBody ToselecttheobjectBody ToselecttheobjectBody ToselecttheobjectBody
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Body Body Body Body
Tocreateameshoperation: Tocreateameshoperation: Tocreateameshoperation: Tocreateameshoperation:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>MeshOperations>Assign>Inside HFSS>MeshOperations>Assign>Inside HFSS>MeshOperations>Assign>Inside HFSS>MeshOperations>Assign>Inside
Selection>Lengthbased Selection>Lengthbased Selection>Lengthbased Selection>Lengthbased
2. ElementLengthBasedRefinementWindow:
1. Name:Body_Mesh :Body_Mesh :Body_Mesh :Body_Mesh
2. RestrictLengthofElements: : : : Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked
3. RestricttheNumberofElements: Checked Checked Checked Checked
1. MaximumNumberofElements:2000 2000 2000 2000
TrainingManual
6.4-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AnalysisSetup
MaximumDeltaS:0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02
2. EditSweepWindow:
2. FrequencySetupType:LinearStep :LinearStep :LinearStep :LinearStep
TrainingManual
6.4-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:hfss_stub_resonator hfss_stub_resonator hfss_stub_resonator hfss_stub_resonator
Analyze
Manager.
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Analyzeall HFSS>Analyzeall HFSS>Analyzeall HFSS>Analyzeall
TrainingManual
6.4-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
theconvergencedata.
TrainingManual
6.4-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. Quantity:St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T1), St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T1), St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T1), St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T1),
St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2) St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2) St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2) St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2)
DataMarkers DataMarkers DataMarkers DataMarkers
MarkAllTraces MarkAllTraces MarkAllTraces MarkAllTraces
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>SelectAll Edit>SelectAll Edit>SelectAll Edit>SelectAll
2. Selectthemenuitem Report2D>Marker>AddMinimum Report2D>Marker>AddMinimum Report2D>Marker>AddMinimum Report2D>Marker>AddMinimum
3. Whenyouarefinished,selectthemenuitemReport2D>Marker>Clear Report2D>Marker>Clear Report2D>Marker>Clear Report2D>Marker>Clear
All All All Alltoremovethemarker.
TrainingManual
6.4-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
OptimetricsSetup ParametricSweep
Duringthedesignofamicrowavedevice,itiscommonpracticetodevelop
designtrendsbasedonsweptparameters.AnsoftHFSSwithOptimetrics
ParametricSweepcanautomaticallycreatethesedesigncurves.
AddaParametricSweep AddaParametricSweep AddaParametricSweep AddaParametricSweep
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>AddParametric HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>AddParametric HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>AddParametric HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>AddParametric
2. SetupSweepAnalysis SweepAnalysis SweepAnalysis SweepAnalysis Window:
1. ClicktheSweepDefinitions SweepDefinitions SweepDefinitions SweepDefinitions tab: :: :
1. ClicktheAdd Add Add Add button
2. Add/EditSweepDialog
1. SelectVariable:L LL L
2. SelectLinearCount LinearCount LinearCount LinearCount
3. Start:4.0mm 4.0mm 4.0mm 4.0mm
4. Stop:5.5mm 5.5mm 5.5mm 5.5mm
5. Count:5 55 5
1. SaveFieldsandMesh: Checked Checked Checked Checked
AnalyzeParametricSweep AnalyzeParametricSweep AnalyzeParametricSweep AnalyzeParametricSweep
1. ExpandtheProjectTreetodisplaytheitemslistedunderOptimetrics Optimetrics Optimetrics Optimetrics
2. Right-clickthemouseonParametricSetup1 ParametricSetup1 ParametricSetup1 ParametricSetup1andchooseAnalyze Analyze Analyze Analyze
OptimetricsResults OptimetricsResults OptimetricsResults OptimetricsResults
ToviewtheOptimetricsResults: ToviewtheOptimetricsResults: ToviewtheOptimetricsResults: ToviewtheOptimetricsResults:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>OptimetricsResults HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>OptimetricsResults HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>OptimetricsResults HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>OptimetricsResults
2. SelecttheProfile Profile Profile Profile Tabtoviewthesolutionprogressforeachsetup.
3. ClicktheClose Close Close Close buttonwhenyouarefinishedviewingtheresults
TrainingManual
6.4-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS- -- -ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot S12ateachL S12ateachL S12ateachL S12ateachL
3. ClicktheFamilies Families Families Familiestab
1. Sweeps:VariableL LL L willValueAll All All All
1. PrimarySweep:Freq:All Freq:All Freq:All Freq:All
3. Quantity:St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2) St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2) St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2) St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2)
TrainingManual
6.4-18
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
OptimetricsSetup Optimization
TheParametricSweepwasusefulforgeneratingdesigncurves.Forthissimple
designwithonlyasinglevariablewecouldusethedesigncurvestomake
educatedguessesatperformancetargetsthatarenotcontainedinthe
ParametricSweep.AnsoftHFSSandOptimetricswithOptimization takesthe
guessworkoutofachievingperformancetargets.Todemonstrate thiswewill
targetaminimumS12at13GHz.SincethisdevicehasaveryhighQ,wewill
consideranything<=-40dBat13GHztobeaminimum.FromtheParametric
Sweep,wecanseethatthesearchrangecanbelimitedtotherange4.7-5.1mm.
Sinceweareonlyinterestedinobtaininganoptimumsolutionfor13GHz,wewill
addanadditionalSolutionSetupthatdoesnotincludethefrequencysweep.
Thiswillreducetheamountofsimulationtimerequiredtoachievethe
performancegoal.
AddanAnalysisSetup AddanAnalysisSetup AddanAnalysisSetup AddanAnalysisSetup
DefineOptimizationDesignVariables DefineOptimizationDesignVariables DefineOptimizationDesignVariables DefineOptimizationDesignVariables
ToDefineOptimizationDesignVariable ToDefineOptimizationDesignVariable ToDefineOptimizationDesignVariable ToDefineOptimizationDesignVariable
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>DesignProperties HFSS>DesignProperties HFSS>DesignProperties HFSS>DesignProperties
2. ClicktheOptimization Optimization Optimization Optimizationradiobutton: :: :
1. Name: L LL L
2. Include: Checked Checked Checked Checked
3. Min:4.0mm 4.0mm 4.0mm 4.0mm
4. Max:5.5mm 5.5mm 5.5mm 5.5mm
TrainingManual
6.4-19
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AddOptimizationSetup AddOptimizationSetup AddOptimizationSetup AddOptimizationSetup
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>AddOptimization HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>AddOptimization HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>AddOptimization HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>AddOptimization
2. SetupOptimizationWindow:
1. ClicktheGoals Goals Goals Goals tab:
2. Optimizer:Quasi Quasi Quasi Quasi- -- -Newton Newton Newton Newton
3. Max.No.ofIterations:10 10 10 10
4. ClicktheSetupCalculations SetupCalculations SetupCalculations SetupCalculations button
5. SetupOutputVariablesdialog:
2. Quantity:St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2) St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2) St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2) St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2)
4. ClicktheAddCalculation AddCalculation AddCalculation AddCalculation button
6. FromtheSolutionColumn,clickontheSetup1:Sweep1 Setup1:Sweep1 Setup1:Sweep1 Setup1:Sweep1andselect
Setup2:LastAdaptive Setup2:LastAdaptive Setup2:LastAdaptive Setup2:LastAdaptive fromthelistofsolutions
7. Condition:<= <= <= <=
8. ClickonEditGoal/Weight EditGoal/Weight EditGoal/Weight EditGoal/Weightbutton
1. GoalValue:0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
2. ClickonWeight Weight Weight Weighttab,
3. SetAllWeightto1, 1, 1, 1,
4. ClickonSet Set Set Set button
5. ClickOK OK OK OKbutton
9. AcceptableCost: 0 00 0
10. ClicktheVariables Variables Variables Variables tab:
1. Min:4.7mm 4.7mm 4.7mm 4.7mm
2. Max:5.1mm 5.1mm 5.1mm 5.1mm
11. ClicktheGeneral General General Generaltab
1. ParametricsAnalysis:clickonN/A N/A N/A N/A andselectParamatric Paramatric Paramatric Paramatric
Setup1 Setup1 Setup1 Setup1
2. SelectParametricSweepbeforeOptimization ParametricSweepbeforeOptimization ParametricSweepbeforeOptimization ParametricSweepbeforeOptimization
TrainingManual
6.4-20
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AnalyzeOptimization AnalyzeOptimization AnalyzeOptimization AnalyzeOptimization
2. Right-clickthemouseonOptimizationSetup1 OptimizationSetup1 OptimizationSetup1 OptimizationSetup1andchooseAnalyze Analyze Analyze Analyze
OptimetricsResults OptimetricsResults OptimetricsResults OptimetricsResults
ToviewtheOptimetricsResults: ToviewtheOptimetricsResults: ToviewtheOptimetricsResults: ToviewtheOptimetricsResults:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>OptimetricsResults HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>OptimetricsResults HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>OptimetricsResults HFSS>OptimetricsAnalysis>OptimetricsResults
2. ClicktheClose Close Close Close buttonwhenyouarefinishedviewingtheresults
TrainingManual
6.4-21
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS- -- -ParameterPlotofOptimumResult ParameterPlotofOptimumResult ParameterPlotofOptimumResult ParameterPlotofOptimumResult
Selectthemenu HFSS> HFSS> HFSS> HFSS>Optimetrics Optimetrics Optimetrics Optimetrics Analysis> Analysis> Analysis> Analysis>Optimerics Optimerics Optimerics Optimerics Results Results Results Results
View:selectTable Table Table Table
Selecttheiterationwithoptimalresult:thelowestcost(cost=0)
ClickonApply Apply Apply Applybutton
Toanalyzetheoptimumdesign Toanalyzetheoptimumdesign Toanalyzetheoptimumdesign Toanalyzetheoptimumdesign
1. RightclickSetup1 Setup1 Setup1 Setup1 underAnalysis Analysis Analysis Analysis intheprojecttree,andclickAnalyze Analyze Analyze Analyze
Toviewtheplot Toviewtheplot Toviewtheplot Toviewtheplot
TheexistingXYPlot1 XYPlot1 XYPlot1 XYPlot1 willautomaticallybeupdatedwhenthesolution
completes.
TochangetotheXYPlot1window,selectthemenuitemWindow>XY Window>XY Window>XY Window>XY
Plot1. Plot1. Plot1. Plot1.
TrainingManual
6.5-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example MicrostripWavePort
MicrostripWavePort
Thisexampleisintendedtoshowyouhowwaveportsizecaninfluencethe
resultsofanysimulationusingtheAnsoftHFSSVersionDesignEnvironment.
TrainingManual
6.5-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AnsoftDesignEnvironment
3DSolidModeling
Primitives:Boxes,Rectangle Boxes,Rectangle Boxes,Rectangle Boxes,Rectangle
BooleanOperations:DuplicateAlongLine DuplicateAlongLine DuplicateAlongLine DuplicateAlongLine
Boundary/Excitation
Ports:WavePortsandIntegrationLines WavePortsandIntegrationLines WavePortsandIntegrationLines WavePortsandIntegrationLines
Analysis
Solution:PortsOnly PortsOnly PortsOnly PortsOnly
Sweep:Interpolating Interpolating Interpolating Interpolating
Results
FieldsOverlays
PortFieldDisplay PortFieldDisplay PortFieldDisplay PortFieldDisplay
TrainingManual
6.5-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GettingStarted
TrainingManual
6.5-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
DesignReview
Generallyspeakingwhenweassignawaveporttoamicrostripline,orany
quasi-TEMline,weneedtoincludesomeareaaroundtheactualtransmission
line.Thebigquestionis,howmucharea?
Belowyouwillseethecrosssectionofasimplemicrostripline withnaming
conventionsshown.
Asaruleofthumb,wetypicallycreatea2Drectangletorepresentthewaveport
stimulusforthistypeofstructure.Thedimensionsoftherectangleareroughly
tentimesthewidthofthetransmissionlinebyeighttimestheheightofthe
substrate.
REMEMBER:Theseareonlyguidelines!!!
Theheightoftheportwillbeaffectedbythepermittivityofthesubstrate.The
higherthepermittivity,thelessthefieldswillpropagateintheair,andtheshorter
theportcanbemade.
~10w
w
h
~8h
Thewidthoftheportwillaffecttheportimpedanceand
propagatingmodes.Thenarrowerthewidth(imageon
right),themorethefieldswillcoupletothesidewallsof
theport.Thiseffectmaynotbephysical.Thewiderthe
port,thegreaterchancethatahigherfrequency
waveguidemodecanpropagate.
Thisexamplewillexplorethislastphenomenon.
TrainingManual
6.5-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. IntheAnsoftHFSSdesktop,anewprojectisautomaticallyinserted.
2. Whenanewprojectisautomaticallyopened,anewHFSSDesignis also
automaticallyinsertedintotheproject.
2. SetModelUnits:
1. SelectUnits:mil mil mil mil
TrainingManual
6.5-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. MaterialName:My_Rogers My_Rogers My_Rogers My_Rogers
2. RelativePermittivity:3.38 3.38 3.38 3.38
TrainingManual
6.5-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheoppositecornerofthebox:
1. Typepec pec pec pecintheSearchbyName SearchbyName SearchbyName SearchbyName field
TrainingManual
6.5-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
6.5-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TocreatetheAir: TocreatetheAir: TocreatetheAir: TocreatetheAir:
X:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y:- -- -400.0 400.0 400.0 400.0,Z:- -- -1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
ToselecttheobjectAir: ToselecttheobjectAir: ToselecttheobjectAir: ToselecttheobjectAir:
2. RadiationBoundaryWindow
Name:Rad1 Rad1 Rad1 Rad1
TrainingManual
6.5-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatetheWavePort CreatetheWavePort CreatetheWavePort CreatetheWavePort
Tocreatearectanglethatrepresentstheport: Tocreatearectanglethatrepresentstheport: Tocreatearectanglethatrepresentstheport: Tocreatearectanglethatrepresentstheport:
X:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0,Y: : : :- -- -200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0,Z:0.0, :0.0, :0.0, :0.0, PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
dX:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0,dY:400.0 :400.0 :400.0 :400.0,dZ:50 :50 :50 :50.0 00 0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. ForPosition Position Position Position,type:0mil, 0mil, 0mil, 0mil,- -- -Port_Width/2,0mil Port_Width/2,0mil Port_Width/2,0mil Port_Width/2,0mil,ClicktheTab Tab Tab Tab keytoaccept
AddVariablePort_Width Port_Width Port_Width Port_Width:400mil 400mil 400mil 400mil,ClicktheOK OK OK OK button
3. ForYSize YSize YSize YSize,type:Port_Width Port_Width Port_Width Port_Width,ClicktheTab Tab Tab Tab keytoaccept
TrainingManual
6.5-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AssigntheExcitation1 AssigntheExcitation1 AssigntheExcitation1 AssigntheExcitation1
2. WavePort:General
1. Name:p1 p1 p1 p1,
3. WavePort:Modes
1. NumberofModes:5 55 5
2. ForMode1 11 1,clicktheNone None None None intheIntegration Integration Integration Integration Line Line Line Line columnand
selectNewLine NewLine NewLine NewLine
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthevectorposition
X: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z: 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0,Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
4. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthevertex
dX:0.0,dY:0.0 :0.0,dY:0.0 :0.0,dY:0.0 :0.0,dY:0.0,dZ: 8.0, 8.0, 8.0, 8.0,Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
ForMode1 11 1,clicktheZpi Zpi Zpi ZpicolumnandselectZpv Zpv Zpv Zpv
TrainingManual
6.5-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Toduplicatetheport: Toduplicatetheport: Toduplicatetheport: Toduplicatetheport:
1. Selectthemenuitem,Edit>Duplicate>AlongLine Edit>Duplicate>AlongLine Edit>Duplicate>AlongLine Edit>Duplicate>AlongLine
2. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthefirstpointoftheduplicatevector
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthesecondpointofthe duplicate
vector
dX:200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0,dY:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ:0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
4. DuplicateAlongLineWindows
TrainingManual
6.5-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
boundary.
TrainingManual
6.5-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AnalysisSetup
SolutionFrequency:20GHz :20GHz :20GHz :20GHz
2. CheckSolvePortsOnly SolvePortsOnly SolvePortsOnly SolvePortsOnly
2. EditSweepWindow:
1. SweepType:Interpolating
Count:81 :81 :81 :81
TrainingManual
6.5-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:hfss_waveports hfss_waveports hfss_waveports hfss_waveports
Analyze
Manager.
TrainingManual
6.5-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. ChecktheGamma Gamma Gamma Gamma radiobutton
2. UnchecktheZo Zo Zo Zo radiobutton
3. ClickthepulldownthatdisplaysSweep1 Sweep1 Sweep1 Sweep1,andchangetoPortOnly PortOnly PortOnly PortOnly
TrainingManual
6.5-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
CreatePropagationConstantvs.Frequency CreatePropagationConstantvs.Frequency CreatePropagationConstantvs.Frequency CreatePropagationConstantvs.Frequency
ToCreateareport: ToCreateareport: ToCreateareport: ToCreateareport:
2. NewTracesWindow: :: :
3. Category:Gamma Gamma Gamma Gamma
4. Quantity:Gamma(p1:1),Gamma(p1:2),Gamma(p1:3), Gamma(p1:1),Gamma(p1:2),Gamma(p1:3), Gamma(p1:1),Gamma(p1:2),Gamma(p1:3), Gamma(p1:1),Gamma(p1:2),Gamma(p1:3),
Gamma(p1:4),Gamma(p1:5) Gamma(p1:4),Gamma(p1:5) Gamma(p1:4),Gamma(p1:5) Gamma(p1:4),Gamma(p1:5)
5. Function:im im im im
8. Seenextpageforplotanddiscussionofresults
TrainingManual
6.5-18
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
Discussion Discussion Discussion Discussion
Whatdoesthisplottellus?
Giventhephysicalsizeofthewaveportobjectthatwecreated, thefundamental
mode(p2:1)isaquasi-TEMmodethatpropagatesfromDConup.
Thisalsoshowsthathigherordermodescanpropagate(>0)atahighenough
frequency.Thesecondmodesstartspropagatingat~14GHz.
Therefore,ifweonlyneededtosimulateupto10GHz,wewouldntneedtosize
ourportanydifferent,however,ifweneedtosimulateupto50 GHz,thenwe
needtoresizeourporttoeliminatethehigherorderpropagatingmodes.
Thelastpartoftheexercisewillexplorethis.
TrainingManual
6.5-19
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
FieldPatternPlots
SelectthemenuitemWindow> Window> Window> Window>hfss_waveports hfss_waveports hfss_waveports hfss_waveports HFSSdesign1 HFSSdesign1 HFSSdesign1 HFSSdesign1- -- - Modeler Modeler Modeler Modeler
Itmightbeilluminatingtolookatthefieldpatternsattheporttodiscoverwhich
modesareexcited.
TodisplaytheModefieldpatternsinthemodeler: TodisplaytheModefieldpatternsinthemodeler: TodisplaytheModefieldpatternsinthemodeler: TodisplaytheModefieldpatternsinthemodeler:
1. Fromwithintheprojectmanager,expandthesectionPortFieldDisplay PortFieldDisplay PortFieldDisplay PortFieldDisplay
2. Expandp1 p1 p1 p1,andselectMode2 Mode2 Mode2 Mode2
1. Thefieldpatternwillbeoverlaidonthe3Dmodel.Fromtheplot
below,Mode2isclearlynotamicrostrip mode,butaTE
10
-like
waveguidemode.
TrainingManual
6.5-20
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. Variable:Port_Width Port_Width Port_Width Port_Width
2. SelectLinearStep LinearStep LinearStep LinearStep
3. Start:200mil 200mil 200mil 200mil
4. Stop:600mil 600mil 600mil 600mil
5. Step:100mil 100mil 100mil 100mil
6. ClicktheAdd Add Add Add >> >> >> >> button
TrainingManual
6.5-21
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. InanAnsoftHFSSwindow,selectthemenuitemFile>Save File>Save File>Save File>Save.
Analyze
Manager.
TrainingManual
6.5-22
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
CreatePropagationConstantvs.Frequencyvs.Port_Width CreatePropagationConstantvs.Frequencyvs.Port_Width CreatePropagationConstantvs.Frequencyvs.Port_Width CreatePropagationConstantvs.Frequencyvs.Port_Width
4. Quantity:Gamma(p1:2), Gamma(p1:2), Gamma(p1:2), Gamma(p1:2),
8. Seenextpageforplotanddiscussionofresults
TrainingManual
6.5-23
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
Discussion Discussion Discussion Discussion
Whatdoesthisplottellus?
Thisshowsthataswedecreasethewidthoftheport,thefrequencyatwhichthe
higherordermodestartstopropagateincreases.
Therefore,byproperlysizingthewaveport,youcaneliminateanyhigherorder
propagatingmodesifyoubelievethattheydonotexist.
Youneedtousecautionifyouaresimulatingveryhighfrequencies,i.e.,
millimeterwavelengths,asyoumaynotbeabletomaketheports smallenough
toeliminatethesemodes.Youprobablyshouldnteventryasthehigherorder
modesmightrepresentrealworldeffects.
TrainingManual
6.5-24
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
CreatePropagationConstantvs.PortWidthatafixedfrequency CreatePropagationConstantvs.PortWidthatafixedfrequency CreatePropagationConstantvs.PortWidthatafixedfrequency CreatePropagationConstantvs.PortWidthatafixedfrequency
1. Solution:Setup1:PortOnly Setup1:PortOnly Setup1:PortOnly Setup1:PortOnly
3. X:PortWidth PortWidth PortWidth PortWidth
5. Quantity:Gamma(p1:2), Gamma(p1:2), Gamma(p1:2), Gamma(p1:2),
TrainingManual
6.5-25
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
TrainingManual
6.6-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example FerriteCirculator
TheWaveguideCirculator
waveguideferritecirculator,usingtheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment,and
AnsoftMaxwellDesignEnvironment.
ThisexamplewillutilizeMaxwelltocalculatethemagneticfieldbiasintheferrite
core,andthenHFSSwillutilizethisnon-uniformbiasdistributiontosolvethe
microwavecirculator.
Wewillstartoffbycreatingtheferriteobjectandelectro-magnetinMaxwell,and
thenaddingthecirculatorobjectswithinHFSS.
Waveguide: Waveguide: Waveguide: Waveguide:
Width=0.9in Width=0.9in Width=0.9in Width=0.9in
Height=0.4in Height=0.4in Height=0.4in Height=0.4in
Length= Length= Length= Length= 2in 2in 2in 2in
TrainingManual
6.6-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
3DSolidModeling
BooleanOperations: Unite,Duplicate Unite,Duplicate Unite,Duplicate Unite,Duplicate
Excitations
Analysis
Sweep:InterpolatingFrequency :InterpolatingFrequency :InterpolatingFrequency :InterpolatingFrequency
Results
Fields
3DFieldPlots,Animations 3DFieldPlots,Animations 3DFieldPlots,Animations 3DFieldPlots,Animations
AnsoftMaxwellDesignEnvironment
ThefollowingfeaturesoftheAnsoftMaxwellDesignEnvironment areusedto
3DSolidModeling
BooleanOperations: Unite,Duplicate,Subtract Unite,Duplicate,Subtract Unite,Duplicate,Subtract Unite,Duplicate,Subtract
Excitations
Terminal:Current Current Current Current
Analysis
Magnetostatic
Fields
3DFieldPlots 3DFieldPlots 3DFieldPlots 3DFieldPlots
TrainingManual
6.6-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GettingStarted
LaunchingAnsoftMaxwell LaunchingAnsoftMaxwell LaunchingAnsoftMaxwell LaunchingAnsoftMaxwell
1. ToaccessAnsoftMaxwell,clicktheMicrosoftStart Start Start Start button,selectPrograms Programs Programs Programs,and
selecttheAnsoft,Maxwell12 Ansoft,Maxwell12 Ansoft,Maxwell12 Ansoft,Maxwell12programgroup.ClickMaxwell12 Maxwell12 Maxwell12 Maxwell12.
Bydefault,whenMaxwellfirststartsup,anewprojectwillbe Bydefault,whenMaxwellfirststartsup,anewprojectwillbe Bydefault,whenMaxwellfirststartsup,anewprojectwillbe Bydefault,whenMaxwellfirststartsup,anewprojectwillbeopened. opened. opened. opened.
IfyouhavebeenworkinginMaxwellandneedtoopenanewproje IfyouhavebeenworkinginMaxwellandneedtoopenanewproje IfyouhavebeenworkinginMaxwellandneedtoopenanewproje IfyouhavebeenworkinginMaxwellandneedtoopenanewproject: ct: ct: ct:
1. InanAnsoftMaxwellwindow,clickthe OntheStandardtoolbar,or
selectthemenuitemFile>New File>New File>New File>New.
InsertingaNewDesign InsertingaNewDesign InsertingaNewDesign InsertingaNewDesign
Weneedtoinsertanew3Ddesignfortheferritebiasmodel.
SelectProject>InsertMaxwell3DDesign Project>InsertMaxwell3DDesign Project>InsertMaxwell3DDesign Project>InsertMaxwell3DDesign
1. SelectthemenuitemMaxwell3D>SolutionType Maxwell3D>SolutionType Maxwell3D>SolutionType Maxwell3D>SolutionType
1. ChooseMagnetostatic Magnetostatic Magnetostatic Magnetostatic
TrainingManual
6.6-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Creatingthe3DModel
2. SetModelUnits:
1. Usingthe3DModelerMaterialspicklist inthetoolbar,chooseSelect Select Select Select
2. Inthematerialdefinitiondialog,entersteel steel steel steel inthesearchbox,andselect
thesteel_1010 steel_1010 steel_1010 steel_1010 materialfromthelist.
CreateMagnetCore CreateMagnetCore CreateMagnetCore CreateMagnetCore
Tocreateside1: Tocreateside1: Tocreateside1: Tocreateside1:
rectangle:
dX:- -- -0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5,dY:0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5,dZ:-0.5, 0.5, 0.5, 0.5,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:core1_a core1_a core1_a core1_a
TrainingManual
6.6-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Creatingthe3DModel(contd)
Tocontinueside1: Tocontinueside1: Tocontinueside1: Tocontinueside1:
rectangle:
dX:- -- -0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5,dY:0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5,dZ:- -- -1.5, 1.5, 1.5, 1.5,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:core1_b core1_b core1_b core1_b
TrainingManual
6.6-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Toduplicateside1: Toduplicateside1: Toduplicateside1: Toduplicateside1:
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisibleorsimplypressCtrl+A Ctrl+A Ctrl+A Ctrl+A
2. SelectEdit>Duplicate>AroundAxis Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis
Axis:Z ZZ Z,
Angle:180degrees :180degrees :180degrees :180degrees
TotalNumber:2 22 2
PresstheOK OK OK OKkey
TrainingManual
6.6-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Tocreatebase: Tocreatebase: Tocreatebase: Tocreatebase:
X:- -- -0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25,Y:- -- -0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75,Z:- -- -1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
rectangle:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:core_base core_base core_base core_base
TrainingManual
6.6-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Touniteobjects: Touniteobjects: Touniteobjects: Touniteobjects:
2. SelectModeler>Boolean>Unite Modeler>Boolean>Unite Modeler>Boolean>Unite Modeler>Boolean>Unite
2. Inthematerialdefinitiondialog,entercopper copper copper copperinthesearchbox,andselect
thecopper copper copper coppermaterialfromthelist.
CreateCoil CreateCoil CreateCoil CreateCoil
Tocreatecoil: Tocreatecoil: Tocreatecoil: Tocreatecoil:
X:0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3,Y:- -- -0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375,Z:- -- -0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
rectangle:
dX:- -- -0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 dY:0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75,dZ:- -- -0.6, 0.6, 0.6, 0.6,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:coil coil coil coil
TrainingManual
6.6-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateCoil(cont CreateCoil(cont CreateCoil(cont CreateCoil(cont d) d) d) d)
Tosubtractthecorefromthecoil Tosubtractthecorefromthecoil Tosubtractthecorefromthecoil Tosubtractthecorefromthecoil
3. Theobjectcore1_a core1_a core1_a core1_a shouldbeontheToolparts Toolparts Toolparts Toolpartsside
Selectobjectcore1_a core1_a core1_a core1_a fromtheBlankParts BlankParts BlankParts BlankPartsside,andpressthe
arrowpointingright
4. Theobjectcoil coil coil coilshouldbeontheBlankParts BlankParts BlankParts BlankPartsside
Selectobjectcoil coil coil coilfromtheToolParts ToolParts ToolParts ToolPartsside,andpressthearrow
pointingleft
5. SelecttheoptiontoClonetoolobjectsbeforesubtracting Clonetoolobjectsbeforesubtracting Clonetoolobjectsbeforesubtracting Clonetoolobjectsbeforesubtracting
6. BeforepressingOK OK OK OK,makesurethedialoglooksasbelow:
7. PresstheOK OK OK OK button
TrainingManual
6.6-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. Inthematerialdefinitiondialog,clickontheAddMaterial AddMaterial AddMaterial AddMaterialbutton
3. UndertheRelativePermeability RelativePermeability RelativePermeability RelativePermeabilitytypecolumn,selectSimple Simple Simple Simple,andthen
chooseNonlinear Nonlinear Nonlinear Nonlinearfromthepulldown.
4. ClickontheB BB B- -- -HCurve HCurve HCurve HCurvebuttonfortheRelativePermeability
5. ThisopensupanewdialogwherevaluesdescribingtheB-Hcurveforthe
ferritewillbeentered.
6. Usingthefieldsontheleftsideofthedialog,enterthefollowingvalues
H:0 00 0,B:0 00 0
H:150 150 150 150,B:0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125
H:160 160 160 160:B:0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13
H:10160 10160 10160 10160,B:0.1425664 0.1425664 0.1425664 0.1425664
YoucanusetheTab Tab Tab Tab keyandEnter Enter Enter Enter keytocyclethroughthese
values
Theunitsshouldbe:
H:A_per_meter
B:tesla
7. ClickOKtoacceptthesechangestotheB-Hcurve
8. ChangethematerialnametoTT1-109
9. ClickOK OK OK OK toacceptthismaterial
10. ClickOK OK OK OK toexitmateriallibrarywindow
TrainingManual
6.6-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateTerminalobject CreateTerminalobject CreateTerminalobject CreateTerminalobject
Tocreateterminalcurrentobject: Tocreateterminalcurrentobject: Tocreateterminalcurrentobject: Tocreateterminalcurrentobject:
1. FromtheDrawingPlanetoolbarpulldown,selecttheXY XY XY XYplane
4. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthecenterofthebase
X:0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25,Y:- -- -0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375,Z:- -- -1 1 1 1PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
5. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthesizeoftherectangle
dX:0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05,dY:0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75,dZ:0 0 0 0PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:terminal terminal terminal terminal
AssigntheCurrentbias AssigntheCurrentbias AssigntheCurrentbias AssigntheCurrentbias
Toassignthecurrenttotheselectedobject: Toassignthecurrenttotheselectedobject: Toassignthecurrenttotheselectedobject: Toassignthecurrenttotheselectedobject:
1. SelectthemenuitemMaxwell3D>Excitations>Assign>Current Maxwell3D>Excitations>Assign>Current Maxwell3D>Excitations>Assign>Current Maxwell3D>Excitations>Assign>Current
2. Enterthevaluebias_current bias_current bias_current bias_current intheentryforcurrentandpressEnter Enter Enter Enter
3. Thiswillbringupadialogrequestingthevalueofthenewlycreated
variable,bias_current bias_current bias_current bias_current.Enter200A 200A 200A 200A forthevariablevalue,includingtheunit
factorA
4. ClickOK OK OK OK toacceptthisvalue.
TrainingManual
6.6-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateFerrite CreateFerrite CreateFerrite CreateFerrite
Tocreateferrite: Tocreateferrite: Tocreateferrite: Tocreateferrite:
1. FromtheDrawingPlanetoolbarpulldown,selecttheZX ZX ZX ZX plane
2. SelectthemenuitemDraw>RegularPolyhedron Draw>RegularPolyhedron Draw>RegularPolyhedron Draw>RegularPolyhedron
4. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthecenterofthebase
X:0 00 0,Y:- -- -0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2,Z:- -- -0 0 0 0PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
5. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheradius
dX:0 00 0,dY:0 00 0,dZ:0.205 0.205 0.205 0.205PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
6. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterheight
dX:0 00 0,dY:0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4,dZ:0, 0, 0, 0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
7. Numberofsegments:3 33 3
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:ferrite ferrite ferrite ferrite
AssigningBoundaryConditions
AssignInsulatingBoundarycondition AssignInsulatingBoundarycondition AssignInsulatingBoundarycondition AssignInsulatingBoundarycondition
Toselectfaces: Toselectfaces: Toselectfaces: Toselectfaces:
3. FromtheObjectName ObjectName ObjectName ObjectNamesideofthedialog,selectthecoil coil coil coil object
4. FromtheFaceID FaceID FaceID FaceIDsideofthedialog,holdtheCtrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl keyandclickononly
thosefaceIDswhichrepresenttheinteriorfacesofthecoilobject
1. NOTE:Thenumbersmaybedifferentthanthoseshownbelow
5. ClickOK OK OK OK
TrainingManual
6.6-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AssigningBoundaryConditions(contd)
AssignInsulatingBoundarycondition(cont AssignInsulatingBoundarycondition(cont AssignInsulatingBoundarycondition(cont AssignInsulatingBoundarycondition(cont d) d) d) d)
Toassignboundaryformselectedfaces: Toassignboundaryformselectedfaces: Toassignboundaryformselectedfaces: Toassignboundaryformselectedfaces:
1. SelectthemenuitemMaxwell3D>Boundaries>Assign>Insulating Maxwell3D>Boundaries>Assign>Insulating Maxwell3D>Boundaries>Assign>Insulating Maxwell3D>Boundaries>Assign>Insulating
2. ClickOK OK OK OK
Createairbox
SelectthemenuitemDraw>Region
Type300 300 300 300 intoPaddingPercentagebox
ClickOK OK OK OK button
Setupsolution
Tosetupsolutionforanalysis: Tosetupsolutionforanalysis: Tosetupsolutionforanalysis: Tosetupsolutionforanalysis:
1. SelectthemenuitemMaxwell3D>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup Maxwell3D>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup Maxwell3D>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup Maxwell3D>AnalysisSetup>AddSolutionSetup
2. Acceptalldefaults,andclickOK OK OK OK
SaveProject
1. SelectthemenuitemFile>Save File>Save File>Save File>Save
2. Enterthenamebias_magnet bias_magnet bias_magnet bias_magnet
TrainingManual
6.6-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
RunAnalysis
Torunprojectvalidationbeforesimulation: Torunprojectvalidationbeforesimulation: Torunprojectvalidationbeforesimulation: Torunprojectvalidationbeforesimulation:
1. SelectthemenuitemMaxwell3D>ValidationCheck Maxwell3D>ValidationCheck Maxwell3D>ValidationCheck Maxwell3D>ValidationCheck
2. Ifallentriescomebackwithagreencheckmark,thentheprojectisreadyto
analyze.
Torunproject: Torunproject: Torunproject: Torunproject:
1. SelectthemenuitemMaxwell3D>AnalyzeAll Maxwell3D>AnalyzeAll Maxwell3D>AnalyzeAll Maxwell3D>AnalyzeAll
TrainingManual
6.6-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Post-ProcessFieldData
Tocreateafieldoverlayplotofthestaticbiasfield: Tocreateafieldoverlayplotofthestaticbiasfield: Tocreateafieldoverlayplotofthestaticbiasfield: Tocreateafieldoverlayplotofthestaticbiasfield:
1. FromtheModelhistorytree,expandthesectionmarkedPlanes, Planes, Planes, Planes,andselect
theplanemarkedGlobal:YZ Global:YZ Global:YZ Global:YZ
2. SelectthemenuitemMaxwell3D>Fields>Fields>H>MagH Maxwell3D>Fields>Fields>H>MagH Maxwell3D>Fields>Fields>H>MagH Maxwell3D>Fields>Fields>H>MagH
3. Acceptthedefaultsforthefieldoverlayplot.
4. Byzoomingintotheferriteobject,wecanseethemagnitudeofthestaticH
fieldisaround7000A/m.
TrainingManual
6.6-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Copyferritetoclipboard
Tocopyanobjecttotheclipboard Tocopyanobjecttotheclipboard Tocopyanobjecttotheclipboard Tocopyanobjecttotheclipboard
1. WewanttousetheferriteobjectinitsexactlocationintheHFSSproject.
Toaccomplishthis,wesimplycopytheobjecttotheclipboard.
2. SelectthemenuitemEdit>Select>Object Edit>Select>Object Edit>Select>Object Edit>Select>Object
4. Selecttheobjectferrite ferrite ferrite ferrite
5. ClickOK OK OK OK
6. SelectthemenuitemEdit>Copy Edit>Copy Edit>Copy Edit>Copy
GettingStarted
TrainingManual
6.6-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
6.6-18
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Creatingthe3DModel
2. SetModelUnits:
Pastetheferriteobjectfromclipboard Pastetheferriteobjectfromclipboard Pastetheferriteobjectfromclipboard Pastetheferriteobjectfromclipboard
Topastetheferriteobject: Topastetheferriteobject: Topastetheferriteobject: Topastetheferriteobject:
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>Paste Edit>Paste Edit>Paste Edit>Paste
Changetheferritematerialproperties Changetheferritematerialproperties Changetheferritematerialproperties Changetheferritematerialproperties
Toedittheferritematerialproperties Toedittheferritematerialproperties Toedittheferritematerialproperties Toedittheferritematerialproperties
1. TheferritematerialasimportedfromMaxwell3Disnotavaliddefinitionfor
anHFSSsolution.
2. FromtheProjectManager ProjectManager ProjectManager ProjectManager,expandthesectionmarkedDefinitions Definitions Definitions Definitions
3. ExpandthesectionmarkedMaterials Materials Materials Materials
4. Double-clickonthematerialTT1 TT1 TT1 TT1- -- -109 109 109 109
5. Fromthematerialpropertiesdialog,changethevaluestothoseshown
below
Permittivity:11.8 11.8 11.8 11.8
Permeability:
Type:Simple Simple Simple Simple
Value:1 11 1
MagneticSaturation:1300Gauss 1300Gauss 1300Gauss 1300Gauss
LandeGFactor:1.98 1.98 1.98 1.98
DH:162Oe 162Oe 162Oe 162Oe
TrainingManual
6.6-19
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Creatingthe3DModel
1. Usingthe3DModelerMaterialspicklistinthetoolbar,choosevacuum vacuum vacuum vacuum
CreateTopArm CreateTopArm CreateTopArm CreateTopArm
X:0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 Y:- -- -0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2,Z:2 22 2 PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
rectangle:
dX:- -- -0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9,dY:0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4,dZ:- -- -2, 2, 2, 2,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Arm Arm Arm Arm
TrainingManual
6.6-20
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. Graphicallyselect(clickon)thetopfaceofthearmatZ=2in
2. WavePort:General
1. Name:p1 p1 p1 p1
3. WavePort:Modes
Topface
TrainingManual
6.6-21
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
SetObjectSelection SetObjectSelection SetObjectSelection SetObjectSelection
CreateArm2&3 CreateArm2&3 CreateArm2&3 CreateArm2&3
ToselecttheobjectArm: ToselecttheobjectArm: ToselecttheobjectArm: ToselecttheobjectArm:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Arm Arm Arm Arm
Tocreatearm3&4: Tocreatearm3&4: Tocreatearm3&4: Tocreatearm3&4:
1. Axis:Y YY Y
2. Angle:120 120 120 120
5. ClicktheOK OK OK OK buttontoexitpropertywindow
TrainingManual
6.6-22
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GrouptheArms GrouptheArms GrouptheArms GrouptheArms
Togroupthearms: Togroupthearms: Togroupthearms: Togroupthearms:
2. Inthefieldbelowtheobjectlist,youcanenterasearchterm. EnterArm* Arm* Arm* Arm*
andpressEnter Enter Enter Enter
3. ClickOK OK OK OK
4. SelectthemenuitemModeler>Boolean>Unite Modeler>Boolean>Unite Modeler>Boolean>Unite Modeler>Boolean>Unite
AssigningtheExcitations
SelecttheFerriteobject SelecttheFerriteobject SelecttheFerriteobject SelecttheFerriteobject
3. Selecttheobjectferrite ferrite ferrite ferrite
4. Click OK OK OK OK
AssigntheMagneticbiastotheferriteobject AssigntheMagneticbiastotheferriteobject AssigntheMagneticbiastotheferriteobject AssigntheMagneticbiastotheferriteobject
Toassignthemagneticbias: Toassignthemagneticbias: Toassignthemagneticbias: Toassignthemagneticbias:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Excitations>Assign>MagneticBias HFSS>Excitations>Assign>MagneticBias HFSS>Excitations>Assign>MagneticBias HFSS>Excitations>Assign>MagneticBias
2. Intheexcitationsetup,selecttheNon-Uniformradiobutton
3. ClicktheSetupLink SetupLink SetupLink SetupLink button
4. 4. 4. 4. General General General General Tab
1. SaveSourcepathrelativeto:ThisProject ThisProject ThisProject ThisProject
2. ClickonbuttontobrowsetolocationofsavedMaxwell
project
5. 5. 5. 5. Parameters Parameters Parameters Parameters Tab
1. InthefieldthatispopulatedundertheheadingValue Value Value Value,enterthe
variablenamebias_current bias_current bias_current bias_current.,andpressEnter Enter Enter Enter
2. Enteravalueof200Aforthisvariable,andclickOK OK OK OK.
3. EventhoughtheParametershowsbias_current bias_current bias_current bias_current,weneedtocreate
anHFSS-specificvariablethatcanchangethevalueintheMaxwell
project.
6. ClickOK OK OK OK
7. ClickFinish Finish Finish Finish
TrainingManual
6.6-23
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
boundary.
Note: Note: Note: Note: Selectthemenuitem,View>ActiveViewVisibility View>ActiveViewVisibility View>ActiveViewVisibility View>ActiveViewVisibility tohideall
ofthegeometryobjects.Thismakesiteasiertoseetheboundary
conditions.
TrainingManual
6.6-24
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AnalysisSetup
2. EditSweepWindow:
Start: 8GHz 8GHz 8GHz 8GHz
Stop:12GHz :12GHz :12GHz :12GHz
Count:401 :401 :401 :401
TrainingManual
6.6-25
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:ferrite_circulator ferrite_circulator ferrite_circulator ferrite_circulator
Analyze
Manager.
TrainingManual
6.6-26
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
theconvergencedata.
Note: Note: Note: Note:Toviewareal-timeupdateoftheMatrixDataduring
analysis,openthisdialogandsettheSimulationtoSetup1, Setup1, Setup1, Setup1,
LastAdaptive LastAdaptive LastAdaptive LastAdaptive
TrainingManual
6.6-27
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
CreateModalS CreateModalS CreateModalS CreateModalS- -- -ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass ParameterPlotvs.AdaptivePass
1. Solution:Setup1: Setup1: Setup1: Setup1:AdaptivePass AdaptivePass AdaptivePass AdaptivePass
3. Quantity:S(p1,p1),S(p1,p2),S(p1,p3) S(p1,p1),S(p1,p2),S(p1,p3) S(p1,p1),S(p1,p2),S(p1,p3) S(p1,p1),S(p1,p2),S(p1,p3)(Note:Holddownthe
CtrlkeytoselectmultipleQuantities)
TrainingManual
6.6-28
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateModalS CreateModalS CreateModalS CreateModalS- -- -ParameterPlotvs.Freq ParameterPlotvs.Freq ParameterPlotvs.Freq ParameterPlotvs.Freq
2. 2. 2. 2. Domain:Sweep Domain:Sweep Domain:Sweep Domain:Sweep
3. Quantity:S(p1,p1),S(p2,p1),S(p3,p1), S(p1,p1),S(p2,p1),S(p3,p1), S(p1,p1),S(p2,p1),S(p3,p1), S(p1,p1),S(p2,p1),S(p3,p1),(HolddowntheCtrl
keytoselectmultipleQuantities)
3. NOTE:TheS21ofthecirculatorrepresentstheinsertionlossof the
throughport,whiletheS31representstheisolationcharacteristics.
TrainingManual
6.6-29
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
SelectthemenuitemWindow> Window> Window> Window>ferrite_circulator ferrite_circulator ferrite_circulator ferrite_circulator HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1- -- - Modeler Modeler Modeler Modeler
Toselectanobject: Toselectanobject: Toselectanobject: Toselectanobject:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Arm,ferrite Arm,ferrite Arm,ferrite Arm,ferrite
3. SelectthemenuEdit>Properties Edit>Properties Edit>Properties Edit>Properties
1. SelectAttributeTab
2. ClickontheTransparencybutton
3. SetTransparencytoaprox .75
4. PressOK OK OK OK button
4. Press Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl- -- -A AA A toensurewaveguideisselected.
2. IntheSweptVariable SweptVariable SweptVariable SweptVariable tab,acceptthedefaultssettings:
4. Steps:9 99 9
3. ClickOK OK OK OK
TrainingManual
7.1-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example Bandpass Filter
BandpassFilter
bandpassfilterusingtheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment.
3DSolidModeling
Primitives:Cylinders,Boxes Cylinders,Boxes Cylinders,Boxes Cylinders,Boxes
BooleanOperations:DuplicateAroundAxis DuplicateAroundAxis DuplicateAroundAxis DuplicateAroundAxis
Boundary/Excitation
Analysis
Sweep:FastFrequency FastFrequency FastFrequency FastFrequency
Results
FieldsOverlays
2D&3DFieldPlots 2D&3DFieldPlots 2D&3DFieldPlots 2D&3DFieldPlots
F FF F
center center center center
=1.50GHz =1.50GHz =1.50GHz =1.50GHz
BW=1GHz BW=1GHz BW=1GHz BW=1GHz
TrainingManual
7.1-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. ClicktheDisplay Display Display Display tab
DefaultTransparency:0.4
OperationDataEntryMode::Dialog"
3. SelectthemenuitemTools>Options>FieldReporterOptions Tools>Options>FieldReporterOptions Tools>Options>FieldReporterOptions Tools>Options>FieldReporterOptions.
1. GroupFieldOverlaysbyType: : : : Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
7.1-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
InanAnsoftHFSSwindow,click OntheStandard toolbar,orselectthemenu
itemFile>New File>New File>New File>New.
FromtheProject Project Project Project menu,selectInsertHFSSDesign InsertHFSSDesign InsertHFSSDesign InsertHFSSDesign. .. .
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>SolutionType HFSS>SolutionType HFSS>SolutionType HFSS>SolutionType
SolutionTypeWindow:
ChooseDrivenModal DrivenModal DrivenModal DrivenModal
SelectthemenuitemModeler>Units Modeler>Units Modeler>Units Modeler>Units
SelectUnits:in in in in
TrainingManual
7.1-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Createcavity Createcavity Createcavity Createcavity
InCreateBox dialogboxedittheCommand andAttribute tabsasshownbelow.
ClicktheOKbutton
1. SelectthemenuitemView>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView. . . .OrpressCTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D
TrainingManual
7.1-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Createcoaxouterdiameter Createcoaxouterdiameter Createcoaxouterdiameter Createcoaxouterdiameter
SelectthemenuitemDraw>Cylinder Draw>Cylinder Draw>Cylinder Draw>Cylinder
InCreateCylinder dialogedittheCommand andAttribute tabsasshownbelow.
FittheViewwithCTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL- -- -D DD D
TrainingManual
7.1-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Definenewdefaultmaterial Definenewdefaultmaterial Definenewdefaultmaterial Definenewdefaultmaterial
Usingthe3DModelerMaterials toolbar,chooseSelect
SelectDefinitionWindow:
Typepec pec pec pec intheSearchbyNamefield
TrainingManual
7.1-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Createcoaxinnerdiameter Createcoaxinnerdiameter Createcoaxinnerdiameter Createcoaxinnerdiameter
SelectthemenuitemDraw>Cylinder Draw>Cylinder Draw>Cylinder Draw>Cylinder
InCreateCylinder dialogedittheCommand andAttribute tabsas
shownbelow.
TrainingManual
7.1-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Createthecoaxfeedprobewithcopy/paste Createthecoaxfeedprobewithcopy/paste Createthecoaxfeedprobewithcopy/paste Createthecoaxfeedprobewithcopy/paste
Selecttheobjectfeedin1 fromthemodeltree.
TypeCTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL- -- -C/CTRL C/CTRL C/CTRL C/CTRL- -- -V VV V tocreateacopy.
Inthemodeltree,doubleclickontheresultingobjectfeedin2.
IntheAttribute tabchangethenametofeedprobe1.
Inthemodeltreeexpandthefeedprobe1 branch.
DoubleclickonthecommandCreateCylinder
IntheCommand tabchangetheHeightto-0.15.
TrainingManual
7.1-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Createfirstresonator Createfirstresonator Createfirstresonator Createfirstresonator
InCreateBox dialogedittheCommand andAttribute tabsasshown
below.
TrainingManual
7.1-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Createsecondresonator Createsecondresonator Createsecondresonator Createsecondresonator
below.
TrainingManual
7.1-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Createthirdresonator Createthirdresonator Createthirdresonator Createthirdresonator
below.
TrainingManual
7.1-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Createfourthresonator Createfourthresonator Createfourthresonator Createfourthresonator
below.
TrainingManual
7.1-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. GraphicallyselecttheendfaceofthecoaxlineatX=1.75in
Toassignthewaveportexcitation: Toassignthewaveportexcitation: Toassignthewaveportexcitation: Toassignthewaveportexcitation:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Excitations>Assign>WavePort HFSS>Excitations>Assign>WavePort HFSS>Excitations>Assign>WavePort HFSS>Excitations>Assign>WavePort
2. WavePort:General
Name:p1 p1 p1 p1
3. WavePort:Modes
Acceptthedefaultsettingsformodes.
Acceptthedefaultsettingsforpostprocessing
Notetheadditionoftheportdefinitiontotheprojecttree
TrainingManual
7.1-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Createremainderofmodelwith Createremainderofmodelwith Createremainderofmodelwith Createremainderofmodelwith DuplicateAroundAxis DuplicateAroundAxis DuplicateAroundAxis DuplicateAroundAxis
ReturnSelectionmodeto ReturnSelectionmodeto ReturnSelectionmodeto ReturnSelectionmodeto Object Object Object Object
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>Select>Object Edit>Select>Object Edit>Select>Object Edit>Select>Object
Toselectobjectstobeduplicated: Toselectobjectstobeduplicated: Toselectobjectstobeduplicated: Toselectobjectstobeduplicated:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:feed1,feedpin1,feedprobe1,l1,l2,l3,l4 feed1,feedpin1,feedprobe1,l1,l2,l3,l4 feed1,feedpin1,feedprobe1,l1,l2,l3,l4 feed1,feedpin1,feedprobe1,l1,l2,l3,l4
Note: Note: Note: Note: UsetheCtrl+Leftmousebuttontoselectmultiple
objects
Tocreaterestofmodel: Tocreaterestofmodel: Tocreaterestofmodel: Tocreaterestofmodel:
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>Duplicate>AroundAxis Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis Edit>Duplicate>AroundAxis
Axis:Z ZZ Z
Angle:180 180 180 180
TotalNumber:2 22 2
ClickOK OK OK OK whenthePropertieswindowappears
FittheviewwithCTRL-D
Notetheadditionofthep2 portdefinitiontotheprojecttree.
TrainingManual
7.1-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
boundary.
Note: Note: Note: Note: Youmayneedtoexpandthewindowsizetoseeallthe
boundarieslistedbelow.
TrainingManual
7.1-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
SetupanHFSSDrivenModalAnalysis
CreatingaSolutionSetup CreatingaSolutionSetup CreatingaSolutionSetup CreatingaSolutionSetup
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>AnalysisSetup> HFSS>AnalysisSetup> HFSS>AnalysisSetup> HFSS>AnalysisSetup>
AddSolutionSetup AddSolutionSetup AddSolutionSetup AddSolutionSetup
1. Intheprojecttreeright-clickonsetup1 under
theAnalysis branch
1. SelectAddFrequencySweep
2. EditSweepWindow:
1. SweepTypePulldown:Fast :Fast :Fast :Fast
Count:513 :513 :513 :513
TrainingManual
7.1-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:Filter_bpf Filter_bpf Filter_bpf Filter_bpf
Analyze
Manager.
TrainingManual
7.1-18
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Note: Note: Note: Note:ThedefaultviewisforconvergenceisTable Table Table Table.SelectthePlot Plot Plot Plot
radiobuttontoviewagraphicalrepresentationsoftheconvergence
data.Seebelow.
TrainingManual
7.1-19
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
CreateS CreateS CreateS CreateS- -- -parametervs.Frequency parametervs.Frequency parametervs.Frequency parametervs.Frequency
2. EditReport Window: :: :
1. Solution:Setup1:Sweep1
2. Domain:Sweep
3. Category:S-parameters
4. Quantity:S(p1,p1) andS(p2,p1)
Note: Note: Note: Note:UseCtrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl keyformultipleselection
5. Function:dB
6. ClickNewReport NewReport NewReport NewReport
7. ClickClose Close Close Close
TrainingManual
7.1-20
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
Freq [GHz]
-70.00
-60.00
-50.00
-40.00
-30.00
-20.00
-10.00
0.00
Y
1
XY Plot 1
Curve Info
dB(S(p1,p1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
dB(S(p2,p1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
NotenewplotXYPlot1 inproject
tree
TrainingManual
7.1-21
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AddaSeparateY AddaSeparateY AddaSeparateY AddaSeparateY- -- -axisandChangePlotScale axisandChangePlotScale axisandChangePlotScale axisandChangePlotScale
IntheProject treeleft-clickonceonthebranchHFSSDesign1>Results>XY HFSSDesign1>Results>XY HFSSDesign1>Results>XY HFSSDesign1>Results>XY
Plot1>dB(S(p2,p1)) Plot1>dB(S(p2,p1)) Plot1>dB(S(p2,p1)) Plot1>dB(S(p2,p1)).
IntheProperties windowintheY-axis rowclickonY1 andchangetoY2
DoubleleftclickonanumberoftheresultingY2axistotherightsideofXYPlot1
EdittheScaling tabasshown
PressOK OK OK OK
TrainingManual
7.1-22
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
RenamePlot RenamePlot RenamePlot RenamePlot
IntheProjecttreeright-clickonthebranchHFSSDesign1>Results>XYPlot1 HFSSDesign1>Results>XYPlot1 HFSSDesign1>Results>XYPlot1 HFSSDesign1>Results>XYPlot1
SelectRename
ChangenametoS-params
<return>
0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
Freq [GHz]
-60.00
-50.00
-40.00
-30.00
-20.00
-10.00
0.00
d
B
(
S
(
p
1
,
p
1
)
)
-1.00
-0.90
-0.80
-0.70
-0.60
-0.50
-0.40
-0.30
-0.20
-0.10
0.00
d
B
(
S
(
p
2
,
p
1
)
)
S-params
Curve Info
dB(S(p1,p1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
dB(S(p2,p1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
TrainingManual
7.1-23
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
FieldOverlays FieldOverlays FieldOverlays FieldOverlays
SelecttheMenuitemWindow> Window> Window> Window>filter_bpf filter_bpf filter_bpf filter_bpf - -- - HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1- -- - Modeler Modeler Modeler Modeler
IntheModeltreeselectthebranchPlanes> Planes> Planes> Planes>Global:XY Global:XY Global:XY Global:XY
Movethemousepointerintothemodelwindow
Right-clickandselectPlotFields>E> PlotFields>E> PlotFields>E> PlotFields>E>Mag_E Mag_E Mag_E Mag_E
ClickDone Done Done Done
TrainingManual
7.1-24
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
RescaleandAnimateFieldOverlay RescaleandAnimateFieldOverlay RescaleandAnimateFieldOverlay RescaleandAnimateFieldOverlay
Inthemodelwindowright-clickonthecolorscaleandselectModify
EdittheScale tabasshown
PressClose Close Close Close
Intheprojecttreeright-clickinthebranchHFSSDesign1>Field HFSSDesign1>Field HFSSDesign1>Field HFSSDesign1>Field
Overlays>E Overlays>E Overlays>E Overlays>E- -- -field>Mag_E1 field>Mag_E1 field>Mag_E1 field>Mag_E1 andselectAnimate
ClicktheOK OK OK OK button.
TrainingManual
8.1-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example LVDSDifferentialPair
LVDSDifferentialPair
Thisdifferentialpairexampleisintendedtoshowyouhowtocreate,simulate,
andanalyzeadifferentialpairusingtheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment.
LowVoltageDifferentialSignaling(LVDS)technologyisusedfor high-
performancebackplanes.TheLVDStechnologyisusedformulti-point
communicationsandusesabussimilartothesystemshownbelow. The
followingillustrationsdetailthepassivedeviceyouwillbecreating.
LAYER1(TOPSIDE)
LAYER2(SIGNAL1)
LAYER3(BOTTOMSIDE)
26mil
Traces: Traces: Traces: Traces:
Width=6mil Width=6mil Width=6mil Width=6mil
Spacing=18mil Spacing=18mil Spacing=18mil Spacing=18mil
Thickness=0.7mil Thickness=0.7mil Thickness=0.7mil Thickness=0.7mil
Length:1000mil Length:1000mil Length:1000mil Length:1000mil
Substrate: Substrate: Substrate: Substrate:
Thickness=26mil Thickness=26mil Thickness=26mil Thickness=26mil

r rr r
=4.4 =4.4 =4.4 =4.4
TrainingManual
8.1-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
createthispassivedevicemodel.
3DSolidModeling
Primitives:Box,Rectangles Box,Rectangles Box,Rectangles Box,Rectangles
BooleanOperations:DuplicateAlongLine,SweepAlongVector DuplicateAlongLine,SweepAlongVector DuplicateAlongLine,SweepAlongVector DuplicateAlongLine,SweepAlongVector
Analysis
Sweep: Interpolating Interpolating Interpolating Interpolating
Results
CartesianandSmithChartplotting CartesianandSmithChartplotting CartesianandSmithChartplotting CartesianandSmithChartplotting
FieldOverlays
3DFieldPlots 3DFieldPlots 3DFieldPlots 3DFieldPlots
TrainingManual
8.1-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
DesignReview
Beforewejumpintosettingupthisdeviceletsreviewthedesign.
TraceWidth=6mils
TraceLength=1000mils
DielectricHeight=13milsx2
1/2ozcopperTraces/Grounds=0.7mils
PortSize=???
PortWidth
Theportwidthshouldbeatleast3-5timesthestackup(78-130mils).Since
thetracesarenotcentered,letsuse5xandaddthepairspacing(18mils)
foratotalport/modelwidthof220mils.
TraceLength
Sincewearemodelingauniformtransmissionline,wedonotneedto
simulatethe1000milslength.Letsreducethemodelto100mils anduse
de-embeddingtoaddtheextralength.
MaterialProperties
Tostartwith,letsmakeanengineeringassumptionthatthematerial
propertiesareconstantoverfrequency.Inaddition,wewillassumethat
modelingthetracesasperfectconductorswillnothaveanimpactonthe
performanceofthedevice.Thiswillspeedupthesimulation.Asan
additionalexercise,themodelcanbemodifiedtoincludefrequency
dependentmaterialsandlossyconductors.
GroundPlanes
Sinceweareignoringthemetalconductivity,wedonotneedtocreate
objectsforthegroundplanes.Instead,wewillutilizethebackground
(PerfectConductor)boundary.Ifweneedtoinvestigatetheeffectsof
copper,afiniteconductivityboundaryconditioncanbeusedtosimulatethe
coppergroundplanes.
TrainingManual
8.1-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
SolutionSetup
SincewearegoingtousethemodelforSPICEsimulation,thefrequencyrange
ofinterestisgoingtobedeterminedbytherise-time(tr)oftheinputsignal.The
maximumfrequencyiscalculatedbytaking0.5/tr,orthekneefrequency,and
multiplyingitbythenumberofsamplespertr.Theminimumfrequencyshould
beselectedasclosetoDCaspossible.
ThefollowingvalueswillbeusedfortheSolutionSetup
Rise-Time(tr):330ps
NumberofSamples:5
UpperFrequency:(0.5/330ps)*5~7.58GHzor8.0GHz
LowerFrequency:0.01GHz
FrequencySpacing:0.01GHz
Single(Adaptive)Frequency:8.0GHz
AdaptivePasses:10
DeltaS:0.02
SweepType:Interpolating
TrainingManual
8.1-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GettingStarted
Auto-assignterminalsonports:: : : : Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
8.1-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
8.1-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Creatingthe3DModel
1. Selectthemenuitem Modeler>Units Modeler>Units Modeler>Units Modeler>Units
2. SetModelUnits:
1. SelectUnits:mil mil mil mil
TrainingManual
8.1-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateTrace1 CreateTrace1 CreateTrace1 CreateTrace1
Tocreatetrace1: Tocreatetrace1: Tocreatetrace1: Tocreatetrace1:
1.SelectthemenuitemDraw>Box Draw>Box Draw>Box Draw>Box
2.Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheboxposition
X: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y: 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0, Z: - -- -0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35,Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
3.Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheoppositecornerofthebase
rectangle:
dX: 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0,dY: 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0, dZ: 0.7, 0.7, 0.7, 0.7,Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
2. ForPosition Position Position Position,type:0.0mil,S/2, 0.0mil,S/2, 0.0mil,S/2, 0.0mil,S/2,- -- -0.35mil 0.35mil 0.35mil 0.35mil,ClicktheTab Tab Tab Tab keytoaccept
AddVariableS SS S:18mil 18mil 18mil 18mil,ClicktheOK OK OK OK button
3. ForYSize YSize YSize YSize,type:W WW W,ClicktheTab Tab Tab Tab keytoaccept
AddVariableW WW W:6mil 6mil 6mil 6mil,ClicktheOK OK OK OK button
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:trace1 trace1 trace1 trace1
SelectthemenuitemView>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView. . . .
TrainingManual
8.1-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateTrace2 CreateTrace2 CreateTrace2 CreateTrace2
Tocreatetrace2: Tocreatetrace2: Tocreatetrace2: Tocreatetrace2:
2. Selectthemenuitem,Edit>Duplicate>Mirror Edit>Duplicate>Mirror Edit>Duplicate>Mirror Edit>Duplicate>Mirror.
1. Inputtheanchorpointofthemirrorplane:
X: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
2. Inputthetargetpointofthevectornormaltothemirrorplane:
dX: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dY: - -- -1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0,dZ: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
3. ClickOK OK OK OK whenthePropertyWindow PropertyWindow PropertyWindow PropertyWindow appears
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>List HFSS>List HFSS>List HFSS>List
2. FromtheModel Model Model Model tab,selecttheobjectnamedtrace1_1 trace1_1 trace1_1 trace1_1
3. ClicktheProperties Properties Properties Propertiesbutton
1. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:trace2 trace2 trace2 trace2
TrainingManual
8.1-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. MaterialName:My_FR4 My_FR4 My_FR4 My_FR4
TrainingManual
8.1-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Tocreatesubstrate: Tocreatesubstrate: Tocreatesubstrate: Tocreatesubstrate:
X: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y: - -- -100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0,Z: - -- -13.0, 13.0, 13.0, 13.0,Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
rectangle:
dX: 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0,dY: 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0,dZ: 26.0, 26.0, 26.0, 26.0,Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:substrate substrate substrate substrate
Tosetthetransparency: Tosetthetransparency: Tosetthetransparency: Tosetthetransparency:
2. ClickthebuttonforTransparency
1. Movetheslidebarto0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8(Opaque=0,Transparency=1)
TrainingManual
8.1-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateWavePortExcitation CreateWavePortExcitation CreateWavePortExcitation CreateWavePortExcitation
Selectthemenuitem Modeler>GridPlane>YZ Modeler>GridPlane>YZ Modeler>GridPlane>YZ Modeler>GridPlane>YZ
Tocreatearectanglethatrepresentstheport: Tocreatearectanglethatrepresentstheport: Tocreatearectanglethatrepresentstheport: Tocreatearectanglethatrepresentstheport:
X: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y: - -- -100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0,Z: - -- -13.0 13.0 13.0 13.0,Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
dX: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dY: 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0,dZ: 26.0 26.0 26.0 26.0,Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
Note Note Note Note:Youcanalsoselecttheobjectfromthe
ModelTree
ToduplicatetheobjectPort1: ToduplicatetheobjectPort1: ToduplicatetheobjectPort1: ToduplicatetheobjectPort1:
1. Selectthemenuitem,Edit>Duplicate>AlongLine Edit>Duplicate>AlongLine Edit>Duplicate>AlongLine Edit>Duplicate>AlongLine
2. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthefirstpointoftheduplicatevector
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthesecondpointofthe duplicate
vector
dX:100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0,dY:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ:0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
4. DuplicateAlongLineWindows
3. Click OK OK OK OK whenthePropertyWindow PropertyWindow PropertyWindow PropertyWindow appears
5. FromtheModeltreeselecttheobjectPort1_1 Port1_1 Port1_1 Port1_1.
6. InthePropertywindowfortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Port2 Port2 Port2 Port2
TrainingManual
8.1-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateWavePortExcitation(Continued) CreateWavePortExcitation(Continued) CreateWavePortExcitation(Continued) CreateWavePortExcitation(Continued)
Selecttheobject Port1. Port1. Port1. Port1.Select themenuitem HFSS>Excitations>Assign> HFSS>Excitations>Assign> HFSS>Excitations>Assign> HFSS>Excitations>Assign>
WavePort, WavePort, WavePort, WavePort,awindowappearsandclickOK OK OK OK.Thewaveportandterminalsare
automaticallyassigned.
Note: Note: Note: Note:ReferenceConductorsarenotshown
becauseweareusingtheOuter
boundaryconditionastheReferenceConductor
Setthenameforexcitations: Setthenameforexcitations: Setthenameforexcitations: Setthenameforexcitations:
ExpandtheExcitations Excitations Excitations Excitations in
ProjectManager ProjectManager ProjectManager ProjectManager
Clickon WavePort1. WavePort1. WavePort1. WavePort1.
Changethe name name name nameinthe
Properties Properties Properties Properties window:P1 P1 P1 P1
SetDifferentialpairs SetDifferentialpairs SetDifferentialpairs SetDifferentialpairs
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Excitations>Differentialpairs HFSS>Excitations>Differentialpairs HFSS>Excitations>Differentialpairs HFSS>Excitations>Differentialpairs
ClicktheNewPair NewPair NewPair NewPair button
ClickOK OK OK OK
Repeattheabovesteps Repeattheabovesteps Repeattheabovesteps Repeattheabovesteps toassignanexcitationfortheobject Port2 Port2 Port2 Port2
andsettheexcitationnameas P2. P2. P2. P2.Thenaddanewdiffpair.
TrainingManual
8.1-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateWavePortExcitation(Continued) CreateWavePortExcitation(Continued) CreateWavePortExcitation(Continued) CreateWavePortExcitation(Continued)
Tosetdeembedding: Tosetdeembedding: Tosetdeembedding: Tosetdeembedding:
1. FromtheProjectManager ProjectManager ProjectManager ProjectManager,selecttheexcitationnamedP2 P2 P2 P2
2. IntheProperties Properties Properties Propertieswindow:
1. DeembedDistance:- -- -900mil 900mil 900mil 900mil(PositiveValuesareintothePort)
2. Deembed: Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
8.1-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
boundary.
3. ClicktheClose Close Close Close buttonwhenyouarefinished.
TrainingManual
8.1-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AnalysisSetup
MaximumDeltaS:0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02
DoLambdaRefinement: Checked Checked Checked Checked
LambdaTarget:UseDefaultValue: Checked Checked Checked Checked
Orderofbasisfunction:Zeroorder. :Zeroorder. :Zeroorder. :Zeroorder.
2. EditSweepWindow:
2. FrequencySetup:
Type:LinearStep :LinearStep :LinearStep :LinearStep
Start:0.0GHz 0.0GHz 0.0GHz 0.0GHz
3. InterpolatingSweepOptions:
MaxSolutions:50 :50 :50 :50
ErrorTolerance:0.5% :0.5% :0.5% :0.5%
4. ExtrapolatetoDC: : : : Checked Checked Checked Checked
MinimumSolveFrequency:0.01GHz :0.01GHz :0.01GHz :0.01GHz
TrainingManual
8.1-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:hfss_lvds_diffpair hfss_lvds_diffpair hfss_lvds_diffpair hfss_lvds_diffpair
Analyze
Note: Note: Note: Note: Toviewanyerrorsorwarningmessages,seetheMessage
Manager.
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Analyze HFSS>Analyze HFSS>Analyze HFSS>AnalyzeOrclicktheicon
onthetoolbar.
TrainingManual
8.1-18
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
theconvergencedata.
TrainingManual
8.1-19
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
0.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00
Freq [GHz]
-100.00
-80.00
-60.00
-40.00
-20.00
0.00
Y
1
Ansoft Corporation HFSSModel1
XY Plot 1
Curve Info
dB(St(Diff1,Diff1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
dB(St(Diff1,Comm1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
dB(St(Diff1,p2_Diff1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
CreateReports
CreateDifferentialPairS CreateDifferentialPairS CreateDifferentialPairS CreateDifferentialPairS- -- -ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot
2. ContextWindow:
3. TraceWindow
1. Category:TerminalSParameters TerminalSParameters TerminalSParameters TerminalSParameters
2. Quantity:St(Diff1,Diff1),St(Diff1,Comm1),St(Diff1,Diff2 St(Diff1,Diff1),St(Diff1,Comm1),St(Diff1,Diff2 St(Diff1,Diff1),St(Diff1,Comm1),St(Diff1,Diff2 St(Diff1,Diff1),St(Diff1,Comm1),St(Diff1,Diff2)
TrainingManual
8.1-20
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateDifferentialandCommonPairImpedancesDataTable CreateDifferentialandCommonPairImpedancesDataTable CreateDifferentialandCommonPairImpedancesDataTable CreateDifferentialandCommonPairImpedancesDataTable
Report>DataTable Report>DataTable Report>DataTable Report>DataTable
2. ContextWindow:Solution:Setup1: Setup1: Setup1: Setup1:LastAdaptive LastAdaptive LastAdaptive LastAdaptive
3. TraceWindow
1. Category:TerminalPort TerminalPort TerminalPort TerminalPortZo Zo Zo Zo
2. Quantity:Zot(Diff1,Diff1),Zot(Comm1,Comm1) Zot(Diff1,Diff1),Zot(Comm1,Comm1) Zot(Diff1,Diff1),Zot(Comm1,Comm1) Zot(Diff1,Diff1),Zot(Comm1,Comm1)
MatrixData MatrixData MatrixData MatrixData- -- - ExportS ExportS ExportS ExportS- -- -parameterstoafile parameterstoafile parameterstoafile parameterstoafile
1.SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Results>SolutionData, HFSS>Results>SolutionData, HFSS>Results>SolutionData, HFSS>Results>SolutionData,
2.SolutionDatadialog
1.ClicktheMatrixData MatrixData MatrixData MatrixData Tab
2.Simulation:Setup1,Sweep1 Setup1,Sweep1 Setup1,Sweep1 Setup1,Sweep1
3.ClicktheExport Export Export Export button.
1.Filename:hfss_lvds_diffpair hfss_lvds_diffpair hfss_lvds_diffpair hfss_lvds_diffpair
2.SaveasType:Touchstone Touchstone Touchstone Touchstone
3.ClicktheSave Save Save Save button
4.ClicktheOK OK OK OK buttontoaccept50ohm
referenceimpedance
4.ClicktheClose Close Close Close button
TrainingManual
8.1-21
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
FieldOverlays
SetSources:Common SetSources:Common SetSources:Common SetSources:Common
Tosetthefieldexcitation: Tosetthefieldexcitation: Tosetthefieldexcitation: Tosetthefieldexcitation:
2. EditSourcesWindow: :: :
1. ForTrace1_T1:Usethedefaultvalue
2. ForTrace2_T1:ScalingFactor:1 11 1
3. ForTrace1_T2:Terminated: : : : Checked Checked Checked Checked
4. ForTrace2_T2:Terminated: : : : Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
8.1-22
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Selectthemenuitem Window> Window> Window> Window>hfss_diff_pair hfss_diff_pair hfss_diff_pair hfss_diff_pair HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1- -- - Modeler Modeler Modeler Modeler
Tomodifytheattributesofafieldplot: Tomodifytheattributesofafieldplot: Tomodifytheattributesofafieldplot: Tomodifytheattributesofafieldplot:
2. SelectPlotFolderWindow,ClicktheOK OK OK OK button
3. E-FieldWindow:
2. Min: 5 55 5
3. Max: 10000 10000 10000 10000
2. ClickthePlot Plot Plot Plot tab
1. IsoValType:Fringe Fringe Fringe Fringe
2. Ifrealtimemode realtimemode realtimemode realtimemode isnotchecked,clicktheApply Apply Apply Apply button.
TrainingManual
8.1-23
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateFieldOverlay(Cont.) CreateFieldOverlay(Cont.) CreateFieldOverlay(Cont.) CreateFieldOverlay(Cont.)
3. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E>Vector_E HFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E>Vector_E HFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E>Vector_E HFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E>Vector_E
2. Quantity:Vector_E Vector_E Vector_E Vector_E
3. InVolume:All All All All
3. E-FieldWindow:
1. ClicktheMarker/Arrow Marker/Arrow Marker/Arrow Marker/Arrow tab
1. Type:Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder
2. MapSize: Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked
3. ArrowTale: Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked
TrainingManual
8.1-24
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
SetDifferentialModeFieldExcitation SetDifferentialModeFieldExcitation SetDifferentialModeFieldExcitation SetDifferentialModeFieldExcitation
Tosetthefieldexcitation: Tosetthefieldexcitation: Tosetthefieldexcitation: Tosetthefieldexcitation:
2. EditSourcesWindow: :: :
1. ForTrace2_T1:OffsetPhase:180Deg.
Thefieldplotswillautomaticallybeupdatedtoreflectthechanges.
TrainingManual
8.1-25
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Duringthedesignofadevice,itiscommonpracticetodevelopdesigntrendsbasedon
sweptparameters.AnsoftHFSSwithOptimetricsParametricSweep canautomatically
createthesedesigncurves.
Wewillparameterizethisdesignusingtwovariables:
1. VariableWwillvarythewidthoftraces:6 W 12mils
2. VariableSwillvarythespacingbetweentraces:15 S 21mils
InthepostprocessoryouwillabletodisplayresultsandseehowDifferentialimpedance
changeswiththerespecttotracewidthandspacingbetweentraces.
6 6 6 6 W W W W 12mils 12mils 12mils 12mils
15 15 15 15 S S S S 21mils 21mils 21mils 21mils
W WW W
S SS S
TrainingManual
8.1-26
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. Variable:S SS S
5. Count:3 33 3
6. ClicktheAdd>> Add>> Add>> Add>> button
7. Variable:W W W W
11. Count:3 33 3
12. ClicktheAdd Add Add Add >> >> >> >> button
2. ClickontheOptions Options Options Options tab: :: :
1. SaveFieldsAndMesh: : : : Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
8.1-27
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Analyze
Manager.
TrainingManual
8.1-28
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
CreateTerminalPortZovsS CreateTerminalPortZovsS CreateTerminalPortZovsS CreateTerminalPortZovsS
Report> Report> Report> Report>RectangularPlot RectangularPlot RectangularPlot RectangularPlot
2. ContextWindow:
3. TraceWindow
1. X:S
2. Category:TerminalPortZo TerminalPortZo TerminalPortZo TerminalPortZo
3. Quantity:Zot(Diff1,Diff1),Zot(Comm1,Comm1) Zot(Diff1,Diff1),Zot(Comm1,Comm1) Zot(Diff1,Diff1),Zot(Comm1,Comm1) Zot(Diff1,Diff1),Zot(Comm1,Comm1)
4. Function:Mag Mag Mag Mag
15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00
S [mil]
0.00
20.00
40.00
60.00
80.00
100.00
120.00
Y
1
XY Plot 3
Curve Info
mag(Zot(Comm1,C
Freq='8GHz' W='6mil'
mag(Zot(Comm1,C
mag(Zot(Comm1,C
mag(Zot(Diff1,Diff1
mag(Zot(Diff1,Diff1
mag(Zot(Diff1,Diff1
TrainingManual
8.1-29
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
FieldOverlays
CreateFieldPlotvsS CreateFieldPlotvsS CreateFieldPlotvsS CreateFieldPlotvsS
Usingtheprojecttree,expandtheFieldOverlay FieldOverlay FieldOverlay FieldOverlay,EField EField EField EField.
DoubleClickonMag_E1 Mag_E1 Mag_E1 Mag_E1 tomakethefieldplotvisible
Right-ClickonMag_E1 Mag_E1 Mag_E1 Mag_E1 andselectAnimate Animate Animate Animate
SetupAnimation
SweptVariable:S SS S
TheAnimationdialogwillappear.
ExitingHFSS ExitingHFSS ExitingHFSS ExitingHFSS
ToExitHFSS: ToExitHFSS: ToExitHFSS: ToExitHFSS:
1. SelectthemenuitemFile>Exit File>Exit File>Exit File>Exit
1. IfpromptedSavethechanges
TrainingManual
8.1-30
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
LaunchingAnsoftDesigner
ToaccessAnsoftDesigner,clicktheMicrosoftStart Start Start Start button,selectPrograms Programs Programs Programs,select
Ansoft Ansoft Ansoft AnsoftandselecttheDesigner4 Designer4 Designer4 Designer4 programgroup.ClickAnsoftDesigner4 AnsoftDesigner4 AnsoftDesigner4 AnsoftDesigner4.
OpeningaNewProject
Tocreateanewproject: Tocreateanewproject: Tocreateanewproject: Tocreateanewproject:
FromtheProject Project Project Project menu,selectInsertNexximCircuitDesign InsertNexximCircuitDesign InsertNexximCircuitDesign InsertNexximCircuitDesign
ChooseLayoutTechnologyWindow
ClickNone None None None
TrainingManual
8.1-31
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AddinganHFSSDesign LVDSDiffPairModel
ToinsertanHFSSDesignselectthemenuitemProject>AddModel>AddHFSS Project>AddModel>AddHFSS Project>AddModel>AddHFSS Project>AddModel>AddHFSS
Model.. Model.. Model.. Model..
TheHFSSDynamicLink HFSSDynamicLink HFSSDynamicLink HFSSDynamicLink windowwillappear
ChangeNameto:Diff_pair Diff_pair Diff_pair Diff_pair
Filename:Clickonthe... ... ... ... browse button
TheOpen Open Open Open windowwillappear
Browsetothelocationofhfss_lvds_diffpair.hfss hfss_lvds_diffpair.hfss hfss_lvds_diffpair.hfss hfss_lvds_diffpair.hfss
Click Open Open Open Open
ClickontheLinkDescription LinkDescription LinkDescription LinkDescription tab
TransmissionLineModel(Waveport1): Checked Checked Checked Checked
ClickOK OK OK OK toclosetheHFSSDynamicLinkwindow
Browsebutton
TrainingManual
8.1-32
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
PlacingComponents
PlacetheHFSSmodelintheschematic
1. ClicktheProject Project Project ProjecttabintheProjectManager ProjectManager ProjectManager ProjectManager
2. 2. 2. 2. Expand Definitions Definitions Definitions Definitions thenexpandModels Models Models Models
3. Selectdiff_pair diff_pair diff_pair diff_pair,rightclickandselectPlaceNewComponent PlaceNewComponent PlaceNewComponent PlaceNewComponent
4. ClickNo No No No forShowCommonReferencePort? ShowCommonReferencePort? ShowCommonReferencePort? ShowCommonReferencePort?
5. 5. 5. 5. Leftmouseclicktoplaceontheschematic.TofinishhitEsckey.
EdittheDiffPaircomponent
1. RightmouseclickontheDiffPaircomponentintheschematicandselect
Properties Properties Properties Properties
2. FortheValueofHFSSLineLength HFSSLineLength HFSSLineLength HFSSLineLength type1000mil 1000mil 1000mil 1000mil.
3. PressOK OK OK OK
TrainingManual
8.1-33
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
ComponentPlacement ComponentPlacement ComponentPlacement ComponentPlacement continued continued continued continued
Place3Resistorsintheschematic
1. IntheComponentsTab ComponentsTab ComponentsTab ComponentsTab,underLumped Lumped Lumped Lumped - -- ->Resistors >Resistors >Resistors >Resistors,doubleclick
Resistors Resistors Resistors Resistors
2. Clicktheleftmousebutton3timestoplace3resistorsinthe
schematic.
3. Toendtheplacement,clicktherightmousebuttonandselect
Finish Finish Finish Finish.(Youcanalsoendtheplacementbypressingthespacebar)
Note: Note: Note: Note:BeforeplacingacomponentontheschematicusetheR RR R keyto
rotate.Ifacomponentisalreadyplaced,usethe<ctrl>R <ctrl>R <ctrl>R <ctrl>R keytorotate.
Changethevalueofthethirdresistor
1. Rightmouseclicktheresistorshownontherighthandsideofthe
schematicandthenselectPropertiesinthepulldownmenu
2. ChangethevalueofR RR R from50to100 100 100 100,thenhitEnter Enter Enter Enter
Note:alternatively,youcandoubleleftmousebuttonclickonthe
resistortobringuptheProperties Properties Properties Properties window(shownbelow)and
changethevaluefrom100to50 50 50 50,thenhitEnter Enter Enter Enter
TrainingManual
8.1-34
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
PlacePiecewiseLinearSource
1. IntheComponentsTab,underIndependentSources IndependentSources IndependentSources IndependentSources,doubleclick
onVPWLPiecewiseLinear VPWLPiecewiseLinear VPWLPiecewiseLinear VPWLPiecewiseLinear VoltageSource VoltageSource VoltageSource VoltageSource.
2. Leftmouseclicktoplacethesourceintheschematic
3. Pressthespacebar spacebar spacebar spacebar tofinishtheplacement
EditPropertiesofVoltageSource
1. RightmouseclickonthesourceProperties Properties Properties Properties inthepulldownmenu
2. ChangevalueofTime2 Time2 Time2 Time2 to330ps 330ps 330ps 330ps
3. ChangevalueofVal2 Val2 Val2 Val2 to1V 1V 1V 1V
TrainingManual
8.1-35
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
PlaceSecondPiecewiseLinearSource
2. ChangevalueofTime2 Time2 Time2 Time2 to330ps 330ps 330ps 330ps
3. ChangevalueofVal2 Val2 Val2 Val2 to-1V 1V 1V 1V
TrainingManual
8.1-36
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AddingWiringtoconnectcomponents AddingWiringtoconnectcomponents AddingWiringtoconnectcomponents AddingWiringtoconnectcomponents
1. SelectthemenuitemDraw Draw Draw Draw- -- ->Wire >Wire >Wire >Wire
2. Placethecursor(whichisnowanX)overanodeandleftmouseclickonce
3. Dragthemousetotheconnectionnodeandleftmouseclickonce.
4. Repeatthisprocedureuntiltheconnectionsbelowaremade
AddingGroundConnections AddingGroundConnections AddingGroundConnections AddingGroundConnections
1. SelectthemenuitemDraw>Ground Draw>Ground Draw>Ground Draw>Ground (alternativelyyoucanselectthe
toolbaricon)
2. Place2groundconnectionsontheendsofthevoltagesourcesas shown
below
AddingVoltageProbes AddingVoltageProbes AddingVoltageProbes AddingVoltageProbes
1. IntheComponents Components Components Components tab,expandtheProbes. Probes. Probes. Probes.
2. Place4VoltageProbes VoltageProbes VoltageProbes VoltageProbes andnamethemVin1,Vin2,Vout1,Vout2asshown
below.
3. PlaceaDifferentialVoltageProbe DifferentialVoltageProbe DifferentialVoltageProbe DifferentialVoltageProbe acrossthe100Ohmresistorandnameit
Vdiff Vdiff Vdiff Vdiffasshownbelow. .. .
TrainingManual
8.1-37
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. SelectthemenuitemFile>SaveAs File>SaveAs File>SaveAs File>SaveAs.
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:lvds_diffpair_transient lvds_diffpair_transient lvds_diffpair_transient lvds_diffpair_transient
AnalysisSetup
1. SelectthemenuitemNexximCircuit>AddSolutionSetup>Transient NexximCircuit>AddSolutionSetup>Transient NexximCircuit>AddSolutionSetup>Transient NexximCircuit>AddSolutionSetup>Transient
2. AnalysisSetupWindow:
1. 1. 1. 1. AnalysisControl AnalysisControl AnalysisControl AnalysisControl
1. Step: 1ps 1ps 1ps 1ps
2. Stop:2ns 2ns 2ns 2ns
2. ClickOK OK OK OK
3. SelectthemenuitemNexximCircuit>Analyze NexximCircuit>Analyze NexximCircuit>Analyze NexximCircuit>Analyze
TrainingManual
8.1-38
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
PlotInput,OutputandDifferencewaveforms PlotInput,OutputandDifferencewaveforms PlotInput,OutputandDifferencewaveforms PlotInput,OutputandDifferencewaveforms
CreateReport CreateReport CreateReport CreateReport
1. SelectthemenuitemNexximCircuit>Results>CreateStandardReport> NexximCircuit>Results>CreateStandardReport> NexximCircuit>Results>CreateStandardReport> NexximCircuit>Results>CreateStandardReport>
RectangularPlot RectangularPlot RectangularPlot RectangularPlot
1. Category: Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage
2. Quantity:V(Vin1),V(Vin2),V(Vout1),V(Vout2) V(Vin1),V(Vin2),V(Vout1),V(Vout2) V(Vin1),V(Vin2),V(Vout1),V(Vout2) V(Vin1),V(Vin2),V(Vout1),V(Vout2)
3. Function:<none> <none> <none> <none>
TrainingManual
8.2-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example SegmentedReturnPath
SegmentedReturnPath
traceoveraslotinthegroundplantusingtheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment.
LAYER1(SIGNAL1)
LAYER2(BOTTOMSIDE)
1.3mm
Board: Board: Board: Board:
Thickness=1.3mm Thickness=1.3mm Thickness=1.3mm Thickness=1.3mm

r rr r
=4.5 =4.5 =4.5 =4.5
Trace: Trace: Trace: Trace:
Length=8.2cm Length=8.2cm Length=8.2cm Length=8.2cm
Termination:47 Termination:47 Termination:47 Termination:47
8mm
4cm
5cm 6mm 3.4cm 1cm
1cm
3mm
6cm
TrainingManual
8.2-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
3DSolidModeling
Primitives:Box,Rectangles Box,Rectangles Box,Rectangles Box,Rectangles
BooleanOperations: Subtract Subtract Subtract Subtract
Ports:LumpedPort LumpedPort LumpedPort LumpedPort
BoundaryConditions:LumpedRLC,PML LumpedRLC,PML LumpedRLC,PML LumpedRLC,PML
Analysis
Sweep: InterpolatingSweep InterpolatingSweep InterpolatingSweep InterpolatingSweep
Results
CartesianandSmithChartplotting CartesianandSmithChartplotting CartesianandSmithChartplotting CartesianandSmithChartplotting
FieldOverlays
MagnitudeandVectorFieldPlotting MagnitudeandVectorFieldPlotting MagnitudeandVectorFieldPlotting MagnitudeandVectorFieldPlotting
Animation Animation Animation Animation
TrainingManual
8.2-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
DesignReview
TraceWidth=3mm
TraceLength=8.2cm
DielectricHeight=1.3mm
PortSize/Type=???
FreeSpace=PMLorRadiationBoundary
PortSize/Type
Sincethetraceisinternaltothemodel,letsusealumpedgapsourceport
TraceThickness/MaterialProperties
Tostartletsmakeanengineeringassumptionthatthetracethicknessand
conductivitywillnothaveanimpactontheperformanceofthedevice.This
willspeedupthesimulation.
FreeSpace
Weshouldexpectsomeradiationtooccurbecauseoftheslotintheground,
however,itshouldnotbeverystrong.Becausethereislimited radiationthe
separationfromthedeviceandthefree-spaceboundarycanbekepttoa
minimum.Theincidenceangleoftheradiationisunknown,thereforewe
shoulduseaPML.Themaximumspacingwillbe~/20@1GHzorabout
1.5cm
TrainingManual
8.2-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GettingStarted
Auto-assignterminalsonports: Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
8.2-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
8.2-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Creatingthe3DModel
2. SetModelUnits:
1. FortheMaterialName MaterialName MaterialName MaterialName type:My_FR4 My_FR4 My_FR4 My_FR4
TrainingManual
8.2-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateBoard CreateBoard CreateBoard CreateBoard
Tocreatetheboard: Tocreatetheboard: Tocreatetheboard: Tocreatetheboard:
rectangle:
dX:6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0,dY:10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0,dZ:- -- -1.3mm 1.3mm 1.3mm 1.3mm,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Board Board Board Board
SelectthemenuitemView>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView View>FitAll>ActiveView. . . .OrpresstheCTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D CTRL+D key
Tocreateground: Tocreateground: Tocreateground: Tocreateground:
X:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z:- -- -1.3mm 1.3mm 1.3mm 1.3mm,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
rectangle:
TrainingManual
8.2-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
X:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y:5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0,Z:- -- -1.3mm 1.3mm 1.3mm 1.3mm,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
CreateGroundCutOut CreateGroundCutOut CreateGroundCutOut CreateGroundCutOut
Tocreatecutout: Tocreatecutout: Tocreatecutout: Tocreatecutout:
rectangle:
dX:4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0,dY:6.0mm 6.0mm 6.0mm 6.0mm,dZ:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
4. PressOK OK OK OK whenthePropertieswindowappears
SelectGround&Rectangle1: SelectGround&Rectangle1: SelectGround&Rectangle1: SelectGround&Rectangle1:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Ground,Rectangle1 Ground,Rectangle1 Ground,Rectangle1 Ground,Rectangle1
Tocompletethegroundobject: Tocompletethegroundobject: Tocompletethegroundobject: Tocompletethegroundobject:
1. Selectthemenuitem Modeler>Boolean>Subtract Modeler>Boolean>Subtract Modeler>Boolean>Subtract Modeler>Boolean>Subtract
2. SubtractWindow
ToolParts:Rectangle1 Rectangle1 Rectangle1 Rectangle1
TrainingManual
8.2-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Toselecttheground: Toselecttheground: Toselecttheground: Toselecttheground:
X:1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0,Y:8.0mm 8.0mm 8.0mm 8.0mm,Z:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
TrainingManual
8.2-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Tocreatetrace: Tocreatetrace: Tocreatetrace: Tocreatetrace:
rectangle:
dX:3.0mm 3.0mm 3.0mm 3.0mm,dY:8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2,dZ:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0, PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Trace Trace Trace Trace
1. Name:PerfE_Trace PerfE_Trace PerfE_Trace PerfE_Trace
TrainingManual
8.2-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
SelectthemenuitemModeler>GridPlane>XZ Modeler>GridPlane>XZ Modeler>GridPlane>XZ Modeler>GridPlane>XZ
rectangle:
dX:3.0mm 3.0mm 3.0mm 3.0mm,dY:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ:- -- -1.3mm 1.3mm 1.3mm 1.3mm,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
TrainingManual
8.2-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. ConductingObject:Trace Trace Trace Trace
3. ReferenceConductors:Ground Ground Ground Ground
4. ClickOK OK OK OK
1. ExpandtheExcitations Excitations Excitations Excitations inProjectManager ProjectManager ProjectManager ProjectManager
2. Clickon LumpPort1. LumpPort1. LumpPort1. LumpPort1.
3. Changethe Name Name Name NameintheProperties Properties Properties Properties window:p1 p1 p1 p1
TrainingManual
8.2-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateResistor CreateResistor CreateResistor CreateResistor
rectangle:
dX:3.0mm 3.0mm 3.0mm 3.0mm,dY:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ:- -- -1.3mm 1.3mm 1.3mm 1.3mm,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Resistor Resistor Resistor Resistor
TrainingManual
8.2-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AssignLumpedRLC AssignLumpedRLC AssignLumpedRLC AssignLumpedRLC
ToselecttheobjectResistor: ToselecttheobjectResistor: ToselecttheobjectResistor: ToselecttheobjectResistor:
1.SelectthemenuitemEdit>Select>ByName Edit>Select>ByName Edit>Select>ByName Edit>Select>ByName
2.SelectObjectDialog,
1.Selecttheobjectsnamed:Resistor Resistor Resistor Resistor
2.ClicktheOK OK OK OKbutton
ToassignlumpedRLCboundary ToassignlumpedRLCboundary ToassignlumpedRLCboundary ToassignlumpedRLCboundary
1.Selectthemenuitem HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>LumpedRLC HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>LumpedRLC HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>LumpedRLC HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>LumpedRLC
2.LumpedRLCBoundary
1.Name:R RR R
2.Resistance: Checked Checked Checked Checked
3.Resistance:47Ohm 47Ohm 47Ohm 47Ohm
4.ForCurrentFlowLine CurrentFlowLine CurrentFlowLine CurrentFlowLine,clickUndefined Undefined Undefined Undefined andselectNewLine NewLine NewLine NewLine
5.Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthevectorposition
X:1.5mm 1.5mm 1.5mm 1.5mm,Y:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z:- -- -1.3mm 1.3mm 1.3mm 1.3mm,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
6.Usingthecoordinateentryfields,enterthevertex
dX:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dY:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ:1.3mm 1.3mm 1.3mm 1.3mm, PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
7.ClicktheOK OK OK OK button
TrainingManual
8.2-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TosetthedefaultmaterialasAir TosetthedefaultmaterialasAir TosetthedefaultmaterialasAir TosetthedefaultmaterialasAir
rectangle:
TrainingManual
8.2-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AssignaPerfectlyMatchedLayer(PML) AssignaPerfectlyMatchedLayer(PML) AssignaPerfectlyMatchedLayer(PML) AssignaPerfectlyMatchedLayer(PML)
Toselecttheair: Toselecttheair: Toselecttheair: Toselecttheair:
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>Selectbyname Edit>Selectbyname Edit>Selectbyname Edit>Selectbyname
2. ObjectName:Air Air Air Air
ToassignthePMLboundary ToassignthePMLboundary ToassignthePMLboundary ToassignthePMLboundary
1. Selectthemenuitem HFSS>Boundaries>PMLSetupWizard HFSS>Boundaries>PMLSetupWizard HFSS>Boundaries>PMLSetupWizard HFSS>Boundaries>PMLSetupWizard
2. PMLSetupWizard:CoverObjects
1. Select:CreatePMLCoverObjectsonSelectedFaces CreatePMLCoverObjectsonSelectedFaces CreatePMLCoverObjectsonSelectedFaces CreatePMLCoverObjectsonSelectedFaces
2. UniformLayerThickness:1cm 1cm 1cm 1cm
3. Createjoiningcornerandedgeobjects: Checked Checked Checked Checked
3. PMLSetupWizard:MaterialParameters
1. Select:PML PML PML PML Objectsaccept Objectsaccept Objectsaccept Objectsaccept FreeRadiation FreeRadiation FreeRadiation FreeRadiation
1. MinFrequency:0.01GHz :0.01GHz :0.01GHz :0.01GHz
2. MinimumRadiatingDistance:56.33mm :56.33mm :56.33mm :56.33mm
2. ReviewsettingsonthePMLSetupWizard:Summarypage.
TrainingManual
8.2-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateaFaceList CreateaFaceList CreateaFaceList CreateaFaceList
SinceweareusingthePML,weneedtocreateafacelistthatwillbeusedforthe
radiationcalculation.
Tocreateafacelist Tocreateafacelist Tocreateafacelist Tocreateafacelist
2. FaceID:<SelectAll> :<SelectAll> :<SelectAll> :<SelectAll>
4. SelectthemenuitemModeler>List>Create>FaceList Modeler>List>Create>FaceList Modeler>List>Create>FaceList Modeler>List>Create>FaceList
InfiniteSphere InfiniteSphere InfiniteSphere InfiniteSphere Tab
1. Name:Radiation Radiation Radiation Radiation
TrainingManual
8.2-18
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
boundary.
TrainingManual
8.2-19
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AnalysisSetup
MaximumDeltaS:0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02
LambdaTarget:UseDefaultValue Checked Checked Checked Checked
OrderofBasisfunction:First First First First- -- -Order Order Order Order
2. EditSweepWindow:
2. FrequencySetup:
ErrorTolerance:0.5% :0.5% :0.5% :0.5%
4. ExtrapolatetoDC: : : : Checked Checked Checked Checked
MinimumSolveFrequency:0.01GHz :0.01GHz :0.01GHz :0.01GHz
TrainingManual
8.2-20
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:hfss_seg_gplane hfss_seg_gplane hfss_seg_gplane hfss_seg_gplane
Analyze
Manager.
TrainingManual
8.2-21
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
theconvergencedata.
TrainingManual
8.2-22
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
2. ContextWindow:
1. Solution:Setup1:AdaptivePass Setup1:AdaptivePass Setup1:AdaptivePass Setup1:AdaptivePass
3. TraceWindow
2. Quantity:St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1) St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1) St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1) St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1)
TrainingManual
8.2-23
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateZ CreateZ CreateZ CreateZ- -- -ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot Real/Imaginary Real/Imaginary Real/Imaginary Real/Imaginary
2. ContextWindow:
3. TraceWindow
1. Category:Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal ZParameter ZParameter ZParameter ZParameter
2. Quantity:Zt(Trace_T1,Trace_T1) Zt(Trace_T1,Trace_T1) Zt(Trace_T1,Trace_T1) Zt(Trace_T1,Trace_T1)
3. Function:Re,Im Re,Im Re,Im Re,Im
4. 4. 4. 4. ToaddanadditionalY ToaddanadditionalY ToaddanadditionalY ToaddanadditionalY- -- -Axis Axis Axis Axis
forim(Z(p1,p1)) forim(Z(p1,p1)) forim(Z(p1,p1)) forim(Z(p1,p1))
1. ClickIm(Z)inProjectManager ProjectManager ProjectManager ProjectManager
2. InthePropertieswindow:
SelectY1inYAxiscolumn
andtoggleittoY2 Y2 Y2 Y2
TrainingManual
8.2-24
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS CreateTerminalS- -- -ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot SmithChart SmithChart SmithChart SmithChart
Report> Report> Report> Report>SmithChart SmithChart SmithChart SmithChart
2. ContextWindow:
3. TraceWindow
2. Quantity:St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1) St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1) St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1) St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1)
TrainingManual
8.2-25
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Create3DPolarFarFieldPlot Create3DPolarFarFieldPlot Create3DPolarFarFieldPlot Create3DPolarFarFieldPlot
Tocreatea3DFarFieldPlot Tocreatea3DFarFieldPlot Tocreatea3DFarFieldPlot Tocreatea3DFarFieldPlot
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Results>CreateFarFieldsReport>3D HFSS>Results>CreateFarFieldsReport>3D HFSS>Results>CreateFarFieldsReport>3D HFSS>Results>CreateFarFieldsReport>3D
PolarPlot PolarPlot PolarPlot PolarPlot
2. ContextWindow:
2. Geometry:Radiation :Radiation :Radiation :Radiation
1. Category: rE rE rE rE
2. Quantity:rETotal rETotal rETotal rETotal
TrainingManual
8.2-26
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
FieldOverlays
1. ConfirmyouareinObjectSelect ObjectSelect ObjectSelect ObjectSelect modebyright-clickinginthegeometry
window,andselectingfromcontextmenuifnecessary.
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Board Board Board Board
4. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E>Mag_E HFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E>Mag_E HFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E>Mag_E HFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E>Mag_E
TomodifyaMagnitudefieldplot: TomodifyaMagnitudefieldplot: TomodifyaMagnitudefieldplot: TomodifyaMagnitudefieldplot:
3. E-FieldWindow:
2. Min: 1 11 1
3. Max: 4500 4500 4500 4500
2. ClickthePlots Plots Plots Plots Tab
1. ScalarPlot:IsoValSurface IsoValSurface IsoValSurface IsoValSurface
TrainingManual
8.2-27
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
3. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Fields>PlotFields>Other> HFSS>Fields>PlotFields>Other> HFSS>Fields>PlotFields>Other> HFSS>Fields>PlotFields>Other>
Vector_RealPoynting Vector_RealPoynting Vector_RealPoynting Vector_RealPoynting
2. Quantity:Vector_RealPoynting Vector_RealPoynting Vector_RealPoynting Vector_RealPoynting
1. Select:Poynting Poynting Poynting Poynting
3. PoyntingWindow:
2. Min: 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
3. Max: 2500 2500 2500 2500
2. ClicktheMarker/Arrow Marker/Arrow Marker/Arrow Marker/Arrow tab,intheArrowOption ArrowOption ArrowOption ArrowOption window
1. Type:Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder
2. MapSize: Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked
3. ArrowTale: Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked Unchecked
4. Ifrealtimemode realtimemode realtimemode realtimemode isnotchecked,clicktheApply Apply Apply Apply button.
TrainingManual
8.2-28
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
8.2-29
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateZ CreateZ CreateZ CreateZ- -- -ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot TimeDomainResponse(TDR) TimeDomainResponse(TDR) TimeDomainResponse(TDR) TimeDomainResponse(TDR)
2. ContextWindow:
2. Domain:Time Time Time Time
3. ClickTDROptions TDROptions TDROptions TDROptions,Options Options Options Options Windowappears:
1. InputSignal:Step. Step. Step. Step.Risetime:1ns 1ns 1ns 1ns
2. MaximumPlottime:6ns. 6ns. 6ns. 6ns.
3. Deltatime:0.1ns 0.1ns 0.1ns 0.1ns
4. ClickOK OK OK OK
4. TraceWindow
1. X:Time Time Time Time
2. Category:Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal TDRImpedance TDRImpedance TDRImpedance TDRImpedance
3. Quantity:TDRZt(Trace_T1) TDRZt(Trace_T1) TDRZt(Trace_T1) TDRZt(Trace_T1)
4. Function:None None None None
5. ClicktheNewResult NewResult NewResult NewResultbutton
TrainingManual
8.2-30
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
LaunchingAnsoftDesigner
ToaccessAnsoftDesigner,clicktheMicrosoftStart Start Start Start button,selectPrograms Programs Programs Programs,select
Ansoft Ansoft Ansoft AnsoftandselecttheDesigner4 Designer4 Designer4 Designer4 programgroup.ClickAnsoftDesigner4 AnsoftDesigner4 AnsoftDesigner4 AnsoftDesigner4.
OpeningaNewProject
Tocreateanewproject: Tocreateanewproject: Tocreateanewproject: Tocreateanewproject:
FromtheProject Project Project Project menu,selectInsertNexximCircuitDesign InsertNexximCircuitDesign InsertNexximCircuitDesign InsertNexximCircuitDesign
ChooseLayoutTechnologyWindow
ClickNone None None None
TrainingManual
8.2-31
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AddinganHFSSDesign SegmentedGroundPlaneModel
ToinsertanHFSSDesignselectthemenuitemProject>AddModel>AddHFSS Project>AddModel>AddHFSS Project>AddModel>AddHFSS Project>AddModel>AddHFSS
Model.. Model.. Model.. Model..
TheHFSSDynamicLink HFSSDynamicLink HFSSDynamicLink HFSSDynamicLink windowwillappear
ChangeNameto:Seg_gplane Seg_gplane Seg_gplane Seg_gplane
Filename:Clickonthe... ... ... ... browse button
TheOpen Open Open Open windowwillappear
Browsetothelocationofhfss_seg_gplane.hfss hfss_seg_gplane.hfss hfss_seg_gplane.hfss hfss_seg_gplane.hfss
Click Open Open Open Open
ClickOK OK OK OK toclosetheHFSSDynamicLinkwindow
Browsebutton
TrainingManual
8.2-32
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
PlacingComponents
PlacetheHFSSmodelintheschematic
1. ClicktheProject Project Project ProjecttabintheProjectManager ProjectManager ProjectManager ProjectManager
2. 2. 2. 2. Expand Definitions Definitions Definitions Definitions thenexpandModels Models Models Models
3. Selectseg_gplane seg_gplane seg_gplane seg_gplane,rightclickandselectPlaceNewComponent PlaceNewComponent PlaceNewComponent PlaceNewComponent
4. ClickNo No No No forShowCommonReferencePort? ShowCommonReferencePort? ShowCommonReferencePort? ShowCommonReferencePort?
5. 5. 5. 5. Leftmouseclicktoplaceontheschematic.TofinishhitEsckey.
TrainingManual
8.2-33
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
PlaceaResistorintheschematic
1. IntheComponentsTab ComponentsTab ComponentsTab ComponentsTab,underResistors Resistors Resistors Resistors,doubleclickResistor Resistor Resistor Resistor
2. Clicktheleftmousebuttononcetoplacearesistorintheschematic.
3. Toendtheplacement,clicktherightmousebuttonandselect
Finish Finish Finish Finish.(Youcanalsoendtheplacementbypressingthespacebar)
PlaceaCoaxialCableintheschematic
1. IntheComponentsTab ComponentsTab ComponentsTab ComponentsTab,underIdealDistributed IdealDistributed IdealDistributed IdealDistributed,doubleclick
TransmissionLine,TimeDelay TransmissionLine,TimeDelay TransmissionLine,TimeDelay TransmissionLine,TimeDelay
2. Clicktheleftmousebuttononcetoplaceacoaxialcableinthe
schematic.
Changethephysicallengthofthecoaxialcable
1. RightmouseclickthecomponentandthenselectPropertiesinthe
pulldownmenu
2. ChangethevalueofTD TD TD TD to1ns 1ns 1ns 1ns,thenhitOK OK OK OK
TrainingManual
8.2-34
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
PlacePiecewiseLinearSource
2. ChangevalueofTime2 Time2 Time2 Time2 to1ns 1ns 1ns 1ns
3. ChangevalueofVal2 Val2 Val2 Val2 to1V 1V 1V 1V
4. PressOK OK OK OK
TrainingManual
8.2-35
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AddingWiringtoconnectcomponents AddingWiringtoconnectcomponents AddingWiringtoconnectcomponents AddingWiringtoconnectcomponents
1. SelectthemenuitemDraw Draw Draw Draw- -- ->Wire >Wire >Wire >Wire
2. Placethecursor(whichisnowanX)overanodeandleftmouseclickonce
3. Dragthemousetotheconnectionnodeandleftmouseclickonce.
4. Repeatthisprocedureuntiltheconnectionsbelowaremade
AddingGroundConnections AddingGroundConnections AddingGroundConnections AddingGroundConnections
1. SelectthemenuitemDraw>Ground Draw>Ground Draw>Ground Draw>Ground (alternativelyyoucanselectthe
toolbaricon)
2. Placeagroundconnectionontheendofthevoltagesource
AddingVoltageProbes AddingVoltageProbes AddingVoltageProbes AddingVoltageProbes
1. IntheComponents Components Components Components tab,expandtheProbes. Probes. Probes. Probes.
2. Place2VoltageProbes VoltageProbes VoltageProbes VoltageProbes asshownbelowandnamethemv1,v2.
TrainingManual
8.2-36
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. SelectthemenuitemFile>SaveAs File>SaveAs File>SaveAs File>SaveAs.
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:seg_gplane_transient seg_gplane_transient seg_gplane_transient seg_gplane_transient
AnalysisSetup
1. SelectthemenuitemNexximCircuit>AddSolutionSetup>Transient NexximCircuit>AddSolutionSetup>Transient NexximCircuit>AddSolutionSetup>Transient NexximCircuit>AddSolutionSetup>Transient
2. AnalysisSetupWindow:
1. 1. 1. 1. AnalysisControl AnalysisControl AnalysisControl AnalysisControl
1. Step: .1ns .1ns .1ns .1ns
2. Stop:7ns 7ns 7ns 7ns
2. ClickOK OK OK OK
3. SelectthemenuitemNexximCircuit>Analyze NexximCircuit>Analyze NexximCircuit>Analyze NexximCircuit>Analyze
TrainingManual
8.2-37
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
PlotInput,OutputandDifferencewaveforms PlotInput,OutputandDifferencewaveforms PlotInput,OutputandDifferencewaveforms PlotInput,OutputandDifferencewaveforms
CreateReport CreateReport CreateReport CreateReport
1. Category: Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage
2. Quantity:V(V1),V(V2) V(V1),V(V2) V(V1),V(V2) V(V1),V(V2)
TrainingManual
8.2-38
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
PlotTDR PlotTDR PlotTDR PlotTDR
2. ClickonOutputVariables OutputVariables OutputVariables OutputVariables buttontocreateTDRequation
1. Name:typeTDR TDR TDR TDR
2. Expression:V(V2)/(V(V1) V(V2)/(V(V1) V(V2)/(V(V1) V(V2)/(V(V1)- -- -V(V2))*50 V(V2))*50 V(V2))*50 V(V2))*50
Note: Note: Note: Note:Tocreatetheaboveexpression,followthesesteps:
1. Category:Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage
2. Quantity:V(V2) V(V2) V(V2) V(V2)
3. ClickInsertQuantityintoExpression InsertQuantityintoExpression InsertQuantityintoExpression InsertQuantityintoExpression button
4. Type/ // / thentype( (( (
7. Type- -- -
10. Type) )) )
11. Type*50 *50 *50 *50
3. ClicktheAdd Add Add Addbutton
TracesWindow: :: :
Category:OutputVariables OutputVariables OutputVariables OutputVariables
Quantity:TDR TDR TDR TDR
Function:<none> <none> <none> <none>
ClicktheAddTrace AddTrace AddTrace AddTrace button
ClicktheNewReport NewReport NewReport NewReport button(seenextpageforTDRplot)
TrainingManual
8.2-39
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
8.3-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example Non-IdealPlanes
Non-IdealGroundPlane
Thisexampleisintendedtoshowyouhowtocreate,simulate,andanalyzenon-
idealgroundplanesusingtheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment.
Ground: Ground: Ground: Ground:
Board: Board: Board: Board:

r r r r
=1 =1 =1 =1
Trace: Trace: Trace: Trace:
Length=10mm Length=10mm Length=10mm Length=10mm
Width=1mm Width=1mm Width=1mm Width=1mm
Via: Via: Via: Via:
Diameter=1mm Diameter=1mm Diameter=1mm Diameter=1mm
Height=0.9mm Height=0.9mm Height=0.9mm Height=0.9mm
bot_gnd bot_gnd bot_gnd bot_gnd
top_gnd top_gnd top_gnd top_gnd
trace1 trace1 trace1 trace1
V
i
a
V
i
a
V
i
a
V
i
a
trace2 trace2 trace2 trace2
TrainingManual
8.3-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
3DSolidModeling
Primitives:Box,Rectangles,Cylinders Box,Rectangles,Cylinders Box,Rectangles,Cylinders Box,Rectangles,Cylinders
BooleanOperations:Subtract,Unite,Duplicate Subtract,Unite,Duplicate Subtract,Unite,Duplicate Subtract,Unite,Duplicate
Boundary
BoundaryConditions:PerfectH/Natural PerfectH/Natural PerfectH/Natural PerfectH/Natural
Excitations
Ports:LumpedGapSourcePort LumpedGapSourcePort LumpedGapSourcePort LumpedGapSourcePort
Analysis
Results
Fields
FastFrequencySweep/FieldPlots FastFrequencySweep/FieldPlots FastFrequencySweep/FieldPlots FastFrequencySweep/FieldPlots
TrainingManual
8.3-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
DesignReview
PortSize/Type=???
FreeSpace=???
PortSize/Type
Sincethetraceisinternaltothemodel,letsusealumpedgapsourceport
TraceThickness/MaterialProperties
Tostartwithperfectconductor,letsmakeanengineeringassumptionthatthe
traceconductivitywillnothaveanimpactontheperformanceof thedevice.
Thiswillspeedupthesimulation.
FreeSpace
Sinceweareonlyinterestedinthemodesthatoccurbetweenthe ground
planes,wecanuseaPerfectHoropenboundarycondition.Weshould
expecttogetthesameanswerusinganOpen(PerfectH)or
matched(Radiation)boundary.Theradiationboundarytakeslongertosolve
sinceitrequiresacomplexsolve.
YoudoneedtousesomecautionwhenusingPerfectHboundary
conditionsinplaceofradiationboundaries.ThePerfectHand
SymmetryPerfectHaremathematicallyequivalent.Thereforeifyou
aresimulatingasubsectionofalargergeometry,youhavethe
potentialtocreatemodesthataretheresultoftheboundarycondition
ornon-physical.Inourexample,thePerfectHisappliedtotheoutside
ofthemodelandnotalonganysymmetryplanes.
ItshouldbenotedthatthePerfectHboundaryconditioncanbeused
withtheDrivenandEigenmodesolver.TheRadiationboundaryis
onlysupportedbytheDrivenSolution.
TrainingManual
8.3-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GettingStarted
TrainingManual
8.3-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
8.3-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Creatingthe3DModel
2. SetModelUnits:
TrainingManual
8.3-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
rectangle:
3. PressOK OK OK OK
CreateViaPad CreateViaPad CreateViaPad CreateViaPad
Tocreatetheviapad: Tocreatetheviapad: Tocreatetheviapad: Tocreatetheviapad:
X:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,PressEnter Enter Enter Enter key
dX:0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75,dY:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,PressEnter Enter Enter Enter
dX:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dY:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ:0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1,PressEnter Enter Enter Enter
1. SelecttheAttribute Attribute Attribute Attribute tabfromProperties Properties Properties Properties window.
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Via_pad Via_pad Via_pad Via_pad
3. PressOK OK OK OK
TrainingManual
8.3-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GrouptheTrace&ViaPad GrouptheTrace&ViaPad GrouptheTrace&ViaPad GrouptheTrace&ViaPad
Todrawtheground: Todrawtheground: Todrawtheground: Todrawtheground:
rectangle:
TosettheAttribute TosettheAttribute TosettheAttribute TosettheAttribute
3. SetTransparent Transparent Transparent Transparentlevelto0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
4. PressOK OK OK OK
Tofittheview Tofittheview Tofittheview Tofittheview:
TrainingManual
8.3-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateAnti CreateAnti CreateAnti CreateAnti- -- -Pad Pad Pad Pad
Tocreatetheanti Tocreatetheanti Tocreatetheanti Tocreatetheanti- -- -pad: pad: pad: pad:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Antipad Antipad Antipad Antipad
3. PressOK OK OK OK
SelectGround&Antipad: SelectGround&Antipad: SelectGround&Antipad: SelectGround&Antipad:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Ground Ground Ground Ground ,Antipad Antipad Antipad Antipad
Tocompletethegroundobject: Tocompletethegroundobject: Tocompletethegroundobject: Tocompletethegroundobject:
2. SubtractWindow
ToolParts:Antipad Antipad Antipad Antipad
TrainingManual
8.3-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
SelectthemenuitemModeler>GridPlane>XZ Modeler>GridPlane>XZ Modeler>GridPlane>XZ Modeler>GridPlane>XZ
TrainingManual
8.3-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
rectangle:
Tozoomin Tozoomin Tozoomin Tozoomin
TrainingManual
8.3-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. ConductingObject:Via_pad(orTrace) Via_pad(orTrace) Via_pad(orTrace) Via_pad(orTrace)
3. ReferenceConductors:Ground Ground Ground Ground
4. ClickOK OK OK OK
3. Changethe Name Name Name NameintheProperties Properties Properties Properties window:p1 p1 p1 p1
TrainingManual
8.3-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
DuplicateObjects DuplicateObjects DuplicateObjects DuplicateObjects
Toduplicatetheexistingobjects: Toduplicatetheexistingobjects: Toduplicatetheexistingobjects: Toduplicatetheexistingobjects:
1. Axis:X XX X
2. Angle:180 180 180 180
TrainingManual
8.3-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
SelectthemenuitemModeler>GridPlane>XY Modeler>GridPlane>XY Modeler>GridPlane>XY Modeler>GridPlane>XY
CreateVia CreateVia CreateVia CreateVia
Tocreatethevia: Tocreatethevia: Tocreatethevia: Tocreatethevia:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Via Via Via Via
3. PresstheOK OK OK OKbutton
TrainingManual
8.3-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateGroundVia CreateGroundVia CreateGroundVia CreateGroundVia
TocreatetheGroundVia: TocreatetheGroundVia: TocreatetheGroundVia: TocreatetheGroundVia:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Via_GND Via_GND Via_GND Via_GND
3. PresstheOK OK OK OK button
TrainingManual
8.3-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateBoard CreateBoard CreateBoard CreateBoard
Tocreatetheboard: Tocreatetheboard: Tocreatetheboard: Tocreatetheboard:
rectangle:
TosettheAttribute: TosettheAttribute: TosettheAttribute: TosettheAttribute:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Board Board Board Board
3. SetTransparent Transparent Transparent Transparent to0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
4. PresstheOK OK OK OK
rectangle:
3. 3. 3. 3. DisplayWireframe DisplayWireframe DisplayWireframe DisplayWireframe Checked Checked Checked Checked
TrainingManual
8.3-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AssignPerfectH/NaturalBoundaries AssignPerfectH/NaturalBoundaries AssignPerfectH/NaturalBoundaries AssignPerfectH/NaturalBoundaries
ToassignPerfectHBoundary ToassignPerfectHBoundary ToassignPerfectHBoundary ToassignPerfectHBoundary
1. Selectthemenuitem HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>PerfectH HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>PerfectH HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>PerfectH HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>PerfectH
TrainingManual
8.3-18
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AnalysisSetup
MaximumDeltaS:0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02
OrderofBasisfunction:ZeroOrder ZeroOrder ZeroOrder ZeroOrder
2. EditSweepWindow:
Count:991 :991 :991 :991
TrainingManual
8.3-19
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:hfss_nonidealgnd hfss_nonidealgnd hfss_nonidealgnd hfss_nonidealgnd
Analyze
Manager.
1. Click
TrainingManual
8.3-20
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
theconvergencedata.
TrainingManual
8.3-21
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
2. ContextWindow:
Solution:Setup1:AdaptivePass Setup1:AdaptivePass Setup1:AdaptivePass Setup1:AdaptivePass
3. TraceWindow
3. Quantity:St((Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2) St((Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2) St((Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2) St((Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2)
1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00
Pass
-12.00
-10.00
-8.00
-6.00
-4.00
-2.00
0.00
Y
1
XY Plot 1
Curve Info
dB(St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1))
Setup1 : AdaptivePass
Freq='10GHz'
Freq='10GHz'
TrainingManual
8.3-22
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Create Create Create CreateTerminal Terminal Terminal Terminal SPlotvsFrequency SPlotvsFrequency SPlotvsFrequency SPlotvsFrequency
2. ContextWindow:
3. TraceWindow
2. Quantity:St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2) St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2) St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2) St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2)
ToadddatamarkertothePlots ToadddatamarkertothePlots ToadddatamarkertothePlots ToadddatamarkertothePlots
1. SelectthemenuitemReport2D>Marker>AddMarker Report2D>Marker>AddMarker Report2D>Marker>AddMarker Report2D>Marker>AddMarker
2. Movecursortotheresonantpointsontheplottingcurveandclicktheleft
mousebutton
3. Whenyouarefinishedplacingmarkersattheresonances,PressESC ESC ESC ESCOr
right-clickthemouseandselectExitMarkerMode ExitMarkerMode ExitMarkerMode ExitMarkerMode.
0.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00
Freq [GHz]
-50.00
-40.00
-30.00
-20.00
-10.00
0.00
Y
1
XY Plot 2
m1
m2
m3
m4
m5
m6
Curve Info
Setup1 : Sweep1
Setup1 : Sweep1
Name X Y
m1 1.7700 -40.0894
m2 4.2900 -36.3371
m3 5.2500 -49.4293
m4 7.1200 -45.5499
m5 7.5100 -46.0011
m6 8.0900 -21.9133
TrainingManual
8.3-23
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
FieldOverlays
SelecttheRelativeCSXYPlane SelecttheRelativeCSXYPlane SelecttheRelativeCSXYPlane SelecttheRelativeCSXYPlane
1. UsingtheModelTree,expandPlanes Planes Planes Planes
1. SelectRelativeCS3XY RelativeCS3XY RelativeCS3XY RelativeCS3XY
Note: Note: Note: Note: RelativeCS3XY RelativeCS3XY RelativeCS3XY RelativeCS3XY planeistheplanebetweenthetwoGround
planes.
2. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E>Mag_E HFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E>Mag_E HFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E>Mag_E HFSS>Fields>PlotFields>E>Mag_E
2. IntrinsicVariables:Freq:1.9GHz;Phase:0deg Freq:1.9GHz;Phase:0deg Freq:1.9GHz;Phase:0deg Freq:1.9GHz;Phase:0deg
4. InVolume:Board Board Board Board
3. E-FieldWindow:
2. Min: 5 55 5
3. Max: 3500 3500 3500 3500
2. ClickthePlots Plots Plots Plots Tab
1. ScalarPlot:Fringe Fringe Fringe Fringe
TrainingManual
8.3-24
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateFieldOverlay CreateFieldOverlay CreateFieldOverlay CreateFieldOverlay AdditionalFrequencyPoints AdditionalFrequencyPoints AdditionalFrequencyPoints AdditionalFrequencyPoints
TomodifytheFrequencyofafieldplot: TomodifytheFrequencyofafieldplot: TomodifytheFrequencyofafieldplot: TomodifytheFrequencyofafieldplot:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Fields>ModifyPlot HFSS>Fields>ModifyPlot HFSS>Fields>ModifyPlot HFSS>Fields>ModifyPlot
2. SelectFieldPlotWindow:
1. Select:Mag_E1 Mag_E1 Mag_E1 Mag_E1
3. ModifyFieldPlotWindow
1. IntrinsicVariables:Freq Freq Freq Freq: 7.1GHz 7.1GHz 7.1GHz 7.1GHz
TrainingManual
8.4-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
ReturnPath
Thisexampleisintendedtoshowyouhowtocreate,simulate,andanalyzethe
returnpathexamplesusedintheBoundary/ExcitationsOverviewfortheAnsoft
HFSSDesignEnvironment.
TrainingManual
8.4-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
GettingStarted
TrainingManual
8.4-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
TrainingManual
8.4-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
Creatingthe3DModel
2. SetModelUnits:
TrainingManual
8.4-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
CreateConductor CreateConductor CreateConductor CreateConductor
Tocreatetheconductor: Tocreatetheconductor: Tocreatetheconductor: Tocreatetheconductor:
1. SelectthemenuitemDraw>Line Draw>Line Draw>Line Draw>Line
X:- -- -1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0,Y:- -- -0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24,Z:1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1, PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
X:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y:- -- -0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24,Z:1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1, PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
7. ClicktheOK OK OK OK buttonwhenthePropertiesdialogappears
Tocreateconductorprofile: Tocreateconductorprofile: Tocreateconductorprofile: Tocreateconductorprofile:
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheoppositecornerofthebaserectangle:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:Cond Cond Cond Cond
ToSweeptheprofile: ToSweeptheprofile: ToSweeptheprofile: ToSweeptheprofile:
3. ClicktheOK OK OK OK buttonwhentheSweepalongpathdialogappears
Orclicktheicononthetoolbar
TrainingManual
8.4-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
DuplicateConductor DuplicateConductor DuplicateConductor DuplicateConductor
Toselecttheobject: Toselecttheobject: Toselecttheobject: Toselecttheobject:
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible. . . .
Toduplicatetheconductor: Toduplicatetheconductor: Toduplicatetheconductor: Toduplicatetheconductor:
1. Selectthemenuitem,Edit>Duplicate>AlongLine Edit>Duplicate>AlongLine Edit>Duplicate>AlongLine Edit>Duplicate>AlongLine.
1. ClickClose Close Close Close inMeasureDataWindow
2. FirstPoint:X:0.0, :0.0, :0.0, :0.0,Y:0.0, :0.0, :0.0, :0.0,Z:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
3. SecondPoint:dX:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0,dY:0.24 :0.24 :0.24 :0.24,dZ:0.0 :0.0 :0.0 :0.0PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
6. ClickOK OK OK OKtoexitfrompropertywindow
MirrorConductor MirrorConductor MirrorConductor MirrorConductor
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible. . . .
2. SelectthemenuitemModeler>Boolean>Unite Modeler>Boolean>Unite Modeler>Boolean>Unite Modeler>Boolean>Unite
TrainingManual
8.4-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
rectangle:
dX:4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0,dY:2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0,dZ:-0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:GND GND GND GND
MirrorGround MirrorGround MirrorGround MirrorGround
ToselecttheobjectGND: ToselecttheobjectGND: ToselecttheobjectGND: ToselecttheobjectGND:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:GND GND GND GND
Tomirrortheground: Tomirrortheground: Tomirrortheground: Tomirrortheground:
TrainingManual
8.4-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
1. Selectthemenuitem3DModeler>GridPlane>YZ 3DModeler>GridPlane>YZ 3DModeler>GridPlane>YZ 3DModeler>GridPlane>YZ
X:5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0,Y:-0.06 0.06 0.06 0.06,Z:0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
rectangle:
TrainingManual
8.4-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
2. PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
2. ConductingObject:Cond Cond Cond Cond
3. ReferenceConductors:GND_1 GND_1 GND_1 GND_1
4. ClickOK OK OK OK
3. TheProperties Properties Properties Properties window:Name Name Name Name :p1 p1 p1 p1
TrainingManual
8.4-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
CreateSource2 CreateSource2 CreateSource2 CreateSource2
ToselectSource: ToselectSource: ToselectSource: ToselectSource:
Tomirrorthesource: Tomirrorthesource: Tomirrorthesource: Tomirrorthesource:
ToselectSource: ToselectSource: ToselectSource: ToselectSource:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Source_1 Source_1 Source_1 Source_1
Tomirrorthesource: Tomirrorthesource: Tomirrorthesource: Tomirrorthesource:
TrainingManual
8.4-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
AssignExcitation(Cont.) AssignExcitation(Cont.) AssignExcitation(Cont.) AssignExcitation(Cont.)
Note: Note: Note: Note:Althoughportshavebeenduplicated,terminalsneedtobeassignedusing
AutoAssignTerminals
AutoAssignTerminalsforPort2 AutoAssignTerminalsforPort2 AutoAssignTerminalsforPort2 AutoAssignTerminalsforPort2
1. Selectp2 p2 p2 p2 fromtheprojectmanager projectmanager projectmanager projectmanager window.
2. Rightclickp2.ChooseAutoassignTerminals AutoassignTerminals AutoassignTerminals AutoassignTerminals
4. ReferenceConductors:GND GND GND GND
5. ClickOK OK OK OK
AutoAssignTerminalsforPort3 AutoAssignTerminalsforPort3 AutoAssignTerminalsforPort3 AutoAssignTerminalsforPort3
1. Selectp3 p3 p3 p3 fromtheprojectmanager projectmanager projectmanager projectmanager window.
2. Rightclickp3.ChooseAutoassignTerminals AutoassignTerminals AutoassignTerminals AutoassignTerminals
4. ReferenceConductors:GND GND GND GND
5. ClickOK OK OK OK
TrainingManual
8.4-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
1. MaterialName:My_FR4 My_FR4 My_FR4 My_FR4
TrainingManual
8.4-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
1. Selectthemenuitem3DModeler>GridPlane>XY 3DModeler>GridPlane>XY 3DModeler>GridPlane>XY 3DModeler>GridPlane>XY
Tocreatesubstrate: Tocreatesubstrate: Tocreatesubstrate: Tocreatesubstrate:
X: - -- -5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0,Y: - -- -1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0,Z: 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0,Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheoppositecornerofthebaserectangle:
dX: 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0,dY: 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0,dZ: 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.1,Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
1. Movetheslidebarto0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8(Opaque=0,Transparency=1)
MirrorSubstrate MirrorSubstrate MirrorSubstrate MirrorSubstrate
Toselecttheobjectsubstrate: Toselecttheobjectsubstrate: Toselecttheobjectsubstrate: Toselecttheobjectsubstrate:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Substrate Substrate Substrate Substrate
Tomirrortheground: Tomirrortheground: Tomirrortheground: Tomirrortheground:
X: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Y: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,PressEnter Enter Enter Enter
dX: 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0,dY: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dZ: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,
3. Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
TrainingManual
8.4-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
rectangle:
1. Movetheslidebarto1 1 1 1(Opaque=0,Transparency=1)
AssignRadiation AssignRadiation AssignRadiation AssignRadiation
ToassignRadiationBoundary ToassignRadiationBoundary ToassignRadiationBoundary ToassignRadiationBoundary
1. Selectthemenuitem HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Radiation HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Radiation HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Radiation HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>Radiation
TrainingManual
8.4-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
TrainingManual
8.4-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
AnalysisSetup
MaximumDeltaS:0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03
LambdaTarget: : : :UseDefaultValue: Checked Checked Checked Checked
OrderofBasisfunction:Zero-Order
2. EditSweepWindow:
Count:301 :301 :301 :301
TrainingManual
8.4-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:hfss_returnpath hfss_returnpath hfss_returnpath hfss_returnpath
Analyze
Manager.
TrainingManual
8.4-18
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
theconvergencedata.
TrainingManual
8.4-19
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
CreateReports
2. ContextWindow:
Solution:Setup1:AdaptivePass Setup1:AdaptivePass Setup1:AdaptivePass Setup1:AdaptivePass
3. TraceWindow
3. Quantity:St(Cond_T1,Cond_T1),St(Cond_T1,Cond_T2)and St(Cond_T1,Cond_T1),St(Cond_T1,Cond_T2)and St(Cond_T1,Cond_T1),St(Cond_T1,Cond_T2)and St(Cond_T1,Cond_T1),St(Cond_T1,Cond_T2)and
St(Cond_T1,Cond_T3) St(Cond_T1,Cond_T3) St(Cond_T1,Cond_T3) St(Cond_T1,Cond_T3)
1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00
Pass
-40.00
-35.00
-30.00
-25.00
-20.00
-15.00
-10.00
-5.00
0.00
Y
1
XY Plot 1
Curve Info
dB(St(Cond_T1,Cond_T1))
Freq='15.1GHz'
Freq='15.1GHz'
Freq='15.1GHz'
TrainingManual
8.4-20
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 12.00 14.00 16.00
Freq [GHz]
-40.00
-35.00
-30.00
-25.00
-20.00
-15.00
-10.00
-5.00
0.00
Y
1
XY Plot 2
Curve Info
Setup1 : Sweep1
Setup1 : Sweep1
Setup1 : Sweep1
CreateTerminal CreateTerminal CreateTerminal CreateTerminal S SS S- -- -ParameterPlotvsFrequency ParameterPlotvsFrequency ParameterPlotvsFrequency ParameterPlotvsFrequency
2. ContextWindow:
3. TraceWindow
2. Quantity:St(Cond_T1,Cond_T1),St(Cond_T1,Cond_T2)and St(Cond_T1,Cond_T1),St(Cond_T1,Cond_T2)and St(Cond_T1,Cond_T1),St(Cond_T1,Cond_T2)and St(Cond_T1,Cond_T1),St(Cond_T1,Cond_T2)and
St(Cond_T1,Cond_T3) St(Cond_T1,Cond_T3) St(Cond_T1,Cond_T3) St(Cond_T1,Cond_T3)
NoDC NoDC NoDC NoDC
TrainingManual
8.4-21
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
ReturnPath AddaDCReturnPath
Wewillcontinueourinvestigationbyaddingaconnectionbetweenthetwo
groundplanes.TheDCreturnpathwillbethepathofleastresistance.
DC DC DC DC
TrainingManual
8.4-22
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
CopytheDesign CopytheDesign CopytheDesign CopytheDesign
Tocopytheentiredesign: Tocopytheentiredesign: Tocopytheentiredesign: Tocopytheentiredesign:
1. Usingtheprojectmanager,
1. Right-clickonHFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1,andchooseCopy Copy Copy Copy
1. Right-clickon hfss_returnpath hfss_returnpath hfss_returnpath hfss_returnpath,andchoosePaste Paste Paste Paste
Openthe3DModelEditor Openthe3DModelEditor Openthe3DModelEditor Openthe3DModelEditor
Toopenthe3DModelEditor: Toopenthe3DModelEditor: Toopenthe3DModelEditor: Toopenthe3DModelEditor:
1. Right-clickonHFSSDesign2 HFSSDesign2 HFSSDesign2 HFSSDesign2
andchoose3DModelEditor 3DModelEditor 3DModelEditor 3DModelEditor
Choosepec pec pec pecinMaterialstoolbar
TrainingManual
8.4-23
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
CreateDCPath CreateDCPath CreateDCPath CreateDCPath
TocreatetheDCpath: TocreatetheDCpath: TocreatetheDCpath: TocreatetheDCpath:
rectangle:
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:DCPath DCPath DCPath DCPath
TrainingManual
8.4-24
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
1. InanAnsoftHFSSwindow,selectthemenuitemFile>Save File>Save File>Save File>Save
Analyze
ToOpenAllExistingReport ToOpenAllExistingReport ToOpenAllExistingReport ToOpenAllExistingReport
Toopenallreports: Toopenallreports: Toopenallreports: Toopenallreports:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Results>OpenAllReports HFSS>Results>OpenAllReports HFSS>Results>OpenAllReports HFSS>Results>OpenAllReports
0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 12.00 14.00 16.00
Freq [GHz]
-45.00
-40.00
-35.00
-30.00
-25.00
-20.00
-15.00
-10.00
-5.00
0.00
Y
1
XY Plot 2
Curve Info
Setup1 : Sweep1
Setup1 : Sweep1
Setup1 : Sweep1
TrainingManual
8.4-25
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
ReturnPath AddaRFReturnPath
WewillcontinueourinvestigationbyaddinganRFreturnpathbetweenthetwo
groundplanes.TheRFreturnpathwillbethepathofleastinductance.
CopytheDesign CopytheDesign CopytheDesign CopytheDesign
Tocopytheentiredesign: Tocopytheentiredesign: Tocopytheentiredesign: Tocopytheentiredesign:
1. Right-clickonHFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1 HFSSDesign1,andchooseCopy Copy Copy Copy
1. Right-clickon hfss_returnpath hfss_returnpath hfss_returnpath hfss_returnpath,andchoosePaste Paste Paste Paste
Openthe3DModelEditor Openthe3DModelEditor Openthe3DModelEditor Openthe3DModelEditor
Toopenthe3DModelEditor: Toopenthe3DModelEditor: Toopenthe3DModelEditor: Toopenthe3DModelEditor:
ClickonHFSSDesign3 HFSSDesign3 HFSSDesign3 HFSSDesign3intheprojectmanager
1. Usingthe3DModelerMaterialstoolbar,choosepec pec pec pec
RFReturnPath RFReturnPath RFReturnPath RFReturnPath
TrainingManual
8.4-26
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
CreateRFPath CreateRFPath CreateRFPath CreateRFPath
TocreatetheRFpath: TocreatetheRFpath: TocreatetheRFpath: TocreatetheRFpath:
1. SelectthemenuitemDraw>Line Draw>Line Draw>Line Draw>Line
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheradialpoint:
X:- -- -0.972 0.972 0.972 0.972,Y:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Z:1.072 1.072 1.072 1.072, PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
Tocreatetheprofile: Tocreatetheprofile: Tocreatetheprofile: Tocreatetheprofile:
rectangle:
dX:0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,dY:0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12,dZ:-0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02,PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
4. ClickOK OK OK OKbutton
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofName Name Name Name type:RFPath RFPath RFPath RFPath
ToSweeptheprofile: ToSweeptheprofile: ToSweeptheprofile: ToSweeptheprofile:
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:Polyline2,RFPath Polyline2,RFPath Polyline2,RFPath Polyline2,RFPath
4. ClicktheOK OK OK OK buttonwhentheSweepalongpathdialogappears
TrainingManual
8.4-27
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
MirrorConductor MirrorConductor MirrorConductor MirrorConductor
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:RFPath RFPath RFPath RFPath
1. Selecttheobjectsnamed:RFPath,RFPath_1 RFPath,RFPath_1 RFPath,RFPath_1 RFPath,RFPath_1
3. Selectthemenuitem,3DModeler>Boolean>Unite 3DModeler>Boolean>Unite 3DModeler>Boolean>Unite 3DModeler>Boolean>Unite
TrainingManual
8.4-28
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example ReturnPath
1. InanAnsoftHFSSwindow,selectthemenuitemFile>Save File>Save File>Save File>Save
Analyze
ToOpenAllExistingReport ToOpenAllExistingReport ToOpenAllExistingReport ToOpenAllExistingReport
Toopenallreports: Toopenallreports: Toopenallreports: Toopenallreports:
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Results>OpenAllReports HFSS>Results>OpenAllReports HFSS>Results>OpenAllReports HFSS>Results>OpenAllReports
0.00 5.00 10.00 15.00
Freq [GHz]
-60.00
-50.00
-40.00
-30.00
-20.00
-10.00
0.00
Y
1
XY Plot 2
CurveInfo
Setup1 : Sweep1
Setup1 : Sweep1
Setup1 : Sweep1
TrainingManual
9.1-1
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Example On-ChipSpiralInductor
On On On On- -- -ChipPassiveExample ChipPassiveExample ChipPassiveExample ChipPassiveExample
Thisexampleisintendedtoshowyouhowtocreate,simulate,andanalyzea2.5
turnspiralinductorusingtheAnsoftHFSSDesignEnvironment.
TrainingManual
9.1-2
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
GettingStarted
TrainingManual
9.1-3
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
9.1-4
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Creatingthe3DModel
2. SetModelUnits:
1. SelectUnits:um um um um
1. FortheMaterialName MaterialName MaterialName MaterialName type:My_Sub My_Sub My_Sub My_Sub
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofRelativePermittivity RelativePermittivity RelativePermittivity RelativePermittivitytype:11.9 11.9 11.9 11.9
3. FortheValue Value Value ValueofBulkConductivity BulkConductivity BulkConductivity BulkConductivitytype:10 10 10 10
TrainingManual
9.1-5
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
X: - -- -270.0 270.0 270.0 270.0,Y: - -- -270.0 270.0 270.0 270.0, Z: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0,Pressthe Enter Enter Enter Enterkey
3.Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheoppositecornerofthebox:
1. SelecttheAttribute Attribute Attribute AttributetabfromtheProperties Properties Properties Propertieswindows
2. FortheValue Value Value ValueofName Name Name Nametype:Sub Sub Sub Sub
Tofittheview Tofittheview Tofittheview Tofittheview
Setthedefaultmaterial: Setthedefaultmaterial: Setthedefaultmaterial: Setthedefaultmaterial:
1. FortheMaterialName MaterialName MaterialName MaterialName type:My_Oxide My_Oxide My_Oxide My_Oxide
TrainingManual
9.1-6
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateOxide CreateOxide CreateOxide CreateOxide
Tocreatetheoxidelayer: Tocreatetheoxidelayer: Tocreatetheoxidelayer: Tocreatetheoxidelayer:
2. FortheValue Value Value ValueofName Name Name Nametype:Oxide Oxide Oxide Oxide
1. FortheMaterialName MaterialName MaterialName MaterialName type:My_Pass My_Pass My_Pass My_Pass
TrainingManual
9.1-7
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreatePassivation CreatePassivation CreatePassivation CreatePassivation
Tocreatethepassivationlayer: Tocreatethepassivationlayer: Tocreatethepassivationlayer: Tocreatethepassivationlayer:
2. FortheValue Value Value ValueofName Name Name Nametype:Pass Pass Pass Pass
1. UsingtheModelerMaterialstoolbar,choosevacuum vacuum vacuum vacuum
CreateAirBox CreateAirBox CreateAirBox CreateAirBox
Tocreatetheairbox: Tocreatetheairbox: Tocreatetheairbox: Tocreatetheairbox:
2. FortheValue Value Value ValueofName Name Name Nametype:Air Air Air Air
TrainingManual
9.1-8
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. SelectObjectDialog
SelecttheObjectnamed:Air Air Air Air
TocreatearadiationBoundary: TocreatearadiationBoundary: TocreatearadiationBoundary: TocreatearadiationBoundary:
2. RadiationBoundaryWindow
1.SelectthemenuitemDraw>Rectangular Draw>Rectangular Draw>Rectangular Draw>Rectangular
2. FortheValue Value Value ValueofName Name Name Nametype:Ground Ground Ground Ground
TrainingManual
9.1-9
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
Toselecttheground Toselecttheground Toselecttheground Toselecttheground
1. Selectthemenuitem Edit>Select>ByName Edit>Select>ByName Edit>Select>ByName Edit>Select>ByName
1. Selecttheobjectnamed:Ground Ground Ground Ground
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Boundaries>Assign>PerfectE HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>PerfectE HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>PerfectE HFSS>Boundaries>Assign>PerfectE
HideDielectrics HideDielectrics HideDielectrics HideDielectrics
Tohidethedielectrics: Tohidethedielectrics: Tohidethedielectrics: Tohidethedielectrics:
1. SelectthemenuitemEdit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible Edit>SelectAllVisible
2. SelectthemenuitemView>HideSelection>AllViews View>HideSelection>AllViews View>HideSelection>AllViews View>HideSelection>AllViews
1. FortheMaterialName MaterialName MaterialName MaterialName type:My_Met My_Met My_Met My_Met
2. FortheValue Value Value Value ofBulkConductivity BulkConductivity BulkConductivity BulkConductivitytype:2.8e7 2.8e7 2.8e7 2.8e7
SelectthemenuitemModeler>CoordinateSystems>Create>RelativeCS> Modeler>CoordinateSystems>Create>RelativeCS> Modeler>CoordinateSystems>Create>RelativeCS> Modeler>CoordinateSystems>Create>RelativeCS>
Offset Offset Offset Offset
Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheorigin
1. 1. 1. 1. X:0.0,Y:0.0,Z:304.8, X:0.0,Y:0.0,Z:304.8, X:0.0,Y:0.0,Z:304.8, X:0.0,Y:0.0,Z:304.8, PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter key
TrainingManual
9.1-10
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
9.1-11
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
9.1-12
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
9.1-13
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
9.1-14
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
9.1-15
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
9.1-16
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
9.1-17
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
9.1-18
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. 1. 1. 1. X:142.0,Y:7.5,Z:1.0, X:142.0,Y:7.5,Z:1.0, X:142.0,Y:7.5,Z:1.0, X:142.0,Y:7.5,Z:1.0, PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter Key
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheoppositecornerof thebase
rectangle
1. 1. 1. 1. dX: dX: dX: dX:- -- -15.0,dY: 15.0,dY: 15.0,dY: 15.0,dY:- -- -15.0,dZ:0.0, 15.0,dZ:0.0, 15.0,dZ:0.0, 15.0,dZ:0.0, PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter Key
1. SelecttheAttribute Attribute Attribute AttributetabfromtheProperties Properties Properties Propertieswindow
2. FortheValue Value Value ValueofName Name Name Nametype:Source1 Source1 Source1 Source1
1. Selecttheobjectnamed:Source1 Source1 Source1 Source1
Note: Note: Note: Note: YoucanalsoselecttheobjectfomtheModelTree
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Excitations>Assign>LumpedPort, HFSS>Excitations>Assign>LumpedPort, HFSS>Excitations>Assign>LumpedPort, HFSS>Excitations>Assign>LumpedPort,a
windowappears,highlightRing Ring Ring Ring andclickAdd==>> Add==>> Add==>> Add==>>,thenclickOK OK OK OK.The
lumpedportandterminalareautomaticallyassigned.
TrainingManual
9.1-19
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AssignExcitation(Continued) AssignExcitation(Continued) AssignExcitation(Continued) AssignExcitation(Continued)
3. Changethe name name name nameinthe
Properties Properties Properties Properties window:p1 p1 p1 p1
Setthenameforthepin Setthenameforthepin Setthenameforthepin Setthenameforthepin
2. Expandp1 p1 p1 p1,highlightSource1_T1 Source1_T1 Source1_T1 Source1_T1
Properties Properties Properties Properties window:1 11 1
TrainingManual
9.1-20
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
1. 1. 1. 1. X:131.0,Y:7.5,Z:1.0, X:131.0,Y:7.5,Z:1.0, X:131.0,Y:7.5,Z:1.0, X:131.0,Y:7.5,Z:1.0, PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter Key
3. Usingthecoordinateentryfields,entertheoppositecornerof thebase
rectangle
1. 1. 1. 1. dX:15.0,dY: dX:15.0,dY: dX:15.0,dY: dX:15.0,dY:- -- -15.0,dZ:0.0, 15.0,dZ:0.0, 15.0,dZ:0.0, 15.0,dZ:0.0, PresstheEnter Enter Enter Enter Key
1. SelecttheAttribute Attribute Attribute AttributetabfromtheProperties Properties Properties Propertieswindow
2. FortheValue Value Value ValueofName Name Name Nametype:Source2 Source2 Source2 Source2
1. Selecttheobjectnamed:Source2 Source2 Source2 Source2
Note: Note: Note: Note: YoucanalsoselecttheobjectfomtheModelTree
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Excitations>Assign>LumpedPort, HFSS>Excitations>Assign>LumpedPort, HFSS>Excitations>Assign>LumpedPort, HFSS>Excitations>Assign>LumpedPort,a
windowappears,andclickOK OK OK OK.Thelumpedportandterminalare
automaticallyassigned.
TrainingManual
9.1-21
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AssignExcitation(Continued) AssignExcitation(Continued) AssignExcitation(Continued) AssignExcitation(Continued)
Properties Properties Properties Properties window:p2 p2 p2 p2
Setthenameforthepin Setthenameforthepin Setthenameforthepin Setthenameforthepin
2. Expandp1 p1 p1 p1,highlightSource1_T2 Source1_T2 Source1_T2 Source1_T2
Properties Properties Properties Properties window:2 22 2
TrainingManual
9.1-22
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
ShowAll ShowAll ShowAll ShowAll
ToShowallobjects ToShowallobjects ToShowallobjects ToShowallobjects
1. SelectthemenuitemView>ShowAll>AllViews View>ShowAll>AllViews View>ShowAll>AllViews View>ShowAll>AllViews
boundary.
TrainingManual
9.1-23
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
AnalysisSetup
MaximumDeltaS:0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02
Orderofbasesfunction:Zeroorder. :Zeroorder. :Zeroorder. :Zeroorder.
2. EditSweepWindow:
2. FrequencySetup:
ErrorTolerance:0.5% :0.5% :0.5% :0.5%
TrainingManual
9.1-24
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
2. FromtheSaveAs SaveAs SaveAs SaveAswindow,typetheFilename:hfss_spiral_inductor hfss_spiral_inductor hfss_spiral_inductor hfss_spiral_inductor
Analyze
Note: Note: Note: Note: Toviewanyerrorsorwarningmessages,seetheMessage
Manager.
1. SelectthemenuitemHFSS>AnalyzeAll HFSS>AnalyzeAll HFSS>AnalyzeAll HFSS>AnalyzeAllOrclicktheicon
onthetoolbar.
TrainingManual
9.1-25
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
theconvergencedata.
TrainingManual
9.1-26
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
CreateReports
CreateDifferentialPairS CreateDifferentialPairS CreateDifferentialPairS CreateDifferentialPairS- -- -ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot ParameterPlot
2. ContextWindow:
3. TraceWindow
2. Quantity:St(1,1),St(2,1) St(1,1),St(2,1) St(1,1),St(2,1) St(1,1),St(2,1)
TrainingManual
9.1-27
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
0.00 5.00 10.00 15.00 20.00
Freq [GHz]
0.00
1.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
7.00
8.00
9.00
Y
1
Q Plot
Curve Info
abs(Q11)
Setup1 : Sweep1
abs(Q22)
Setup1 : Sweep1
CustomEquations CustomEquations CustomEquations CustomEquations OutputVariables OutputVariables OutputVariables OutputVariables
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Results>CreateTerminalSolutionDataReport> HFSS>Results>CreateTerminalSolutionDataReport> HFSS>Results>CreateTerminalSolutionDataReport> HFSS>Results>CreateTerminalSolutionDataReport>
TraceWindow
1. 1. 1. 1. ClicktheOutputVariables OutputVariables OutputVariables OutputVariablesbutton
2. OutputVariablesdialog
1. Name:Q11 Q11 Q11 Q11
2. Expression:
1. Category:TerminalYParameters TerminalYParameters TerminalYParameters TerminalYParameters
2. Quantity:Yt(1,1) Yt(1,1) Yt(1,1) Yt(1,1)
4. ClicktheInsertintoExpression InsertintoExpression InsertintoExpression InsertintoExpressionbutton
5. Type:/ // /
7. Function:re re re re
4. RepeatforQ22 Q22 Q22 Q22,byreplacingYt(1,1) Yt(1,1) Yt(1,1) Yt(1,1) withYt(2,2) Yt(2,2) Yt(2,2) Yt(2,2)
5. ClickY YY Y tab
Quantity:Q11,Q22 Q11,Q22 Q11,Q22 Q11,Q22
Function:abs abs abs abs
ClicktheNewReport NewReport NewReport NewReport button
6. Clickthe Close Close Close Close button
TrainingManual
9.1-28
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
( ) ( ) ( )
2 2
1 , 1 ( Yt 1 , 1 ( Yt * * * 2 /( )) 1 , 1 ( Yt ( 11 im re f pi im L + =
10.1-
28
CreateReports(Continued)
CustomEquations CustomEquations CustomEquations CustomEquations OutputVariables OutputVariables OutputVariables OutputVariables
SelectthemenuitemHFSS>Results>CreateTerminalSolutionDataReport> HFSS>Results>CreateTerminalSolutionDataReport> HFSS>Results>CreateTerminalSolutionDataReport> HFSS>Results>CreateTerminalSolutionDataReport>
TraceWindow
1. 1. 1. 1. ClicktheOutputVariables OutputVariables OutputVariables OutputVariablesbutton
2. OutputVariablesdialog
1. Name:L11 L11 L11 L11
2. Expression:
5. Type:*(- -- -1)/(2*pi*freq*( 1)/(2*pi*freq*( 1)/(2*pi*freq*( 1)/(2*pi*freq*(
10. Type:)* )* )* )*
15. Type:)+ )+ )+ )+
20. Type:)* )* )* )*
25. Type:)) )) )) ))
5. ClickY YY Y tab
Quantity:L11 L11 L11 L11
Function:none none none none
ClicktheNewReport NewReport NewReport NewReport button
6. Clickthe Close Close Close Close button
TrainingManual
9.1-29
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
9.1-30
February20,2009
Inventory#002704
TrainingManual
9.1-31
February20,2009
Inventory#002704

HFSS User Guide

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

HFSS User Guide

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

1-1

ANSYS, Inc. Proprietary

is a registered trademark of SAS IP Inc.

BoundaryConditionsdefinethefieldbehavioracrossdiscontinuo BoundaryConditionsdefinethefieldbehavioracrossdiscontinuo BoundaryConditionsdefinethefieldbehavioracrossdiscontinuo BoundaryConditionsdefinethefieldbehavioracrossdiscontinuousboundaries usboundaries usboundaries usboundaries

Anda mungkin juga menyukai